SuperMap.Data

Defines altitude modes, which indicates how the altitudes of the 3D data should be understood and parsed. Currently, SuperMap supports ClampToGround (default), RelativeToGround, Absolute, RelativeToUnderground, RelativeUnderGround, AbsoluteUnderGround, ClampToObject, ModifyTerrain.

ClampToGround If this mode is applied, the objects will be displayed clamped on the ground. In another word, the objects will be directly placed close to the ground according to the longitude and latitude coordinates, with the altitude information totally ignored. It is the default altitude mode. When it's secondary altitude mode, it doesn't support setting maximum and minimum visible distance.

RelativeToGround Relative to ground is an altitude mode measuring altitude from the earth's surface. For example, if the altitudes of nodes on a line object are all 100 meters, these nodes will be placed at a distance of 100 meters relative to the earth's surface, as shown below.

Absolute The Absolute mode ignores the real terrain, that is, the ups and downs on the earth's surface. And an object in a layer is placed at a distance relative to the sea level if you specify the Absolute altitude mode for the layer. The altitude value of the object determines the vertical distance of the object from the sea level. For instance, if the nodes on the boundary of a region object have the altitude of 5, 800 meters, these nodes will be placed at a distance of 5, 800 meters from the sea level, as shown below.

RelativeUnderGround The benchmark is the terrain surface, in contrast to RelativeToGround altitude mode, it is used to browse underground scenes. When the altitude mode of the geometry object style is set as RelativeToUnderground (GeoStyle3D.AltitudeMode = AltitudeMode.RelativeUnderGround), and GeoStyle3D.BottomAltitude is set as a negative value, the geometry object associated can be put underground, set GeoStyle3D.BottomAltitude = -100 and the the object it put to 100 meters under the earth's face.

AbsoluteUnderGround This mode ignores the actual altitude of the terrain. The altitude is the height relative to the see level. When set as this mode, you can see the object underground by adjusting the transparency of the earth's surface or diging.

ClampToObject. This mode is used in the oblique photogrametry model scene to set the altitude mode for the regions. When setting the altitude mode of the selected vector regions to ClampToObject, if selecting the OSGB model, the vector regions will be attached to the model surface. When setting the altitude mode of the vector region layer to ClampToObject, the vector regions will be attached to the model surface.

Modifying terrain mode. It's used to modify the terrain, that is, to modify the terrain in current region area. When setting to this mode, the current terrain will be raised or lowered according to the altitude of the vector region itself.

This enumeration defines the type constant for the label map text offset mode.

Offset by fixed pixel size

Offset by label length

The Animation class.

Update the animation time.

how many seconds to move forward or backward. The unit is milliseconds.

Gets or sets the current time position of the animation. The unit is milliseconds.

Gets or sets the starting time position of the animation. The unit is milliseconds.

Gets or sets the ending time position of the animation. The unit is milliseconds.

Gets the length of the animation.

Gets or sets whether the current animation is enabled.

Gets or sets the play mode of the animation.

Gets or sets whether the play mode will automatically update time. True indicates to automatically update time, while false indicates the opposite.

The class defines the area unit type of region clip.

Metric unit, square millimeter.

Metric unit, square centimeter.

Metric unit, square decimeter.

Metric unit, square meter.

Metric unit, square kilometer.

Metric unit, hectare.

Metric unit, are.

The Chinese system of weights and measures unit, qing.

The Chinese system of weights and measures unit, mu.

Imperial units, square inch.

Imperial units, square feet.

Imperial units, square yard.

Imperial units, square miles.

Imperial units, acres.

Defines the field constant when update the dataset attribute.

Assign directly. If there are several objects, use the attribute of one object randomly. It supports all the types.

Average value. If there are several objects, use the average value. It supports numeric fields.

Sum. If there are several objects, use the sum value. It supports numeric fields.

Maximum value. If there are several objects, use the maximum value. It supports numeric fields.

Minimum value. If there are several objects, use the minimum value. It supports numeric fields.

Minimum ID. If there are several objects, use the minimum SMID. It supports all the types.

Maximum ID. If there are several objects, use the maximum SMID. It supports all the types.

Defines he particle system billboard constants.

Point billboard, all the particles on it face the camera.

The billboard rotates round a common direction to let itself face the camera as much as possible.

The billboards rotate round their Y-axis to let themselves face the camera as much as possible.

The BoundingBox class.

Initializes a new instance of the BoundingBox object with the specified lower corner and upper corner of the BoundingBox object.

the minimum point. The upper corner.

Outputs this BoundingBox object to a readable string, and the format is: (lower=x=,y=,z=,upper=x=,y=,z=).

Returns a string indicating this BoundingBox object.

Determines whether the two BoundingBox objects are equal. The compare result will show whether the value of Lower and Upper properties of the two BoundingBox objects are equal separately or not.

The specified BoundingBox object to be compared. The specified BoundingBox object to be compared. Returns true if the value of Lower and Upper properties of the two BoundingBox objects are equal separately; otherwise false.

Determines whether the two BoundingBox objects are not equal. The compare result will show whether the value of Lower and Upper properties of the two BoundingBox objects are not equal separately or not.

Tests whether the BoundingBox object and the specified object to be tested have the same lower corner and upper corner ( namely the Lower and Upper property).

The specified object to be tested. Returns true if the specified object to be tested is also a BoundingBox object and it has the same lower corner and upper corner ( namely the Lower and Upper property) with this BoundingBox object; otherwise false.

Tests whether the BoundingBox object and the specified BoundingBox object to be tested have the same lower corner and upper corner ( namely the Lower and Upper property).

The specified BoundingBox object to be tested. Returns true if the specified BoundingBox object to be tested has the same lower corner and upper corner ( namely the Lower and Upper property) with this BoundingBox object; otherwise false.

The Hash Code of the BoundingBox object.

Gets an empty BoundingBox object.

Gets whether the BoundingBox object is empty.

The default value is false.

Gets the lower corner of the BoundingBox object. That is the Point3D object which has the lowest value in the coordinate.

The default value is X=0, Y=0, Z=0 .

Gets the upper corner of the BoundingBox object. That is the Point3D object which has the largest value in the coordinate.

The default value is X=0, Y=0, Z=0 .

Gets the center point of the BoundingBox object.

The default value is X=0, Y=0, Z=0 .

Defines fill types for the region brush.

Solid.

Empty.

Vertical (|||| ).

Horizontal (-----).

Backslash (\\\\).

Slash (/////).

Cross (+++++ ).

Diagonal cross (xxxxx).

The BufferAnalystGeometry class.

Creates buffer according to the given geometric object and BufferAnalystParameter object.

The specified Geometry object. The specified BufferAnalystParameter object. Returns a region object buffer is successfully created. Returns a empty region object if failed.

Create buffer for the given geometry object with the BufferAnalystParameter object. You can specify the source coordinate system.

The specified Geometry object. The specified BufferAnalystParameter object. the specified source projected coordinate system. Returns a region object buffer is successfully created. Returns a empty region object if failed.

The BufferAnalystParameter class which provides the necessary parameters for the buffer analyst.

Initializes a new instance of the BufferAnalystParameter class.

Constructs a new object identical to the given BufferAnalystParameter object.

The given BufferAnalystParameter object.

Gets or sets the type of the end of the line buffer zone. Two types are provided which are Round and Flat. For the point or region buffer, only round type is supported.

The default value is BufferEndType.Round.

Gets or sets the count of segments of the semicircle line, that is, how many segments are used to simulate the semicircle line, the value must be greater than four.

The default value is 12.

Gets or sets the left buffer query distance.

The default value is null.

Gets or sets the right buffer query distance.

The default value is null.

Get or sets the unit for buffer analysis radius.

The default value is BufferRadiusUnit.Meter.

Defines the shape of the buffer at the line end points. Two types are provided for the line end points, they are Round and Flat.

Creates Round buffer, the end of a line will be in the shape of a half circle.

Creates Flat buffer will creates rectangular line endings with the middle of the short side of the rectangle coincident with the end point of the line.

Defines radius types for buffer analysis.

Millimeters.

Centimeters.

Decimeters.

Meters.

Kilometers.

Yards.

Inches.

Feet.

Miles.

Defines the calibration types for M values of the LineM objects.

Calibrate by distance. Calibrate by distance uses the distance between two points along the route to calculate the M value. The distance here is the Euclidean distance. A monotonous calibration result will got from this method, that means the result M values will be ascending or decreasing. As shown below:

The coordinates of the nodes and reference points on the route is as the following:
For node a1, calculate the distance (d1) between c1 and c2, then calculate the calibrate rate R1=d1/(200-100).
Then calculate the distance (d2) between a1 and c1, then d2/(100-Ma1)= R1, the M value after calibrate a1 is 100 - d2/R1;
Calibrate a2 with c1 and c2, calculate the distance (d3) between c1 and a2, then calculate the calibrate rate R2 = d1/(200-100), then d3/(Ma2-100)=R1, the M value of a2 is: 100+d3/R1;
Calibrate a3 with c2 and c3, calibrate a4 and a5 with c3 and c4. Note that the calibration rate is calculated with the closet two points;
The M values are shown below.

Calibrate by measure. Use the measure value of the reference on the route to calibrate the M value. This method can keep the changing rule of the measure values (such and ascending or decreasing unequally). This method is very suited for the minor calibrating of measure values when the ratio of the length of the route been calibrated to the measure value are different.

The table below shows the route nodes, the coordinate of the reference points and the reference point M value on the route.
Calibrate a1 with c1 and c2. Calculate the calibrate rate of the M value, R1=(37.5-10)/(200-100);
(10-0)/(100-Ma1)= R1, the M value is 100 - (10-0)/R1;
Calibrate a2 with c1 and c2. Calculate the calibrate rate R2 =(37.5-10)/(200-100), (20-10)/(Ma2-100)= R2, the M value after calculated is 100+(20-10)/R2；
Calibrate a2 with c1 and c2, calibrate a3 with c2 and c3, calibrate a4 and a5 with c3 and c4. Note that the calibration rate is calculated with the closet two points;
The M values are shown in the figure above.

Defines charset types.

Extended ASCII character set.

Eastern European character set.

Tai character set.

Russian character set.

Baltic character set.

Arabic character set.

Hebrew character set.

Vietnamese character set.

Turkish character set.

Greek character set.

Chinese character set used mostly in Hong Kong SAR and Taiwan.

Chinese character set used in mainland china.

Korean character set.

Another common spelling of the Korean character.

Japanese character set.

Characters used by Macintosh.

Symbol character set.

Extended ASCII character set.

ASCII character set.

Unicode Transformation Format-8. A variable-length character encoding for Unicode.

Unicode Transformation Format-7. A variable-length character encoding that was proposed for representing Unicode text using a stream of ASCII characters.

A character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by the default in the legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other western languages. Windows1252 (the Windows 9x standard for Western European languages).

Korean character set.

A computing industry standard for the consistent encoding, representing and handling of the text expressed in most of the world's writing systems.

Cyrillic (Windows).

IA5.

IA5 (German).

IA5 (Swedish).

IA5 (Norwegian).

The charset made by Japen after ISO2022JP put forward. It is used to combine Chinese, Japanese and Korean in one file.

Cloud license manager type, used to log in and out.

Use user name and password to log on the SuperMap Online license service, to get available license to local.

The user email. The user password. Whether to log on successfully.

Log out from the SuperMap Online license service.

The user email. The user password. Whether to log out successfully.

Cloud license logging process event, return the current logging progress and information

Cloud license logging successfully event

Cloud license logging process event parameter type

Cloud license logging process deputy

Cloud license logging process event parameter type

The enumeration defines whether a computer has the ability to carry out the CUDA parallel computing.

Supports the CUDA parallel computing.

No device supporting CUDA. Usually means that the GPU manufacturer is not NVIDIA, or the graphics card is too old to support CUDA computing

GPU computing power in shortage. The current requirements for computing power greater than or equal to 2.

The graphics card driver version is too old.

The volume dataset class, which describes raster volume data collection, such as cellular signal strength within given scope, haze polluted index, etc.

The base class of all the classes of datasets with different types, such as the DatasetVector, DatasetGrid etc., that provides common properties, methods, and events.

Opens this dataset to do some operations on the data of this dataset.

True if successful; otherwise, returns false.

Closes this dataset.

Gets the encoding type of this dataset.

Gets the type of the source vector dataset.

For database datasource, this method returns the name of the data table in the database; For file datasource, this method returns the name of the table that stores attributes of features .

Returns the name of this dataset. The name is the unique identifier of the dataset. The identifier is not case-sensitive.

Gets or sets the description about this dataset added by the user.

The additional information added for the dataset.

Returns the datasource object that contains this dataset.

Determines whether this dataset has been opened.

Returns or sets whether this dataset is read-only.

Gets or sets the boundary rectangle that contains all geometric objects in this dataset.

Triggers the event before the dataset is closed.

Triggers the event after the dataset is closed.

Triggers the event during operations on the dataset.

Gets or sets the projection information of the dataset.

Gets the value indicating whether the dataset has the version or not. True, if the dataset has the version; Otherwise, false.

Determines whether the dataset has its own projection. True will be returned if the dataset has its own projection; otherwise, false will be returned.

Add image to Mosaic data set,The essence is to add and record the filename of all images of the specified extension under the given path,The Mosaic data set should never copy the image files into the library.Only the full path (absolute path) of the image is recorded.

Specifies the path to add images. The extension of the image file. A Boolean value indicating whether or not the image is successful and true indicates success;False means failure.

Add image to Mosaic data set,This specifies the full path (absolute path) of the image file.The Mosaic data set should never copy the image files into the library. but records the full path of the image.

The full path (absolute path) array of multiple image files to be added. A Boolean value indicating whether or not the image is successful and true indicates success;False means failure.

Create an Overview of Mosaic data sets.

path of vertical view The width of each view image file is in pixels. The height of each view image file is in pixels. The ratio between adjacent view levels.

Build statistics of Mosaic data sets.

Returns statistics of Mosaic data sets.

Create a pyramid of images for all images in a set of data sets.

Pyramid resampling. A Boolean value indicating that if the image has already created the pyramid if it is ignored, true means that it is ignored, that it no longer recreates the pyramid;The false indicates that the pyramid has been recreated for images that have been created. Successful creation returns true;Otherwise return false.

Find files that have changed in the Mosaic data set.

The image file ID that changed. The image file path that changed. The image of the change is in Bounds. Returns the number of files that changed.

Delete the Mosaic data set.

Delete successfully returns 0;Otherwise returns a non-zero error code.

Remove an overview of the Mosaic data set.

Remove successful return 0;Otherwise returns a non-zero error code.

Add an image to the mosaic dataset.

Specify the path to add images. The extension of the image file. Crop the shape file's suffix name, such as .shp, and the object in the file will be the cropped display range for the image. The cropping display of the image is generally used to: when the image is corrected, a value-free area is generated, and the effective value area of the image is drawn by the cropping shape, and the purpose of removing the valueless area is achieved after the cropping display. In addition, the image and the crop shape have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the crop shape file must be stored in the path specified by the directoryPath parameter, that is, the crop shape file and the image file are in the same directory. A Boolean value indicating whether the addition of the image was successful, true indicates success; false indicates failure.

Add images in bulk to the mosaic dataset.

An array of full path (absolute path) of multiple image files to be added. Crop the suffix of the shape file, such as .shp. The crop shape will be the cropped display range of the image. The cropping display of the image is generally used to: when the image is corrected, a value-free area is generated, and the effective value area of the image is drawn by the cropping shape, and the purpose of removing the valueless area is achieved after the cropping display. The image and the crop shape have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the crop shape file and the corresponding image file must be stored in the same directory. A Boolean value indicating whether the addition of the image was successful, true indicates success; false indicates failure.

The reconstruction of the mosaic dataset is generally used to change the image of the mosaic dataset management, such as adding and deleting images, and using this function to reconstruct the contour, boundary, and crop subdatasets.

Rebuild the outline. Updates the contents of the boundary dataset with the object specified by the exRegion parameter. Used to update the boundary dataset content to the specified geometric polygon object. Updates the contents of the cropped dataset with the cropped shape in the file specified by the postfix parameter. The extension of the crop shape file used for image cropping display. Whether to use the system to automatically extract the effective outline of the image to reconstruct the mosaic dataset outline. Whether to use the precision crop to extract the image's effective outline to reconstruct the mosaic dataset outline. Accurate cropping will extract the effective contour of the image based on the original image file; otherwise, the effective contour of the image is extracted based on the image pyramid file, and the extraction efficiency is higher than the precise cropping. returns 0 successfully; otherwise it returns a non-zero error code.

Returns information about the specified image file, such as the number of bands, bit depth, and so on.

The full path of the specified image file. Returns information about the specified image file, such as the number of bands, bit depth, and so on.

Get the outline of the set of data sets.The image contour line is based on the space reference of Mosaic dataset, which reflects the real boundary of the image in the Mosaic data set.

Gets the boundary line of Mosaic data sets.

Gets the set band number of data sets.

Gets the width of the Mosaic data set, in pixels.

Gets the height of the Mosaic data set in pixels.

Get the bit depth of the Mosaic data set.

Inset data sets related operation progress events.

Gets the cropped subdataset of the mosaic dataset. The cropped subdataset is used as a cropping object to crop and display the image in the mosaic dataset.

The volume dataset class, which describes raster volume data collection, such as cellular signal strength within given scope, haze polluted index, etc.

Gets the no value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The no value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Sets the no value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified NoData value.Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.

Gets the minimum pixel value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The minimum pixel value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Gets the maximum pixel value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The maximum pixel value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Gets the minimum pixel value in the volume dataset.

The minimum pixel value in the volume dataset.

Gets the maximum pixel value in the volume dataset.

The maximum pixel value in the volume dataset.

Gets the altitude value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The altitude value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Sets the altitude value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Sets the altitude.Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Gets the pixel format of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The pixel format of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Gets the encoding type of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The encoding type of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset.

Perform statistics operation for the volume dataset and return a dictionary object. The keys of the dictionary object are the cutting plane of the volume dataset, the values are the cutting plane result object. The results include the maximum value, minimum value, mean value, mid-value, majority, minority, variance, standard deviation, etc.

Returns Dictionary object, the keys are the cutting plane of the volume dataset, the values are the VolumeStatisticsResult objects.

Calculates the extremum value of the given cutting plane in the volume dataset, i.e., maximum value and minimum value.

The index of the cutting plane in volume dataset that needs to calculate the extremum value.If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Calculates the extremum of the volume dataset. Namely the maximum value and the minimum value.

If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Gets the value of the pixel with the specified row and column in specified cutting plane of the volume dataset.

The specified column index which starts with 0.The specified row index which starts with 0.Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.The value of the pixel with the specified row and column in specified cutting plane of the volume dataset.

Sets the value of the pixel with the specified row and column in specified cutting plane of the volume dataset.

The specified column index which starts with 0.The specified row index which starts with 0.The specified pixel value to set.Specified cutting plane index, starting from 0.New pixel value to be set.

Sets the bound of volume dataset to the geographical coordinates.

The specified volume bounds.If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Builds raster pyramids for a volume dataset. Pyramids can speed up display of volume data by returning only the data at a specified resolution that is required for the display.

if building successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Removes the pyramid of the grid dataset.

True, if successful; otherwise, false.

Appends the cutting plane of source volume dataset to the cutting plane of target volume dataset in accordance with the given cutting plane index of target volume dataset, the source volume dataset, the cutting plane index of the source volume dataset.

The cutting plane index of the target volume dataset.Source volume dataset (its BlockSize, ColBlocks, RowBlocks, Width, Height and Bounds should be consistent with the target volume dataset).The cutting plane index of the source volume dataset.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Appends the source volume dataset to the cutting plane of target volume dataset in accordance with the given cutting plane index of target volume dataset and the source volume dataset.

The cutting plane index of the target volume dataset.Source raster dataset (its BlockSize, ColBlocks, RowBlocks, Width, Height and Bounds should be consistent with the target volume dataset).true if successful; otherwise, false.

Update the volume pyramid in the given extent.

The bounds of the given volume dataset.Returns true if the pyramid is updated successfully; otherwise, false.

Adds a cutting plane according to the given cutting plane name and pixel format.

The given cutting plane name.Specified pixel format(consistent with the volume dataset).Adds the index of the cutting plane.

Deletes the specified cutting plane by the specified index.

The specified index of the cutting plane to be deleted.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Deletes cutting planes in the volume dataset by the specified start index and the specified count.

The start index of the cutting planes to remove.The count of the cutting plane to be deleted.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the index of this cutting plane in the multi-cutting plane volume dataset, according to the given cutting plane name.

The given cutting plane name.The cutting plane index.

Returns the width of the volume in volume dataset and the unit is pixel.

Returns the height of the volume in volume dataset and the unit is pixel.

Gets the pixel block type of the volume dataset.

Gets or sets the display area of the volume dataset.When user set this method, the volume data will be displayed with the specified region and the out of the region will not be displayed.Note:1. The volume dataset will not be displayed if the extent of the volume dataset set by the DatasetVolume.SetGeoReference() method do not overlap with the clip region.2. When reset the geographic extent of the volume dataset, it won't modify the display region of volume dataset automatically.

Gets the statistics result of all the cutting planes of the volume dataset, it is a Dictionary object. The keys are the cutting planes of the volume dataset and the values are the statistics result object of the cutting planes.

Returns Dictionary object, the keys are the cutting plane of the volume dataset, the values are the VolumeStatisticsResult objects.

Gets a value indicates that whether the volume dataset has built the pyramid. True represents that the volume dataset has built the pyramid while false represents that has not.

Gets the count of the cutting plane.

Gets or sets the cutting plane name.

The specified index of the cutting plane.

Gets or sets the color table.

The default value is Count=0.

Volume dataset collection class. The class is used to set related information when creating, including the name, width, height, cutting plane number, and storage block size, etc..

Constructs a new DatasetVolumeInfo object.

reates a new DatasetVolumeInfo object identical to the given DatasetVolumeInfo object.

The specified DatasetVolumeInfo object.

Creates a new DatasetVolumeInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name.The specified template dataset.

Creates a new DatasetVolumeInfo object according to given parameters.

The specified name of volume dataset.Returns the width of the volume dataset in pixel.Returns the height of the volume dataset in pixel.The specified cell size of the volume dataset.The specified encoding type of the volume dataset.The specified pixel block type of the volume dataset.

Creates a new DatasetVolumeInfo object according to given parameters.

Returns a string that indicates the current DatasetVolumeInfo in the format of {Name="",Bounds={},Width=,Height=,PixelFormat=,BlockSize=,EncodeType=,ColorTable={}}.

A string that indicates the current DatasetVolumeInfo.

Releases the resources before recycling DatasetVolumeInfo.

Releases all resources used by the DatasetVolumeInfo.

Gets or sets the count of cutting plane in volume dataset.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the name of volume dataset.

Gets or sets the extent of the volume dataset.

Gets or sets the width of the volume in volume dataset and the unit is pixel.

Gets or sets the height of the volume in volume dataset and the unit is pixel.

Gets or sets the pixel format of the volume dataset.The pixel can be expressed with the byte, bit is the unit. For more information, please refer to the PixelFormat enumeration.

Gets or sets the block size of the volume data.

The default value is BlockSizeOption.BS_256.

Gets or sets the encoding type of volume dataset.

The default value is None.

The class defines the start cut direction when cutting the region, which is the position of the first cutting region.

West

North

East

South

Cutting region parameter class object. The cutting region function is divided into cutting by area and equal cutting. Cutting by area needs to set the result region object area and area unit. Equal cutting needs to set the number of the cutting result regions.

Constructs a parameter class object.

Constructs a new parameter class object according to the existing region cutting parameter class object.

Region cutting parameter class object.

Gets or sets the region cutting type

Gets or sets the region cutting number. For cutting by area, the number can't be larger than the original region area/cutting region area; for equal cutting, it is the cutting result region number.

Gets or sets the area unit. When setting the cutting area, it's needed to set the unit.

Gets or sets the cutting direction. If the cutting azimuth is 0 or 180 degrees, the cutting direction is not North and south, if the cutting azimuth is 90 or 270 degrees, the cutting direction can not be east and west.

Gets or sets the cutting area. It's required to set when setting the cutting type is cutting by area.

Gets or sets the cutting azimuth, which is the clockwise angle with the north direction.

Gets or set the area of the remaining region object which will be merged to the neighboring region object. If the area of the remaining surface is less than or equal to the given area, it can be merged, otherwise, can not be merged. This parameter also requires setting MergeRemainder.

Gets or set whether to merge the remaining region object to the neighboring region object. When the type is cutting by area, there may be remaining region object. This parameter can set whether to merge it. This parameter also requires setting RemainderArea.

The class defines the type of the cutting region object.

Cutting by area

Equal cutting

Billboard class.This class is used to create a new bulletin board in a KML layer by setting the image or text.

The base class of all three dimensional geometries provides the basic geometric properties and methods of the geometry class.This class can control the attitude of three-dimensional geometry objects, including the location of objects, rotation angles, scaling and internal points;The three-dimensional geometry objects can also be migrated.The 3d model geometry objects can also be obtained.

The base class of all the geometry classes such as GeoPoint, GeoLine, GeoRegion etc.This is an abstract class.This class provides some basic properties and methods of the geometric objects, and is the base class of all the geometric classes.This class is used to describe the spatial characteristics of geographical entities and provides the corresponding processing methods. Types of geospatial entities include GeoPoint, GeoLine, GeoRegion, etc.

,,,

Exports the spatial data of this geometric object to an XML string according to OpenGIS Geography Markup Language (GML) Implementation Specification - Version 3.0.

The XML string represents the geometric object.

Clears the spatial data from this geometric object., whereas styles and ID of this geometric object remains unchanged.

Rotates the geometric object according to the specified angle and with the specified point as the base point , anticlockwise as the positive direction, degree as the unit. the Rotate method is not supported by GeoRegion3D. To rotate, please use rotate method of two-dimensional vector surface first, then add it to 3D scene.

The base point of rotation.The rotated angle, in degrees.

Resizes the Geometry object to let the bounds equal the specified Rectangle2D.For GeoPoint object, this method can only change the location of the GeoPoint and move the GeoPoint to the center of the specified Rectangle2D.For Text object, this method changes the size of the text.

The range of the object after resizing.

Moves this Geometry by a specified amount.

The amount to offset the x-coordinate.The amount to offset the y-coordinate.

Returns a symmetric geometric object of this geometric object to a specified line.

The start point of the line segment.The endpoint of the line segment.The symmetric geometric object of this geometric object to the specified line.

Tests whether current geometric object has the intersection with the circle that is drawn with the specified Point2D as the center and the specified tolerance as the radius. If the geometric intersects the circle with the specified center and radius, True will be returned; Otherwise, False will be returned.

The point to be tested.A tolerance value and the unit is the same as that of the dataset.True if intersected; otherwise, false.

Refactor this geometric object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The XML string.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the Geometry is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the Geometry.

Gets the type of the Geometry.The return value is one of the constants defined by the GeometryType enumeration. Details to see the GeometryType enumeration.

The style is used to define the rendering information.For the geometric object, including symbol style, line style, fill pattern and so on when the geometric object is displayed.

The default value is null.

Gets a value that indicates whether the geometric object is null.

True if the geometric object is null; otherwise, false. The default value is true.

Returns or sets the identity of the geometric object. This ID is used to identify the geometric object uniquely.

The default value is zero.

Returns the inner point of a geometric object. The inner point can be used in various situations, for example, when creating a label thematic map, the inner points of the geometric objects are used as the anchor points of the label text.

The default value is Point2D(0.0) .

Returns the minimum rectangle that contains the Geometry object.

The default value is Rectangle2D(0,0,0,0) .

The event is triggered when creating a custom geometry object.

Offsets the Geometry3D objects according to the given offset along the direction of the X, Y and Z axis.

The offset along the direction of the X axis. Unit is degree.The offset along the direction of the Y axis. Unit is degree.The offset along the direction of the Z axis. Unit is degree.

Gets the GeoModel object through the numbers of slices and stacks.Note the following when calling this method.1.The objects of the GeoBox, GeoCircle3D, GeoCone, GeoCylinder, GeoEllipsoid, GeoHemiSphere, GeoPie3D, GeoPieCylinder, GeoPyramid, GeoSphere classes can call this method availably. The instances of these geometries need to be reconstructed with the GeoModel mode by calling this method, and then be added to the scene.2.For the objects of the GeoLine3D, GeoParticle, GeoPicture3D, GeoPlacemark, GeoPoint3D, GeoRegion3D and GeoText3D class, calling this method is invalid, the return value is null.

The number of slices in the horizontal direction.The number of stacks in the vertical direction.

This class does not support the method.

Convert 3D geometry object to 3D model object.

Specifies whether the vertex or interpolation point of the model is latitude or longitude.The converted 3D model object.

Gets or sets the style of the Geometry3D object.

Gets or sets the bounding box of the Geometry3D object.

Gets or sets the position of the Geometry3D object. The position is the center point, used to control the location of the Geometry3D object on the earth, in the bottom side of the minimum bounding box. Takes the sphere as an example, the center point is the tangent point between the sphere and the bottom side of the minimum bounding box.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the Geometry3D object in the x-direction. (it is not supported yet)

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the Geometry3D object in the y-direction. (it is not supported yet)

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the Geometry3D object in the z-direction. (it is not supported yet)

Gets or sets the scale ratio of the Geometry3D object in the x-direction. The unit is degrees.

Gets or sets the scale ratio of the Geometry3D object in the y-direction. The unit is degrees.

Gets or sets the scale ratio of the Geometry3D object in the z-direction.(net supported yet)

Gets or sets the width of the GeoPicture3D object.

The default value is 0. The unit is cubic meters.

Gets or sets the inner point of the Geomerty3D object. The inner point is the one which is near the center of the Geomerty3D object.

It is not supported in this class.

Increasing child objects in the bulletin board.

Child objects added to the bulletin board, currently support GeoPicture3D and GeoText3D types.Billboard label

Constructs a new GeoModel3D object which is the same to the given GeoModel3D object.

Constructs a new GeoModel3D object in accordance with the given Model object.

Constructs new instance of GeoModel3D by given parameters.

The specified 3D model object.

Gets the child object of the specified index.

Specifies the index number.

Gets the label for the specified index.

Specifies the index number.

Whether to remove a notice board object that specifies an index

Specifies the index number.

Sets the child object of the specified index number

Specify a request number.Specify the geometry.

Sets the tag name of the specified index child

Specifies the index number.Specify the label.

Number of subobjects

Gets or sets the board height.

Gets or sets the width of the notice board.

Gets or sets the quality level of the bulletin board.

The enumeration defines the quality level constants of the bulletin board.

Low quality.

Medium quality

High quality

Creates a GeodesicLineParameter class.

The default constructor for constructing a new GeodesicLineParameter object.

Initializes a new instance of the GeodesicLineParameter class which is identical with the specified GeodesicLineParameter object.

The specified GeodesicLineParameter object.

Gets or sets the type of geodesic line.

The default value is GeodesicLineType.Geodesic

Gets or sets the count of edges for fitting.

The default value is 18000.

Gets or sets spatial reference coordinates.

The default is latitude and longitude coordinates.

This class defines type of geodesic lines.

Standard geodestic line types, which represents the shortest surface distance between two points on the earth.

The EPS line geometry object class.

Base class of all EPS geometry objects.

Initialize the assembly.

Add specified point object to the end of the point array.

Point to add to this object.The index of the added Point2D object.

Add specified point object to the specified position of the point array.

Insertion position.Inserted point.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Delete the specified point in the point array.

The index of the Point2D object to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Clear all points which build the object.

Clone this object.

The base class can't be cloned, returns null.

Gets or sets the point object in specified position of the point array.

The specified index of the point object.The point object in specified position of the point array.

Gets the point number which build the object.

Constructs a new GeoLineEPS class object.

Clone this object.

Returns the cloned new object.

Convert to the GeoLine object.

Convert to GeoLine3D object

Return to the GeoLine3D object

Convert to GeoRegion3D object

Return GeoRegion3D object

Gets the length of the line object.

Constructor that constructs a geometric object relationship judgment object.

Release the resources occupied by GeometriesRelation.

Gets the geographic extent of all inserted objects in the GeometriesRelation.

Gets the number of all inserted objects in the GeometriesRelation.

Insert a geometric object to be matched. The matched object is a query object in the spatial query mode. For example, to perform a face-to-point query, you need to insert the face object into the GeometriesRelation, and then match to get the inclusion relationship with the point object. Face object. The geometric object being matched must be a dotted lineThe value to be matched is a unique value and must be greater than or equal to 0, such as the ID of the geometry object.>

Find the values of all matched objects that satisfy the spatial relationship with the matching object. Matching space object Spatial query mode

Find the value of all matched objects that satisfy the spatial relationship with the point object. Two-dimensional point to match Spatial query mode

Find the values of all matched objects that satisfy the spatial relationship with the matching object. The result is returned in the form: number of results, result IDs, number of results, result IDs, 0, number of results, result IDs.Match space object array Spatial query mode

Find the value of all matched objects that satisfy the spatial relationship with the 2D point array The result is returned in the form: number of results, result IDs, number of results, result IDs, 0, number of results, result IDs.2D point array Spatial query mode

Find the values of all matched objects that satisfy the spatial relationship with the matching object.

Matching space objectSpatial query modeExcluded values, ie not participating in matching operations.The value of the object being matched.

Find the value of all matched objects that satisfy the spatial relationship with the point object.

Two-dimensional point to matchSpatial query mode Two-dimensional point to match The value of the object being matched.

Determine whether the object satisfies the spatial relationship with the specified object

The object to be matchedThe value of the matched object Matched spatial query modeReturns true if the specified object satisfies the spatial relationship with the specified object, otherwise false.

Determine whether the two-dimensional point satisfies the spatial relationship with the specified object

Two-dimensional point to match The value of the matched objectMatched spatial query modeReturns true if the point satisfies the spatial relationship with the specified object, otherwise it is false.

Returns all objects that intersect the specified rectangle, that is, the rectangles of the objects intersect.

Specified rectangle range An object that intersects the specified rectangular extent.

Get and set node tolerances.

Get and set the polygon object gridding level. By default, no object meshing is done.

The 3D model object class which is used to process the external model as the dataset model.

The base class of all the 3D geometry classes. This class provides a variety of basic properties for the 3D geometric object. Through this class, you can get the information of the position, rotation angle and scale ratio of the Geometry3D object. Also, you can offset the Geometry3D object and get GeoModel objects through this class.

Releases the resources before recycling Datasets.

Returns a copy of the current object.

The GeoModel3D object generated from the clone operation.

Gets or sets the model dataset.

Gets the surface area of the 3D model.

Gets or sets the file directory.

Gets or sets whether it is latitude and longitude.

Gets node animation object.

Gets the minimum value.

Gets the maxmum value.

The EPS point geometry object class.

Constructs a new GeoPointEPS class object.

Constructs a GeoPointEPS class object according to specified PointEPS object.

The specified PointEPS object.

Clone this object.

Return the cloned object.

EPS region geometry object class.

Constructs a new GeoRegionEPS class object.

Clone this object.

Returns the cloned new object.

Convert to the GeoLine object.

Convert to the GeoRegion object.

Gets the area of the region object.

Gets the perimeter of the region object.

The EPS text geometry object class.

Constructs a new GeoTextEPS class object.

Initialize a GeoTextEPS class object with the parameters specified.

The anchor point of specified text geometry objectThe text content of specified text geometry object

Clone this object.

Return the cloned object.

Gets or sets the text content of the text geometry object.

Gets or sets the text style of the text geometry object.

Irregular tetrahedral mesh class.

By default, a new irregular tetrahedral mesh object is constructed.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoTIM object.

Get all the irregular tetrahedrons of the irregular tetrahedral mesh.

Get a list of irregular tetrahedrons.

Convert the irregular tetrahedral mesh to a 3D model object.

Irregular tetrahedral mesh transformation to get 3D model objects.

TIN terrain map geometric object class

copy

Construct a new object of GeoTINTile

Construct a new object of geotintiles based on the specified parameters.

Specified geometry object

Valid or not

The custom geometry object class.

Construct a new instance of the GeoUserDefined class.

Construct a GeoUserDefined object identical to it according to the specified GeoUserDefined object.

The specified GeoUserDefined object.

Returns a copy of the current object.

Clears the spatial data from this geometric object., whereas styles and ID of this geometric object remains unchanged.

Sets custom object.

The object bounds.The binary stream data for the custom object.True, if successful; Otherwise false.

Returns the binary stream data for the custom object.

Returns whether the geometry object is null or not. True indicates null and false indicates not. Default value is true.

The higher the grid level of a single object, the more memory is required.

There is no grid handling

Grid of low grade grid, use 32*32 squares for each face grid

Grid of medium grade, use 64*64 squares for each face grid

The general level grid is used to grid the 128*128 squares for each face

For grid, use 256*256 squares for each face

This enumeration defines a memory lock type constant.

Writeable lock.

Read-only lock.

Do not lock.

Material class

Initializes a new instance of this Material3D class.

Construct a new Material3D object according to the material name.

The name of the material

Construct a new object that is exactly the same as the given Material3D object.

Check whether the material object is legal

True is legal, false means illegal.

Remove all textures on the Material3D object.

Set the offset of the texture coordinates on the XYZ direction.

The specified mapping index, if only one map, input 0Specifies the offset value of UV in the XYZ direction, generally the Point3D type

Set the rotation Angle of the texture UV.

The specified mapping index, if only one map, input 0Rotation Angle of X directionRotation Angle of Y directionRotation Angle of Z direction

Set the zoom ratio of the texture UV.

The specified mapping index, if only one map, input 0The X direction scalingY is the scaling factorZ-direction scaling

Gets or sets the material name.

Gets or sets the map object.

Gets or sets the map collection.

Gets or sets the material color.

4*4 matrix class. Can be used for model skeleton scaling, rotation, and translation.

The default constructor constructs a new function with the same name as the class.

The point is multiplied by the matrix.

point coordinates Multiplier with it New point coordinates after multiplication.

Matrix multiplication.

Multiplier with it The matrix after multiplication.

X direction rotation

Set the rotation angle in the X direction, a Double value. The matrix rotated in the X direction.

Rotate in X, Y, and Z directions

Set the rotation angle in the X direction, a Double value. Set the rotation angle in the Y direction, a Double value. Set the rotation angle in the Z direction, a Double value. Matrix after rotation in the XYZ direction.

Y direction rotation

Set the rotation angle in the Y direction, a Double value. A matrix rotated in the Y direction.

Z direction rotation

Set the rotation angle in the Z direction, a Double value. Matrix after rotation in the Z direction.

Scale the model skeleton.

X-direction scaling, a Double value. Y-direction scaling, a Double value. Z direction scaling, a Double value. Scaled 4*4 matrix.

The matrix is converted to Euler angles rotated in XYZ order, in degrees.

Rotation angle around the X axis Rotation angle around the Y axis Rotation angle around the Z axis

The matrix is converted to an Euler angle rotated in the order of XZY, in degrees.

Rotation angle around the X axis Rotation angle around the Z axis Rotation angle around the Y axis

The matrix is converted to an Euler angle rotated in the order of YXZ, in degrees.

Rotation angle around the Y axis Rotation angle around the X axis Rotation angle around the Z axis

The matrix is converted to Euler angles rotated in the order of YZX, in degrees.

Rotation angle around the Y axis Rotation angle around the Z axis Rotation angle around the X axis

The matrix is converted to an Euler angle rotated in the order of ZXY, in degrees.

Rotation angle around the Z axis Rotation angle around the Z axis Rotation angle around the Y axis

The matrix is converted to an Euler angle rotated in the order of ZYX, in degrees.

Rotation angle around the Z axis Rotation angle around the Y axis Rotation angle around the X axis

Translation, the unit is meters.

X axis movement size Y axis movement size Z axis movement size The matrix after translation.

Gets or sets the properties of the matrix element values.

Memory Recordset, inherited from Recordset.The operation of the memory Recordset is consistent with the Recordset Recordset operation. The difference is that the memory Recordset is in memory, and the user can create and add data, but cannot save the data.

The Recordset class. Using this class, you can perform operations on the data, for example, creating, editing, deleting the data and so on.

Gets the query parameters of the current Recordset, and returns a copy. For more information about query parameters, please refer to the QueryParameter class.

The recordset contains the query results.

Performs statistic computing for the field specified by the field name. For example, Max, Min, Average, Summary, Standard Deviation and Square Deviation etc.

The field name to be performed statistical operation.The statistic mode.The statistic result.

Performs statistic computing for the field specified by the field index. For example, Max, Min, Average, Summary, Standard Deviation and Square Deviation etc.

The field index to be performed statistical operation.The statistic mode.The statistic result.

Modifies the current geometric object in the Recordset and overwrite the old one. It will return true when succeeds. When modifying the geometric object, its system field values should be modified automatically, such as, the area of polygon and the length of line etc.

A new geometric object used to overlap the old one.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Sets the values of a field in the Recordset to Null according to the specified field name. Returns true if successful.

The field name to be set.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the values of a field in the Recordset to Null according to the specified field index. Returns true if successful.

The field index to be set.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets value for a field specified by the field name. Returns True if successful.

The field name at which the field value would be assigned.The new field value.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Sets value for a field specified by the field index. Returns True if successful.

The index of the field to set values in the recordset.The new field value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Searches the record with specific ID and make the record current.

The ID to be searched.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Refreshes the current Recordset to reflect changes in dataset. Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Moves the current position to the specified position and make that record current. Returns true if successful.

The specified position, namely the ID of record to which the current record position moved.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves the current record position one record backward. Returns true if successful.

True, if successful; otherwise false. The position starts from zero, that is, MoveTo(0) is equivalent to MoveFirst().

Moves the current record position one record forward. Returns true if successful.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves the current record position to the last record in the Recordset and makes that record current. Returns true if successful.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves the current record position to the first record in the Recordset and makes that record current. Returns true if successful.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves the current record position specified count backward or forward and makes that record current.

The number of records.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the ID (SmID) of geometric object corresponding to the current record in the attribute table.

The ID of the Geometry object.

Gets the geometric object of the current Recordset in attribute table.

Returns the geometric object if successful; otherwise, null.

Gets the field value of the current record in attribute table according to the name of the field.

The field name whose value would be got.The specified field value of the current record.

Gets the field value of the current record in attribute table according to the index of the field.

The field index whose value would be got.The specified field value of the current record.

Deletes all records in the specific Recordset. This method will delete the record permanently.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the current recordset in dataset. It will return true when succeeds.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Closes Recordset. The Recordset should be closed instantly after using.

Cancels all changes to current or new record before calling Update. It will return true when successful.

Modifies the committed Recordset which contains add, edit record, modify field value operations.

Returns true if update successfully; otherwise false.

Locks and edits the current record in Recordset. It will return true when successful.

True if successful; otherwise, false.

Appends one record to Recordset.

The corresponded geometric object to be added which can be point, line, region and label etc. This parameter can be null.If successful returns true; otherwise returns false.

Returns the FieldInfos object of the Recordset. For more information about field information, please refer to the FieldInfos class.

A copy of FieldInfos.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the Recordset is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources occupied by the Recordset.

Gets the RepresentationElement object recorded in the field specified by the current record.

A binary field used to store representation information.Returns the RepresentationElement object.

Sets the representation information for the geometric object corresponding to the current record. The representation information will be stored in the existing binary method specified with this method.

A binary field used to store representation information.The specified RepresentationElement object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

A binary field used to store representation information.The style used for representation. Geometric objects in the vector dataset will be represented with the geometric object style specified by this argument.The custom property.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Sets the representation information for the object of the current record, this will store in the specified field which must exist and must be Binary.

A binary field used to store representation information.The text style used for representation. Text objects in the text dataset will be represented with the text object style specified by this argument.The custom property.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

A binary field used to store representation information.The specified Geometry object which will display in the map window instead of its corresponding object using the representation in the vector dataset.The representation type which controls whether to use the geometry object set in the representation information to substitute the original object using the representation, whether to use the display style set in the representation information and whether the object using the representation is visible or not. For more information about the representation type, please refer to the RepresentationType class.The custom property.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Add Geometry object and set the field value.

The Geometry object to be added.The specified field value. The String object is the filed name, and the Object is the value. If the specified field name is not found in the recordset, the value will be ignored.Returns true if successful, otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Byte field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Byte field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Byte field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Byte field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified Byte value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified Byte value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Int16 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Int16 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Int16 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Int16 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Int32 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Int32 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Int32 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Int32 field of the current record in the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Int64 field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Int64 field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Int64 field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Int64 field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Single field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Single field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Single field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Single field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Double field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Double field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Double field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Double field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the LongBinary field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the LongBinary field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the LongBinary field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the LongBinary field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Boolean field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Boolean field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Boolean field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Boolean field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the Text field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the Text field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the Text field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the Text field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the value of the DateTime field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified index of field.The value of the DateTime field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Returns the value of the DateTime field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

The specified name of field.The value of the DateTime field in the current record from the attribute table of the dataset.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified index of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value of a field for the current record int he recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of field.The specified value.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the field value of current record from the attribute table.

The index of the specified field.The field value of current record from the attribute table.

Returns the field value of current record from the attribute table.

The name of the specified field.The field value of current record from the attribute table.

Sets the value for a field in a recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The index of specified field.The specified values.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value for a field in a recordset. Returns true if set successfully.

The specified name of the field.The specified values. True, if successful; otherwise false.

Returns all of the fields value in the current record from the attribute table.

Gets all of the fields value.

Returns true if all of the fields value in the recordset are set successfully.Enable bulk editing and call this interface to modify the recordsets in batch.

The field array, which needs to have the same index with the field order.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the value for a field of a geometric object. Returns true if set successfully.Enable bulk editing and call this interface to modify the recordsets in batch.

The specified field value. The String object is the filed name, and the Object is the value. If the specified field name is not found in the recordset, the value will be ignored.The geometric object for modification.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Sets the value for a field in a recordset. Returns true if set successfully.Enable bulk editing and call this interface to modify the recordsets in batch.

The specified field value. The String object is the filed name, and the Object is the value. If the specified field name is not found in the recordset, the value will be ignored.True, if successful; otherwise false.

Sets the values for all fields of a geometric object. Returns true if set successfully.Enable bulk editing and call this interface to modify the recordsets in batch.

The field array, which needs to have the same index with the field order.The geometric object for modification.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Whether the value of the field in the previous operation is null or not.

Returns true if it is empty; Otherwise false.

Used for return the Feature object in the recordset.

The Feature object.

Used for return all the Features object in the recordset.

The first parameter in Dictionary represents the ID of the geometry object (the value of SmID), the second parameter is a reference of the Features.All the Features.

Updates the properties of objects in the recordset according to the spatial relations.

The dataset specified to provide attribute.The given spatial relation type.The fields to update in the dataset to provide attribute.The fields specified to update.The attribute field type.Whether to contain the points on the border.the count of object, it must be a integer.Whether to show the progress bar.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Updates the properties of objects in the recordset according to the spatial relations.

The recordset specified to provide attribute.The given spatial relation type.The fields to update in the recordset to provide attribute.The fields specified to update.The attribute field type.Whether to contain the points on the border.the count of object, it must be a integer.Whether to show the progress bar.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the ID of object that meets a certain spatial relation with object of the current recordset from another dataset.

the dataset that related to the current recordset.the given spatial relation type.Whether to contain the points on the border.Specify whether to show the progress bar. True means to show, otherwise not.An integer array, see the notes for the meaning of the array elements.

Gets the ID of object that meets a certain spatial relation with object of the current recordset from another recordset.

the recordset that related to the current dataset.the given spatial relation type.Whether to contain the points on the border.Specify whether to show the progress bar. True means to show, otherwise not.An integer array, see the notes for the meaning of the array elements.

Gets the ID of object that meets a certain spatial relation with object of the current recordset from specified geometry array.

Specified geometry array related to the current dataset.the given spatial relation type.Whether to contain the points on the border.Specify whether to show the progress bar. True means to show, otherwise not.An integer array, see the notes for the meaning of the array elements.

Gets the objects for batch modification.

Gets the number of the records in the Recordset.

Gets whether the Recordset is read only or not. If it is, returns true, that means the Recordset can not be modified.

Determines whether the Recordset object is empty. True means the number of records is zero. If true, the RecordCount would be -1.

Indicates whether the current record is positioned after the last record in the recordset. If it is, returns true; otherwise returns false.

Indicates whether the current record is positioned before the first record in the recordset. If it is,returns true; otherwise returns false.

Determines whether the Recordset is closed or not.

True, if the Recordset is closed; otherwise, false. The default is false.

Gets the number of the fields in the Recordset.

Gets the corresponding dataset of the Recordset.

Gets the boundary rectangle of the Recordset.

The event is trigged when the process bar is activated.

This class is the nested class of the Recordset class which provides the batch edit of the records.The support for bulk update including the following:1. Bulk updating including bulk adding, bulk updating and bulk deleting2. The writable file engine and the database type datasource in EngineType both support the batch modification.3. Support the automatic maintaining of indexes. If the dataset to update has index, when adding records or removing objects, the system will maintain the index automatically, and there is no need to create the index again.

Sets the beginning of the batch updating process. This method identifies the current update operation will be performed in the batch mode.

Batch updates the modified recordset. The batch updating turns to single updating after calling this method. If you want to perform batch operation, you need to call the BatchEditor.Begin() method again.

Cancel the batch editing operation. When called this method, all the batch editing operations performed before will be canceled, the data to update will rollback, the update status will change to single update. To use batch editing again, you need to call the BatchEditor.Begin() method again.

Gets or sets the maximum number of the records for submitting the result of batch edit automatically.

Construct a new MemRecordset class object.

Gets or sets the projection coordinate system for memory recordset data.

Model dataset, used to store the dataset of 3D geometry model object.

Constructs a new Model object.

Constructs a new Model object which is the same to the given Model object.

The given Model object.

Release the resources occupied by the Model object.

Releases the resources before recycling Datasets.

Loads model object from external file. This interface supports model types which are supported in data conversion.

Specified external file.A boolean. Return true if successful; otherwise, false.

Load model object from the external file.

Specified external file.A boolean. Return true if successful; otherwise, false.

Export the model dataset to a file.

The path of the specified file.Returns true if successful, otherwise false.

Export the model dataset to a file.

The path of the specified file.Returns true if successful, otherwise false.

Sets the associated dataset.

Specify the associated dataset.A boolean. Return true if successful; otherwise, false.

Sets external matrix.

Specified matrix.

Split the model object.

Breaking model dataset list.

Gets the number of geode.

Specified LOD level.Specified skeleton patch.The number of geode.

Gets the model dataset information.

Specified LOD levelSpecified vertex number.Specified number of triangles.

Gets the skeleton number.

Specified LOD level.The skeleton num

Gets the skeleton information.

Specified skeleton NO.Specified vertex number.Specified number of triangles.

Determines whether the model skeleton has the texture data.

Specified skeleton NO.A boolean. Return true if successful; otherwise, false.

Determins whether the model dataset is closed. It will return true when all the skeletons of the fine model are closed.

A boolean. Return true if closed; otherwise, false.

Clear LOD level.

True if it is removed successfully; false otherwise.

Gets the skeleton name.

Specified skeleton NO.The skeleton name.

Gets the skeleton with specified NO.

Specified skeleton NO.The skeleton object.

Gets the skeleton with the specified number and external matrix.

Specified skeleton NO.Specified external matrix.The skeleton object.

Gets the skeleton object by name.

Specified skeleton name.

Gets the material object by name.

Specified material name.

Gets the texture data object by name.

Specified texture name.

Removes the skeleton object of the specified NO.

The skeleton NO to be removed.Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Add a skeleton object to a fine layer in a non instantiated manner.

The skeleton object to add.Added skeleton name.

Add a skeleton object to a fine layer in a non instantiated manner, and specify external matrix.

The skeleton object to add.Specified external matrix.Added skeleton name.

Add a material object in a non instantiated manner.

The material object to add.Added material name.

Add the texture data in a non instantiated manner.

The texture data to add.Added texture name.

Add model entity manger to the model dataset.

The model entity manger to add.Specified skeleton name.Specified external matrix.Returns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Add model entity manger to the model dataset.

The model entity manger to add.Specified skeleton name.Returns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Bind the model entity manager, it will clear current model.

The model entity manger to bind.

Gets whether the model dataset has LOD level structure.

Gets the LOD level number.

Gets the bounding box object for model dataset.

The model entity manager class. This class provides the management of the skeleton, material, texture and other model entities, you can create, add, delete various model entities.

Initializes a new instance of this ModelEntityManager class.

Initialize a new ModelEntityManager object with the parameters specified.

The specified vector dataset.

Reset the manger.

Gets the name list of all material objects.

The name list of all material objects.

Gets the name list of all skeleton objects.

The name list of all skeleton objects.

Gets the name list of all texture objects.

The name list of all texture objects.

Gets available entity name, should be unique.

The entity name to get.The entity model name.

Creates skeleton object.

The name of the skeleton to be created. It should be unique, otherwise it will get failure and return null.The new skeleton object.

Add skeleton object.

The skeleton object to add.The skeleton object.

Delete skeleton object.

The skeleton name to delete.Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the skeleton object by name.

Specified skeleton name.The skeleton object.

Create material object.

The name of the material to be created. It should be unique, otherwise it will get failure and return null.The new material object.

Add material object.

The material object to add.The material object.

Delete material object.

The material name to delete.Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the material object by name.

Specified material name.The material object.

Create texture data object.

The name of the texture data to be created. It should be unique, otherwise it will get failure and return null.The texture data.

Add the texture data.

The texture data to add.The texture data.

Delete texture data object.

The texture name to delete.Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the texture object by name.

Specified texture name.The texture data.

Update the skeleton by name list.

The skeleton name list to update.

Update the material of specified name list.

The material name list to update.

Update the texture of specified name list.

The texture name list to update.

Update all model objects of the dataset.

Returns true if updated successfully; otherwise false.

Add model dataset. If the model entity name is repeated, it will be renamed automatically.

The model dataset to add.The new model dataset.

The enumeration defines whether a computer has the ability to carry out the OpenCL parallel computing.

Has the capability of OpenCL parallel computing.

There is no OpenCL platform in the environment.

There is no GPU device.

Plane object class. The plane is a plane of infinite extension in the sense of mathematics, which is mainly used for the cross section projection and plane projection of the 3D model.

Creates a new Plane object.

Initializes a new instance of the Route class which is a copy of the specified Plane object.

Specified plane object.Specify whether it can be cloned.

Creates a new Plane object according to given parameters.

Specified plane type.

Creates a new Plane object according to given parameters.

The specified Point3D object.

Creates a new Plane object according to given parameters.

Creates a new Plane object according to given parameters. The plane consists of three points.

The first 3D point.The second 3D point.The third 3D point.

Creates a new Plane object according to given parameters.

Check whether the plane is effective.

Returns true if it is valid; otherwise false.

Check whether a 3D point object is on the plane.

The specified Point3D object.Returns true if it is on the plane; otherwise false.

Pan the plane.

Specified displacement value.

Gets the distance from the point to the plane.

The specified 3D point.The distance value.

Standardized treatment of the plane.

Specify the plane type.

Gets or sets the normal of the plane.

Gets or set the distance from the plane to the original point.

This enumeration defines the constants of the plane types.

The plane which consists of X, Y axis direction, that is, XY plane.

The plane which consists of Y, Z axis direction, that is, YZ plane.

The plane which consists of X, Z axis direction, that is, XZ plane.

EPS base point class.

Constructs a PointEPS object according to the given arguments.

X of specified point.Y of specified point.Z of specified point.Type of the specified point.Name of the specified point.

Gets or sets the x-coordinate of the point object.

Gets or sets the y-coordinate of the point object.

Gets or sets the z-coordinate of the point object.

Gets or sets the point type.

Gets or sets the point name.

EPS base point type.

None

Measured or calculated

Whether label the elevation

Whether to join the modeling

New point or old point

Turn point or normal point

Break point

Straight line

Curve

Arc

Tag 1, used for internal computing, it's not saved in the database, and it will be cleared after the use.

Tag 2

Tag 3

Tag 4

Adherent point

Cluster point

Smooth point

Characteristic point

Unknown point

The class defines the format type constants of Feature serialization and anti-serialization.

Serialize GeoJson format type, its enumeration value is 1.

Skeleton class.

Initializes a new instance of this Skeleton class.

Check whether the skeleton is closed.

True, if closed; Otherwise false.

Create skeleton.

Specified vertex coordinates list.Specified skeleton index list.Returns true if built successfully; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the skeleton name.

Gets or sets the skeleton material name.

Gets or sets the skeleton vertex coordinates list.

Gets skeleton index list.

Gets or sets skeleton texture coordinates list.

Gets or sets the skeleton normal V.

Skeleton NO class.

Constructs a new SkeletonID object.

Initialize a new SkeletonID object with the parameters specified.

Specified skeleton NO.

Gets or sets skeleton LOD level.

Gets or sets skeleton NO.

Spatial temporal sub object information classIncluding time, name, alias, datasource connection information of spatial temporal sub object.

Constructs a new SpatialTemporalItemInfo object.

Constructs a new SpatialTemporalItemInfo object identical to spacetimeiteminfo.

Spatial temporal sub object information class

Returns or sets the time of the spatial temporal sub object.

Returns or sets the alias of the spatial temporal sub object.

Returns or sets the dataset name of the spatial temporal sub object.

Returns or sets the datasource connection information.

Spatio-temporal object classTo realize the dynamic playing of the grid data with the time axis, to meet the user's dynamic playing grid data.

Constructs a new SpatialTemporalObject object.

Constructs a new SpatialTemporalObject object according to specified parameters.

Spatio-temporal object name.Description of spatio-temporal objectExtension information of spatio-temporal object

Constructs a new SpatialTemporalObject object identical to spatialtemporalobject.

Spatio-temporal object

Adds spatio-temporal sub item to the spatio-temporal object.

TimeDataset nameAliasThe connection information of the datasource the dataset is inCurrent sub item index

Adds spatio-temporal sub item according to itemInfo

Spatial temporal sub object information classCurrent sub item index

Searches spatio-temporal sub item information according to the time period.

Start timeEnd timeSpatio-temporal sub item information array

Gets all spatio-temporal sub item information.

Spatio-temporal sub item information array

Gets the start time.

Start time

Gets the end time.

End time

Removes the spatio-temporal sub item according to the time.

TimeReturns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Removes the spatio-temporal sub item according to the name.

NameReturns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Removes all spatio-temporal sub items.

Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Generates a XML file and saves it under strXMLPath. The XML file saves the information of the spatio-temporal object information.

XML file path.XML file content

Restore the spatio-temporal object by the XML file.

XML file path.Returns true if restored successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the number of the spatio-temporal sub objects.

The number of the spatio-temporal sub objects.

Returns or sets the name of the spatial temporal object.

Returns or sets the description of the spatial temporal object.

Returns or sets the extension information of the spatial temporal object.

The class defines the related information of the code ranges and related operations.

The class is the base class of the range, to define the ralated public information of the range.

Constructor.

Check whether the value is within the range.

The value to be checked.Boolean, true represents the value is in the range;false means not.

Use a Int type to check whether the value is within the range.

The value to be checked.Boolean, true represents the value is in the range;false means not.

Use a Double type to check whether the value is within the range.

The value to be checked.Boolean, true represents the value is in the range;false means not.

Use a String type to check whether the value is within the range.

The value to be checked.Boolean, true represents the value is in the range;false means not.

Check whether the type matches with the range.

The type to be checked.a boolean, returns true if consistent ; Otherwise returns false.

Gets the attribute ID of the range.

Gets the attribute name of the range.

Gets or sets the attribute description of the range.

Gets the attribute range type.

Gets the attribute and the data type of the range.

Creates a new CodeDomain object according to given parameters.

ID of CodeDomain.Name of CodeDomain.Description of CodeDomain.Data type of CodeDomain.Code information collection of CodeDomain.

Creates a new CodeDomain object according to given parameters.

ID of CodeDomain.Name of CodeDomain.Description of CodeDomain.Data type of CodeDomain.

Creates a new CodeDomain object according to given parameters.

Specified CodeDomain object.

Gets all code information.

Returns all code information collection.

Gets code information according to the index.

Index.Returns code information.

Adds code information.

Code information.a boolean, true if added successfully; Otherwise returns false.

Adds a group of code information to the CodeDomain.

Code information collection.

Sets code information according to the index.

Index.Code information.a boolean, true means the setting is successful.

Removes code information according to the index.

Index.

Clears all code information.

Gets the code information number of the CodeDomain.

The class defines the details of the code in the code field such as code data types, code values, and descriptions of values. The class also provides the relevant interface to operate the code information.

Constructs a new CodeInfo object.

Gets the code value, returns a Int16 value.

Returns the code value.

Gets the code value, returns a Int32 value.

Returns the code value.

Gets the code value, returns a Single value.

Returns the code value.

Gets the code value, returns a Double value.

Returns the code value.

Gets the code value, returns a DateTime value.

Gets the code value, returns a String value.

Returns the code value.

Sets the code value.

A Int16 value.

Sets the code value.

A Int32 value.

Sets the code value.

A Single value.

Sets the code value.

A Double value.

Sets the code value.

A DateTime value.

Sets the code value.

A String value.

Creates a new CodeInfo object according to given parameters.

The data type of the codes.The code value.The descriptions of the code value.

Creates a new CodeInfo object according to given parameters.

Specified CodeInfo object.

Releases the resources occupied by the CodeInfo object.

Gets or sets the data type of the codes.

Gets or sets the code value.

Gets or sets the descriptions of the code which explains its meanings.

The ColorDictionary class.

Construct a new ColorDictionary object.

Remove the item whose value is key in the color look up table.

the key value of the item to be removed in the color look up table.

Clear all the items in the color look up table.

Gets the value array.

key array.

Gets the color array.

the color array.

Releases all resources used by ColorDictionary.

Gets the count of contrast items in the color look up table.

Gets or sets the color value with the specific key value in the color look up table.

Defines the types of the color gradient. The gradient is a mixture of the various colors, which can be the gradient from start color to ending color or among the gradient colors.

Spectrum gradient color.

Terrain gradient color.

Green->orange->violet gradient color .

Rainbow gradient color.

Cyan->green gradient color .

Cyan-> blue gradient color .

Pink->blue gradient color.

Blue->red gradient color.

Green->red gradient color.

Green->blue gradient color .

Yellow->blue gradient color .

Yellow->green gradient color.

Yellow->red gradient color.

Cyan->black gradient color .

Pink->black gradient color.

Yellow->black gradient color.

Blue->black gradient color.

Green->black gradient color.

Red->black gradient color .

Cyan->white gradient color.

Pink->white gradient color .

Yellow->white gradient color.

Blue->white gradient color .

Green->white gradient color.

Red->white gradient color.

Black->white gradient color.

The Colors class. This class is mainly for providing the color scheme as well as generating all kinds of gradient and random colors.

Constructs a new object identical to the given Colors object.

the given Colors object.

Creates a new Colors object according to the specified arguments.

the specified colors array of the Color.

Constructs a new Colors object.

This method is used to generate gradient colors predefined by system.

the count of gradient colors to be generated.The type of gradient colors.Whether to generate gradient colors reversely.A new gradient colors of the colors class.

Generates gradient colors with the specified gradient color count and the gradient colors.

the specified gradient color count being generated. Where, user can set the count of colors among the different gradient colors.The specified gradient colors which are the control colors user customized.A new gradient colors of the colors class.

Generate a set of random colors.

the gradient color count being generated.A new random colors of this colors.

Generate a set of random colors.

the count of the colors.The control colors.The random colors generated with the interval number and the control colors.

Returns a string that indicates the current Colors. The format is Count=.

A string that represents the colors.

Gets the enumerator of the Colors.

An enumerator of the Colors.

Converts current colors object to a color array.

Clears all the colors in Colors.

Removes one color starting at a specified index in the collection.

the specified index of the color.Returns true If successful; otherwise false.

Inserts a specified color value at a specified position.

The specified index where a color value is to be inserted.The specified color value to be inserted.Returns true If successful; otherwise false.

Adds the colors array to the current Colors.

a colors array to be added to the instance of the Colors.The count of addition.

This method is used to add a color element to the Colors, that is, add the specified color to current colors object. If successful, the color will be placed at the end of the Colors collection.

a color that represents the new color value to be added.If successful, returns the new index of color in Colors.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the Colors is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the Colors.

Gets the count of the colors in the Colors. The default value is zero.

Gets or sets the a single color from the Colors with the specified index.

The specified index of the color value, which begin with zero.

Defines the color space types. The display devices, such as the monitor, the projector, etc., and the printing devices, such as the printer, the press, etc., use different color models to generate colors. To better fit for different types of devices, SuperMap can define color in these seven color space types: RGB, CMYK, RGBA, CMY, YIQ, YUV and YCC.

This type is mainly used in the display system. RGB is the abbreviation for Red, Green and Blue. Color in the RGB color mode is composed of the three base colors, the weight value of the base color is ranging from 0 to 255. Different colors has different weight values.

This type is mainly used in the printing system.CMYK is the abbreviation for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black. The Cyan, Magenta and Yellow are used as the base color to form the different colors and the Black is used to adjust the brightness and the purity.

This type is mainly used in the display system.RGB is the abbreviation for Red, Green and Blue, A is the transparency.

This type is mainly used in the printing system. CMY is the abbreviation for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. The Cyan, Magenta and Yellow are used as the base color to form the different colors.

This type is mainly used in NTSC system.

This type is mainly used in PAL system.

This type is mainly used in JPEG system.

Defines the compressed texture type constants when creating model cache and scene cache.The compressed textures are the textures stored in compressed formats, this can reduce the video memory used by the textures.

The DDS compressed texture format is commonly used on PCs.DDS is short for DirectDraw Surface, it stores graphic data in the form of fixed length compression. It can be supported by video card on CP, and saves lots of video memory.

PVRTC compressed texture type, is a universal compressed texture type on iOS.Imagination Technologies developed the PVRTC compressed texture type for its PowerVR SGX series removable video chipset. PVRTC is the only compressed texture format supported by the mobile devices of Apple like iPhone, iPad, iPod Touch, etc. It is the recommended format for 3D developers. The compression ratio of PVRTC is 16:1. It remains the relatively good texture quality. Since mobile devices commonly share video memory and internal memory, using 16:1 PVRTC compression can save memory without damaging texture quality.For iOS developers, it is recommended to use the PVRTC compression format when creating model cache.

ETC1 compressed texture type, is a universal compressed texture type on Android.Ericsson Texture Compression 1 is short for ETC1, defined in OpenGL ES 2.0, supported by all Android devices which support OpenGL ES 2.0.For Android developers, it is recommended to use the ETC1 compression format when creating model cache.

Uncompressed compressed texture format

By overriding the Run method of the CoordSysTransRunnable class, the user can implement a custom transformation method for projected or geographic coordinate system.

By overriding the Run method, the user can implement a custom transformation method for projected or geographic coordinate system.

The parameters of the proposed method are passed by the CoordSysTransRunnableArgs class object(when the Convert method of the CoordSysTranslator class is called, the system will pass the transformation parameters to the CoordSysTransRunnableArgs class object). The interface provided by the class can provide all the parameters required when performing a customization conversion algorithm.

Transformation action.

Convert the original geographic coordinate system to the projected coordinate system with the same geographic coordinate system, for the source projected coordinate system.

Convert the original projected coordinate system to the geographic coordinate system, for the source projected coordinate system.

Different geographic coordinate system, from source to target.

Different geographic coordinate system, from target to source.

Convert the original geographic coordinate system to the projected coordinate system with the same geographic coordinate system, for the target projected coordinate system.

Convert the original projected coordinate system to the geographic coordinate system, for the target projected coordinate system.

Constructs a new CoordSysTransRunnableArgs object.

Coordinates string to be converted(2D points).Coordinates string to be converted(3D points).The projection coordinate system of the data to be converted.the specified target projected coordinate system.Geographic coordinate system parameters.The conversion mode.Transformation action. For details, please see CoordSysTransRunnableArgs.Action.

Coordinates string to be converted(2D points).

Coordinates string to be converted(3D points).

The projection coordinate system of the data to be converted.

the specified target projected coordinate system.

Transformation action.

The transformation parameters in the CoordSysTranslator.Convert method can be easily obtained when the Run method is implemented.

The geographic coordinate system parameters in the CoordSysTranslator.Convert method can be easily obtained when the Run method is implemented.

The DatasetGridCollection class.

Constructs a new DatasetGridCollectionInfo class object.

Copy constructor. Constructs a new DatasetGridCollectionInfo according to the specified object.

Specified DatasetGridCollectionInfo class object.

Constructs a new DatasetGridCollectionInfo class object according to given parameters.

the specified name of the image dataset collection.The given name.Specified dataset compression encoding type.Block size type of specified raster dataset.

Releases objects.

Output the object to a String object.

String object.

Gets or sets the name of the image dataset collection.

Gets or sets the pixel format.

Gets or sets block size type of specified raster dataset.

Gets or sets the compression encode type of the raster dataset.

The DatasetGroup class is used to provide a logical structure type for managing the subgroup in the datasource.

Add the given dataset to the current DatasetGroup.

The specified dataset.The index of the added dataset in the current DatasetGroup.

Remove the given dataset in the current DatasetGroup.

A boolean, whether the dataset with the given name is removed successfully.

Returns the index of the dataset with the given name in the current DatasetGroup.

The specified name of dataset.The index of the given dataset in the current DatasetGroup.

Gets the parent node in the current DatasetGroup.

Gets the child group collection of the current DatasetGroups.

Gets or sets the name of the current DatasetGroup.

Gets or sets the Dataset object with the given index in the current DatasetGroup.

The index of the Dataset object to query.The dataset object.

Gets the datasource of the current DatasetGroup.

Gets the count of Dataset objects in the current DatasetGroup.

Occurs when renaming an instance of DatasetGroup.

Occurs when an instance of DatasetGroup is renamed.

Occurs when a dataset is added to the DatasetGroup.

Occurs when deleting dataset from the DatasetGroup.

Occurs when a dataset is deleted from the DatasetGroup.

Provides data for the DatasetGroups.Created event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupCreatedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of the DatasetGroups to create.

Gets or sets the name of the DatasetGroups to create.

Represents the method that handles the DatasetGroups.Created event.

The source of the event.A DatasetGroupCreatedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroups.Deleted event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupItemAddedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of the DatasetGroups to delete.

Gets or sets the name of the DatasetGroups to delete.

Represents the method that will handle the DatasetGroup.Removed event.

The source of the event.A DatasetGroupDeletingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroups.Deleted event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupItemAddedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of the DatasetGroups to delete.The value indicating whether the event should be canceled or not. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the name of the DatasetGroups to delete.

Gets or sets whether to cancel the value of the event. true if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method that will handle the DatasetGroup.Removed event.

The source of the event.A DatasetGroupDeletingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroup.Added event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupItemAddedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of dataset specified to add.

Gets or sets the name of the dataset specified to add.

Represents the method that will handle the DatasetGroup.Added event.

The source of the event.The DatasetGroupItemAddedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroup.Removed event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupItemRemovedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of the dataset to delete.

Gets or sets the name of the dataset to delete.

Represents the method that will handle the DatasetGroup.Removed event.

The source of the event.The DatasetGroupItemRemovedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroup.Removing event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupItemRemovedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of the dataset to delete.The value indicating whether the event should be canceled or not. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the name of the dataset to delete.

Gets or sets whether to cancel the value of the event. true if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method that will handle the DatasetGroup.Removed event.

The source of the event.The DatasetGroupItemRemovedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroup.Renamed event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupRenamedEventArgs class with the given parameter.

The name of the DatasetGroup to rename.The new name of the DatasetGroup.

Gets or sets the old name of DatasetGroup.

Gets or sets the new name of DatasetGroup.

Represents the method that handles the DatasetGroup.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A DatasetGroupRenamingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provides data for the DatasetGroup.Renamed event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetGroupRenamedEventArgs class with the given parameter.

The original name of the DatasetGroup specified to rename.The new name of the DatasetGroup.The value indicating whether the event should be canceled or not. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the original name of the DatasetGroup to be renamed.

Gets or sets the new name of the DatasetGroup after renamed.

Gets or sets whether to cancel the value of the event. true if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method that handles the DatasetGroup.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A DatasetGroupRenamingEventArgs object that contains the event data.

The DatasetGroups class is the collection of the DatasetGroup object, it is used to manage DatasetGroup object, such as creating, deleting or getting the DatasetGroup object with the given index or name.

Gets the enumerator of the DatasetGroups.

The enumerator that iterates through a collection.

Gets the index of the DatasetGroup with the given name in the current DatasetGroups.

The name of the DatasetGroups.The index of the DatasetGroup with the given name in the current DatasetGroups.

Create a DatasetGroup object with the given name, then add it to DatasetGroups.

The name of the DatasetGroups.The created DatasetGroup.

Determines whether the current DatasetGroups contains the DatasetGroup object with the given name.

The name of the DatasetGroups.A boolean, whether the current DatasetGroups contains the DatasetGroup object with the given name.

Delete the DatasetGroup object with the given name in the current DatasetGroups contains the .

The name of the DatasetGroups.A boolean, whether the DatasetGroup objectwith the given name is removed from the DatasetGroups successfully.

Gets or sets the DatasetGroup object with the given index in the DatasetGroups.

Specify the index of the DatasetGroup object to query. The indices start from 0.The DatasetGroup object with the given index in the current DatasetGroups.

Gets the DatasetGroup with the given name in the current DatasetGroups.

The name of the DatasetGroups.The DatasetGroup with the given name in the current DatasetGroups.

Gets the total number of DatasetGroup objects in the current DatasetGroups.

Occurs when an instance of DatasetGroup is created.

Occurs when creating an instance of DatasetGroup.

Occurs when an instance of DatasetGroup is deleted.

DatasetImageCollectionInfo class. It's used to set the creating information including name, pixel format, pixel block type, band number and encoding type, etc.

Constructs a new DatasetImageCollectionInfo object.

Initializes a new instance which is identical with the specified DatasetImageCollectionInfo.

the given DatasetImageCollectionInfo object.

Creates a new DatasetImageCollectionInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The name of the specified image dataset collection.The specified pixel format of the image dataset collection.The encode types of the image dataset collection.The specified pixel block type of the image dataset collection.The band number of the specified image dataset collection.

Output the DatasetImageCollectionInfo object to a format string.

The format string to represent the DatasetImageCollectionInfo object.

Releases the resources occupied by DatasetImageCollectionInfo.

Gets or sets the band number of the image dataset collection.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the block size of the image dataset collection.

The default value is BolockSizeOption.BS_256.

Gets or sets the encoding type of this image dataset collection..

The default value is EncodeType.DCT.

Gets or sets the name of the image dataset collection.

UntitledDatasetImage

Gets or sets the pixel type for the image dataset collection.

The default value is PixelFormat.RGB.

Domain management class. This class provides creation, acquisition and inspection functions.

The interface is to access the associated domain information of the specified field in the specified dataset, if the dataset and the field name are valid and there is associated domain information, it will return the domain information, otherwise it returns null.

Datasetthe name of the field specified.It will return the domain information if successfully, otherwise it returns null.

The interface is used to set the domain for the specified field in the specified dataset, and the dataset name and field name must be valid, otherwise set failed. If the domain is valid it will set, if the domain is null, it will automatically delete this domain information for the field.

Datasetthe name of the field specified.Domain.a boolean, true means the setting is successful.

Check whether the specified field value is valid(within the domain), if not it will return the record ID.

Datasetthe name of the field specified.Returns the ID collection of all invalid records.

Check whether the specified field value is valid(within the domain), if not it will return false.

Datasetthe name of the field specified.Returns true if it is valid; otherwise, false.

Domain type

Ranges domain.

Range reverse.

Code ranges.

Code ranges reverse.

Interval type

Both closed.

Close and Open.

Open and Close.

Both open.

The DynamicSegmentInfo object is used to manage the datasets and roles, and query the specific roles, the target Recordset corresponding to their ID array with the Query() method.

Gets the dataset with the given role in the DynamicSegmentInfo object.

The dataset role to get.The dataset with the given role in the DynamicSegmentInfo object.

Determines the role of the dataset passed in the DynamicSegmentInfo object, return the role.

the dataset to contrast.returns the role corresponding to the dataset passed in.

Query the record o the dataset in the target role dataset and ID array with source role and the ID array.

the destination role to query, this parameter is used to identify the corresponding dataset.the role of the source, this parameter is used to indentify the corresponding dataset.the ID array of the record corresponding to the source role, it is used to get the ID of the record corresponding to the target role.the Recordset object in the destination role dataset that corresponding to the ID array.

Release the resource occupied by DynamicSegmentInfo.

The DynamicSegmentManager class is used to manage the dynamic segmentation information of the datasource.

According to the given dataset, query the dynamic segmentation relationship object collection.

The specified target dataset, return the dynamic segmentation relationship of the destination dataset will be returned.The DynamicSegmentInfo collection that contains the specific dataset.

Gets all the dynamic segmentation relations in the target datasource.

the target datasource.The dynamic segmentation relationship object collection corresponding to the target datasource.

Delete all the dynamic segmentation relations that contains the dataset according to the given dataset.

the given dataset.true if successful; otherwise false.

Delete all the dynamic segmentation relations in the target datasource.

the target datasource.true if successful; otherwise false.

Defines dynamic segmentation role constant.

Do not have any corresponding role.

The route dataset role.

The event table role.

The result dataset role.

This class defines the field sign constants.

ID field.

Geometry field.

NodeID field.

FNode field.

TNode field.

EdgeID field.

This enumeration defines the force influence mode constant, which can be used to change the speed of the particle

Average mode, particles move steadily, the effect is soft.

Add mode, the speed of the particles change fast, create drastic effects like shake and explode.

The GeoArtText class derives from the Geometry class.This class provides the editing information of the GeoArtText object, you can edit the GeoArtText object by seting this class.

Creates a new GeoArtText object according to the specified arguments.

The specified GeoArtText object.

Creates a new GeoArtText object according to the specified arguments.

The bounding box of the given GeoArtText object.Specify the text used to create a new GeoArtText object.

Set the image used for fill the GeoArtText object.

The specified image.

Gets the image used for fill the GeoArtText object.

The image used for fill the GeoArtText object.

Releases the resources before recycling GeoArtText.

Releases all resources used by the GeoArtText.

Gets or set the text of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or set the font height of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or set the font width of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or set the font name of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or sets whether the font or the GeoArtText object is italic.

Gets or set the rotation angle of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or sets whether the GeoArtText object has shadowing effect.

Gets or sets the shadow color of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or sets the horizontal offset the the art text shadow.

Gets or sets the vertical offset the the art text shadow.

Gets or sets whether the art text is hollow.

Gets or sets the fill type of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or sets the pattern type of the GeoArtText object.

Gets or sets the pen style.

Gets or sets the pen color.

Gets or sets the pen width.

Gets or sets whether to overall scaling the art text.

Gets or sets whether to display art text vertically.

Defines fill types for the art text.

Gradual type, does not support printing vector, supporting printing raster.

Image type, use the image as the fill texture. It does not support vector printing, supports raster printing.

Defines PenStyle constants of the GeoArtText.

Solid.

Dash.

Dot dash.

The pen type composed of units, units, each of which consist a short line and a dot line.

The pen type composed of units, units, each of which consist a short line and two dot lines.

Null.

GeoMapGrid class, used for add fictitious graticule or MeasuredGrid for the map in layout, or add custom reference grid.

Constructs a new GeoMapGrid object.

Initializes a new instance identical to the given GeoMapGrid object.

The specified GeoMapGrid object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the type of the gird to add to the map, for example, if the map is in longitude and latitude coordinate system, the grid can be graticules, if the map is in plane coordinate system, the grid can be MeasuredGrid, users can also add custom reference grid for the map.

Gets or sets the border style of the graticules or MeasuredGrid to be added to the map.

Gets or sets the grid line style of the graticules or MeasuredGrid to be added to the map. For example, not to add grid lines but add crosses at the intersection of vertical gridlines and the horizontal gridlines; or add active gridline and customize the line style of the gridlines.

Gets or sets the style of the gridline when adding graticules or MeasuredGrid, this property is available only when the gridline as active line.

Gets or sets the horizontal distance between two neighbouring grid lines. For graticules, the unit is degrees, for square grid, the unit is kilometers.

Gets or sets the vertical distance between two neighbouring grid lines. For graticules, the unit is degrees, for square grid, the unit is kilometers.

Gets or sets whether to display the major division ticks.

Gets or sets the style of the major division ticks.

Gets or sets the horizontal position of the text.

Gets or sets the vertical position of the text.

Gets or sets the style of the text.

Gets or sets whether to display the minor division ticks of the MeasuredGrid.

Gets or sets the style of the minor division ticks.

Gets or sets the number of the minor division ticks.

It is not supported in this class.

This enumeration defines the type constant of adding grid lines (graticules or measured grid) for the map.

There is no grid lines in the graticules or measured grid added to the map, do not display the grid lines.

Add cross to the intersection of the vertical and horizontal gridline.

The gridline type is SolidLine, you can customize the style of the gridline after this setting.

This enumeration defines the GridType constant added to map.

Custom grid. Add custom reference gird to map.

Measured grid, measure grid can be added to a map in planar coordinate system.

Graticule, graticule can be added to a map in latitude and longitude coordinates.

This enumeration defines the constant of the text horizontal position for graticules and MeasuredGrid.

The text is on the left of the grid.

The text is on the endpoint of the grid.

The text is on the right of the grid.

The enumeration defines the SuperMap license connection mode constant.

Connects the license by default way.

Connect hardware key only, including stand alone key and network key. When using this mode, specify the computer name or IP address of the corresponding license server is optional, see the License.LicenseConnectServer property.

Only connect local license.

Only connect remote license.

Connects the license according to the specified license server name. To use this method, it's needed to specify the computer name of the corresponding license server, see the License.LicenseConnectServer property.

Connects the license according to the specified license server IP. To use this method, it's needed to specify the computer IP of the corresponding license server, see the License.LicenseConnectServer property.

Connect to the license according to specified key number (that is, the hardware key ID or the license file ID). It's needed to specify the corresponding key number, see the License.LicenseConnectServer property.

License module information class.

Gets the ID of the license module.

Gets the name of the license module.

Gets the connection way of the license module.

Whether the license module is a trial version.

Whether the license module can be used in the virtual machine.

Gets maximum log-on number for the license module.

Gets the starting date for the license module.

Gets the end date for the license module.

Gets the hardware or file license ID the currently connected license module is in.

Gets the license type. “Hardware Key” means hardware key; “Soft License” means file license.

Node animation type, which can set the model movement along the specified route, and you can control its movement state.

Sets the track for the node animation, it only supports GeoLine3D.

Specified Geometry3D 3D line object.True indicates that the setting is successful, otherwise it is false.

Returns the animated track of the node.

The animated track of the node.

Gets or sets whether the current animation is enabled. True indicates that it is enabled, and False indicates it is not.

Gets or sets the time length of the node animation operation cycle, unit: second.

Gets or sets the play mode of the node animation, currently only supports two kinds: 1, Once. 2, Loop.

Gets or sets the time position of the animation. Unit: seconds. An animation period is from 0 to Length, after setting this property, the model is immediately moved to the TimePostition position in the animation cycle.

Gets the animated direction angle which is the running direction and right north direction in between.

Gets the incline direction angle of the node, which is the incline direction and horizontal plane.

Gets the position of the animation node.

Node time position changing event. The event is triggered when the node animation time position changes. This event is not triggered when the TimePostition property is called to set the time position. If you want to judge whether the node animation runs to the end, you can monitor this event. When the returned time parameter: TimePosition is equal to the length of the node animation, it means it's the end of the operation.

节点动画结束事件

The exception occurred when running the application. Usually, it is because cannot pass the parameter checking.

Construct a new ObjectsRuntimeException object with the given parameters.

The given exception information.

The CoordSysTranslator, which is mainly used to transform in different projected coordinates and projected coordinate systems.

This method is used to transform geographic coordinates of the specified point2Ds into projected coordinates with the specified parameters in the same geographic coordinate system.

The specified points to be transformed, which is instance of Point2Ds.The projected coordinates system.True if successful; otherwise, false.

This method is used to transform projected (planar) coordinates of the specified point2Ds into geographic coordinates with the specified parameters in the same geographic coordinate system.

The specified points to be transformed, which is instance of Point2Ds.The specified projected coordinate system.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Transforms projection of datasource with target projected coordinate system. This method will change the source datasource.

the datasource to be transformed.The target projected coordinate system.The parameters of projection transformation. It contains three translations, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor. Please refer to CoordSysTransParameter class.Projection transformation methods. For details, see the CoordSysTransMethod enumeration type. If the source projection and the target projection have the same geographic reference system, this parameter will not work, users can choose any method.If the coordinates are transformed successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Converts the projected coordinate system of the specified dataset to the target projected coordinate system. The dataset will be saved in the specified datasource after translation.

the datasource to be transformed.The target datasource.The parameters of projection transformation. It contains three translations, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor. Please refer to CoordSysTransParameter class.Projection transformation methods. For details, see the CoordSysTransMethod enumeration type. If the source projection and the target projection have the same geographic reference system, this parameter will not work, users can choose any method.If the coordinates are transformed successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Transforms projection of the geometry with the source and target projected coordinate system. This method will change the source geometry.

the geometry to be transformed.The source projected coordinate system.The target projected coordinate system.The parameters of projection transformation. It contains three translations, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor. Please refer to CoordSysTransParameter class.Projection transformation methods. For details, see the CoordSysTransMethod enumeration type. If the source projection and the target projection have the same geographic reference system, this parameter will not work, users can choose any method.If the coordinates are transformed successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Transforms projection of the Point2Ds with the source and target projected coordinate system. This method will change the source Point2Ds.

The Point2Ds to be transformed.The source projected coordinate system.The target projected coordinate system.The parameters of projection transformation. It contains three translations, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor. Please refer to CoordSysTransParameter class.Projection transformation methods. For details, see the CoordSysTransMethod enumeration type. If the source projection and the target projection have the same geographic reference system, this parameter will not work, users can choose any method.If the coordinates are transformed successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Converts the projected coordinate system of the specified dataset to the target projected coordinate system.

The dataset to be transformed.The target projected coordinate system.The parameters of projection transformation. It contains three translations, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor. Please refer to CoordSysTransParameter class.Projection transformation methods. For details, see the CoordSysTransMethod enumeration type. If the source projection and the target projection have the same geographic reference system, this parameter will not work, users can choose any method.If the coordinates are transformed successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Converts the projected coordinate system of the specified dataset to the target projected coordinate system. The dataset will be saved in the specified datasource after translation.

The dataset to be transformed.The target projected coordinate system.The target datasource.The new dataset that has been copied.The parameters of projection transformation. It contains three translations, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor. Please refer to CoordSysTransParameter class.Projection transformation methods. For details, see the CoordSysTransMethod enumeration type. If the source projection and the target projection have the same geographic reference system, this parameter will not work, users can choose any method.Returns the dataset after conversion.

Users can use the SuperMap projection extension function to customize the conversion algorithm. The CoordSysTransRunnable class object will be used. The method will call the given custom conversion algorithm to convert the coordinates.

The dataset to be transformed.Parameter information for setting the target projection coordinate system for the conversion. Including: type of geographic coordinates (Geodetic Reference), projection coordinate reference information (standard parallels, the central meridian, horizontal and vertical offset, etc), projection method (such as Conformal Conic Projection, azimuthal equidistant projection), projected coordinate system type.Datasource to save the converted data.Dataset name after the conversion.Geographic coordinate system conversion parameters. Including the coordinates offset, rotation angle, scale. If the original and the target projection coordinate system have different geographic coordinate system, it is required to correctly set these two parameters CoordSysTransParameter and CoordSysTransMethod, otherwise, it's not needed.Method for the conversion. Here, the conversion is based on the custom conversion method, so the value of the coordSysTransMethod parameter is set to CoordSysTransMethod.Extension.Custom conversion algorithm. When it's CoordSysTransMethod.Extension, the method will call the customized conversion method provided by the runnable parameter to realize the projection conversion operation.Returns the dataset after conversion.

Specifies the constant that defines the Geographic transformation methods.If the source and target geographic coordinate system is different in projection transformation, it may be necessary to transform from one to another. There are two methods commonly used, they are the equation-based methods and the grid-based methods. This class provides method based on the equation. According to the number of the parameters used in the equation, the equation-based methods can be divided in to three-parameter and seven-parameter methods.For more information about these parameters refer to CoordSysTransParameter class. GeocentricTranslation, Molodensky, MolodenskyAbridged are three-parameter methods. PositionVector, CoordinateFrame, BursaWolf are seven-parameter methods.

Geocentric Translations.

Molodensky.

Abridged Molodensky.

Position vector.

Seven-parameter method.

Bursa-Wolf.

Users can customize the transformation algorithm through the provided projection extension function. CoordSysTranslator.Convert() is used to realize the transformation. The CoordSysTransRunnable class object parameter is the customized conversion method. It's not supported in the map's dynamic projection transformation.

Molodenski-Badekas projection transformation method, a 10-parameter projection transformation model.

Transformation parameter class, including offset distance, three rotations in X, Y and Z axes respectively and a scale factor.

Constructs a new CoordSysTransParameter object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given CoordSysTransParameter object.

The given CoordSysTransParameter object.

Exports the CoordSysTransParameter object to an XML string.

Returns the XML string represents the CoordSysTransParameter object.

Retrieves properties of CoordSysTransParameter object with a specified XML string.

The specified XML string represents the CoordSysTransParameter object.Returns true, if successful; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources used by the CoordSysTransParameter.

Gets or sets the offset along the X axis. The unit is meters.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the offset along the Y axis. The unit is meters.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the offset along the Z axis. The unit is meters.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the angle of rotation in the X direction. The unit is radians.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the angle of rotation in the Y direction. The unit is radians.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the angle of rotation in the Z direction. The unit is radians.

The default value is 0.

Returns or sets the scale difference of projection.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the X-coordinate of the rotation origin.

Gets or sets the Y-coordinate of the rotation origin.

Gets or sets the Z-coordinate of the rotation origin.

Defines the modes for the start base point of the corner fill.

Start from the bottom-left.This mode uses the initial image to fill the bottom-left corner, then according to the clockwise rule fills other three corners with the initial image after rotating 90, 180, 270 degrees clockwise separately.Below shows the LeftBottom mode.The specified image.Start from the bottom-left

Start from the top-leftThis mode uses the initial image to fill the top-left corner, then according to the clockwise rule fills other three corners with the initial image after rotating 90, 180, 270 degree clockwise separately.Below shows the LeftTop mode.The specified image.Start from the top-left

Start from the top-rightThis mode uses the initial image to fill the top-right corner, then according to the clockwise rule fills other three corners with the initial image after rotating 90, 180, 270 degree clockwise separately.Below shows the RightTop mode.The specified image.Start from the top-right

Start from the bottom-rightThis mode uses the initial image to fill the bottom-right corner, then according to the clockwise rule fills other three corners with the initial image after rotating 90, 180, 270 degree clockwise separately.Below shows the RightBottom mode.The specified image.Start from the bottom-right

Defines the cursor types.Generally, the cursor can be used as the pointer which to point the record in a recordset. So we can locate a certain record by the cursor moved forward and backward.

Static cursor.The static cursor is used to find the data and the static copy of the recordset of the report. In addition, the adding, deleting or updating can not be seen by other users. The static cursor is only a snapshot of the data, that is, it can not record the modification made to the recordset by other users since it has been created. If you use this static cursor, you can navigate forward and backward. Since the function of the static cursor is simple, the resource used by the static cursor is less than the dynamic cursor.

The meaning of the dynamic cursor is that it can record the operations performed by other users such as adding, updating and deleting, etc.The meaning of the dynamic cursor is that it can record the operations performed by other users such as adding, updating and deleting, etc. It allows move up and down in a recordset, but the bookmark operation which is not supported by data provider isn't not included.Though the function of the dynamic cursor is powerful, it is the one occupies a lot of resources of system. Users can use the dynamic cursor to get the information about the changes to the recordset saved by cursor, for example the other users' editing, adding and deleting. If the provider of the data allows the dynamic cursor to be used, the cursor will get the data from datasource for refreshing the recordset by querying at intervals. It's no doubt that the process will use a lot of resources.

Provides data for Geometry.CustomGeometryCreated event.

Initializes a new instance of CustomGeometryCreatedEventArgs according to the parameters.

The handle of specified geometry object.The specified custom geometry object.

Gets or sets the custom geometry object created by handle.

Gets or sets the handle of the created geometry object.

The method class for building the Geometry.CustomGeometryCreated event.

The source event.A CustomGeometryCreatedEventArgs class containing the event data.

Provides data for the Dataset.Closed event.

The event set of dataset.

Initializes a new instance of DatasetEventArgs according to the specified parameters.

The specified dataset object.

Gets the dataset object of the event.

Initializes a new instance of DatasetClosedEventArgs according to the specified parameters.

The specified dataset object.

Represents the method that handles the Dataset.Closed event.

The source event.A DatasetClosedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Dataset.Closing event.

Initializes a new instance of DatasetClosingEventArgs class with specified parameters.

The specified dataset object.A value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates not to cancel.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles the Dataset.Closing event.

The source event.A DatasetClosingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasets.Created event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetCreatedEventArgs class.

The given name of dataset.

Gets or sets the name of dataset.

Represents the method that handles the Datasets.Created event.

The source of the event.A DatasetCreatedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasets.Deleted event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetDeletedEventArgs class.

The specified name of dataset.

Gets or sets the name of dataset.

Represents the method that handles a Datasets.Deleted event.

The source of the event.A DatasetDeletedEventHandler that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasets.Deleting event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetDeletingEventArgs class.

The specified name of dataset.A value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates not to cancel.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets or sets the name of dataset.

Represents the method that handles the Datasets.Deleting event.

The source of the event.A DatasetDeletingEventArgs that contains the event data.

This enumeration defines the creation of a pyramid type constant.

The average.

Adjacent values.

The DatasetGrid class. The DatasetGrid class is used to describe the grid data, such as DEM dataset and land use map.

Sets the bound of grid dataset to the geographical coordinates.

the specified grid bounds.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Removes the pyramid of the grid dataset.

Returns true If successful; otherwise false.

Builds raster pyramids for a grid dataset. Pyramids can speed up display of raster data by returning only the data at a specified resolution that is required for the display.

If building successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

This method is used to create a specified type of pyramid for raster data to improve the display speed of raster data.

Specifies the type of pyramid method to be built.Create success, return true successfully, and false on failure.

This method is used to transform the x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates system to grid point in grid dataset.

The specified point which is x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates system.A grid in grid dataset.

This method is used to transform the grid with the specified row and column to the point which is x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates system.

the specified image point with the specified row and column. Point(x,y)a point which is x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates.

Sets the grid value with the specified row and column in grid dataset.

The specified column of the grid dataset.The specified row of the grid dataset.The specified grid value.The original gird value.

Gets the grid value with the specified row and column in grid dataset.

The specified column of the grid dataset.The specified row of the grid dataset.The gird value.

Calculates the extremum of the grid dataset. Namely the maximum value and the minimum value.

If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Updates according to the specified grid dataset.

The specified grid dataset.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Update the image pyramid in the specific extent.

update the image pyramid in the specific extent.Returns true if the pyramid is updated successfully; otherwise, false.

Implement the statistics for the raster dataset. Return the statistics result of the raster dataset, including max, min, average, median, thickest value, thinnest value, variance, standard deviation and so on.

The statistics result object of the raster dataset.

Create the cell value property sheet, and its type is tabular dataset DatasetType.Tabular.Unable to create attribute table when the pixel format of the grid dataset is PixelFormat.Single or PixelFormat.Double. When called this method, null will be returned.Returns the system field and two raster information fields of Tabular Dataset. GRIDVALUE records the cell value, and GRIDCOUNT records the cell number corresponding to the cell values.

Datasource for storing the table datasets.The name of the table dataset to be created.Returns the table object of the cell value.

Gets a value indicates that whether the grid dataset has built the pyramid. True represents that the grid dataset has built the pyramid while False represents that has not.

Gets or sets the clipped region of the grid dataset.After set this property, only the given region will be displayed.Note:1. When the geographic extent of the raster dataset set by the users (namely, call the DatasetGrid.SetGeoReference() method) hasn't overlap region with the clipping region, the raster dataset won't be displayed.2. When reset the geographic extent of the raster dataset, it won't modify the clipping region of raster dataset automatically.

Gets the maximum value of the grid matrix in grid dataset.

The default value is 0.

Gets the minimum value of the grid matrix in grid dataset.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the empty value of the grid dataset. When the empty value exists in the grid dataset, user can use -9999 to express the empty value.

Returns the total count of columns which are gotten after the grid dataset has been divided into many blocks.

Returns the total count of rows which are gotten after the grid dataset has been divided into many blocks.

Gets the pixel format of the grid dataset. The pixel can be expressed with the byte, bit is the unit. For more information, please refer to the PixelFormat enumeration.

Gets the height of the grid of the DatasetGrid. The unit is pixel.

Gets the width of the image dataset. The unit is pixel.

Gets or sets the info of current NetCDFVarInfo. It takes effect after reopening.

Gets or sets the Color Table.

The default value is Count=0.

Gets the statistics result of the bands of grid dataset. Including Max, Min, Average, median, thickest value, thinnest value, variance and standard deviation.If the raster dataset didn't conduct the raster statistics, namely, didn't call the BuildStatistics() method, every statistics in the result is 0.If the pixel format of the grid dataset is PixelFormat.Single or PixelFormat.Double, the majority array (got by the StatisticsResult.Majority property) and minority array (got by the StatisticsResult.Minority property) are null arrays. The median value (got by the StatisticsResult.MedianValue property) is 0. The statistics doesn't contain the three results.

Returns Dictionary object, the keys are the bands of the image dataset, the values are the ImageStatisticsResult objects.

Gets the pixel block type. Used for grid or image dataset.

The grid dataset information class. This class contains the information about grid dataset, such as the name of the dataset, the width of the dataset, the encode type, bloke size, minimum value, maximum value and etc.

Creates a new DatasetGridInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name of the grid dataset.The width of the grid dataset in pixel.The height of the grid dataset in pixel.The specified pixel format of the grid dataset.The specified encode type of the grid dataset.

Creates a new DatasetGridInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The name of the grid dataset.The width of the grid dataset in pixel.The height of the grid dataset in pixel.The specified pixel format of the grid dataset.The specified encode type of the grid dataset.The specified block size of the grid dataset.

Constructs a new object identical to the given DatasetGridInfo object.

The specified DatasetGridInfo object.

Constructs a new DatasetGridInfo object.

Creates a new DatasetGridInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name.The specified template dataset.

Returns a string that indicates the current DatasetGridInfo in the format of {Name=””,Bounds={},Width=,Height=,PixelFormat=,BlockSize=,EncodeType=,NoValue=,MinValue=,MaxValue=}.

A string that indicates the current DatasetGridInfo.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the DatasetGridInfo is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the DatasetGridInfo.

Gets or sets the maximum value of the grid matrix in grid dataset.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the minimum value of the grid matrix in grid dataset.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the empty value of the grid dataset. When the empty value exists in the grid dataset, user can use -9999 to express the empty value.

The default value is -9999.

Gets or sets the encoding type of this dataset.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the block size of the grid dataset. The default value is 256*256 pixels, that is BlockSizeOption.BS_256.

The default value is BlockSizeOption.BS_256.

Gets or sets the pixel format of the grid dataset. The pixel can be expressed with the byte, bit is the unit. For more information, please refer to the PixelFormat enumeration.

The default value is Double type.

Gets or sets the height of the grid in grid dataset and the unit is pixel. The unit is pixels.

The default value is 256 pixels.

Gets or sets the width of the grid in grid dataset and the unit is pixel. The unit is pixels.

The default value is 256 pixels.

Sets the bounds of the grid dataset.

The bounds is a rectangle and the default is (0,0,255,255). That is the rectangle with x-coordinate of the left edge, y-coordinate of the bottom edge, x-coordinate of the right edge and y-coordinate of the top edge.

Gets or sets the name of the DatasetGridInfo.

The default value is UntitledDatasetGrid.

The DatasetImage class, which is used to describe the image data, such as image map, multi-wave image and photo.

Removes the pyramid of the grid dataset.

True, if successful; otherwise, false.

Builds raster pyramids for a image dataset. Pyramids can speed up display of image data by returning only the data at a specified resolution that is required for the display.

If building successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Sets the bound rectangle of grid dataset to the geographical coordinates.

The specified image bounds.If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

This method is used to transform the x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates system to image point in image dataset.

The specified point which is x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates system.A image point in image dataset.

This method is used to transform the image point with the specified row and column to the point which is x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates system.

the specified image point with the specified row and column.A point which is x-coordinate and y-coordinate in geographical coordinates.

Adds the band to the specified image dataset.

the image dataset.Returns the numbers of added bands.

Adds batch band to the specified image dataset collection.

the image datasets.Returns the numbers of added bands.

Adds batch band to the specified image dataset collection at a specified index.

the image dataset which contains the band to append.The index of the band to be added.Returns the numbers of added bands.

Deletes the specified band by the specified index.

The index of the specified band.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes bands in the grid dataset by the specified start index and the specified count.

The specified start index of the deleting.The specified count of the bands to be deleted.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Returns the index of the band by the specified name of the band.

the name of the specified band.Returns the index of the specified band.

Updates according to the specified image dataset.

The specified image dataset.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Update the image pyramid in the given extent.

update the image pyramid in the specific extent.Returns true if the pyramid is updated successfully; otherwise, false.

Perform statistics operation for the image dataset and return a dictionary object. The keys of the dictionary object are the bands of the image dataset, the values are the statistics result object. The results include the maximum value, minimum value, mean value, mid-value, majority, minority, variance, standard deviation, etc.

Returns Dictionary object, the keys are the bands of the image dataset, the values are the ImageStatisticsResult objects.

Calculate the extreme values (maximum value and minimum value) of the image dataset. After called this method, the MaxValue and MinValue got are the maximum and minimum values of the pixels of the image dataset. If you do not call this method, the two attribute values got are the default values 0.

If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Calculates the extremum of the grid dataset. Namely the maximum value and the minimum value.

The band number of the specified image data to be calculated the extreme value.If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.

Gets the value of the pixel with the specified row and column in specified band of the image dataset.

The specified column index which starts with 0.The specified row index which starts with 0.Specified band index, starting from 0.The value of the pixel with the specified row and column in specified band of the image dataset. For RGB and RGBA format image data, the method's return value is int value in Color object.

Sets the value of the pixel with the specified row and column in specified band of image dataset.

The specified column index which starts with 0.The specified row index which starts with 0.Specified pixel value to be set. For RGB and RGBA format image data, the value is int value in Color object.Specified band index, starting from 0.New pixel value to be set.

Gets the NoData pixels of specified band for the image dataset.

Specified band index, starting from 0.The NoData pixels of specified band for the image dataset.

Sets the NoData pixels of specified band for the image dataset.

Specified NoData value.Specified band index, starting from 0.

Gets the minimum value of the pixel with the specified band in image dataset.

Specified band index, starting from 0.Gets the minimum value of the pixel with the specified band in image dataset.

Gets the maximum value of the pixel with the specified band in image dataset.

Specified band index, starting from 0.Gets the maximum value of the pixel with the specified band in image dataset.

Gets the format of the pixel with the specified band in image dataset.

Specified band index, starting from 0.Gets the format of the pixel with the specified band in image dataset.

Gets the color palette of the specified band in image dataset.

Specified band index, starting from 0.The color palette of the specified band in image dataset.

Sets the color palette of the specified band in image dataset.

The specified color palette.Specified band index, starting from 0.

Gets the encoding type of the specified band in image dataset.

Specified band index, starting from 0.The encoding type of the specified band in image dataset.

Gets or sets the name of the band.

The specified index of the band.

Gets the count of the bands.

Gets a value indicates that whether the image dataset has built the pyramid. True represents that the image dataset has built the pyramid while false represents that has not.

Gets or sets the clipped region of the image dataset.After set this property, only the given region will be displayed.Note:1. The image dataset will not be displayed if the extent of the image dataset set by the DatasetImage.SetGeoReference() method do not overlap with the clip region.2. When you reset the extent of the raster dataset, the clip region of the image dataset will not be modified automatically.

Returns the height of the image in image dataset and the unit is pixel.

Returns the width of the image in image dataset and the unit is pixel.

Gets the statistics result of all the bands of the image dataset, it is a Dictionary object. The keys are the bands of the image dataset and the values are the statistics result object of the bands.

Returns Dictionary object, the keys are the bands of the image dataset, the values are the ImageStatisticsResult objects.

Gets the pixel block type of the image data.

Image dataset collection class. The class is used to set related information when creating, including the name, width, height, band number, and storage block size, etc..

reates a new DatasetImageInfo object identical to the given DatasetImageInfo object.

The given DatasetImageInfo object.

Constructs a new DatasetImageInfo object.

Creates a new DatasetImageInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name.The specified template dataset.

Creates a new DatasetImageInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name of the image dataset.Returns the width of the image dataset in pixel.Returns the height of the image dataset in pixel.The specified pixel format of the image dataset.The encode types of the image dataset.The specified pixel block type of the image dataset.The specified band number of the image dataset.

Returns a string that indicates the current DatasetImageInfo in the format of {Name=””,Bounds={},Width=,Height=,PixelFormat=,BlockSize=,EncodeType=,ColorTable={}}.

a string that indicates the current DatasetImageInfo.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the DatasetImageInfo is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the DatasetImageInfo.

Gets or sets the encoding type of this dataset.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the block size of the image data.

The default value is BlockSizeOption.BS_256.

Gets or sets the pixel format of the image dataset.The pixel can be expressed with the byte, bit is the unit. For more information, please refer to the PixelFormat enumeration.

The default value is RGB.

Gets or sets the height of the image in image dataset and the unit is pixel.

The default value is 256 pixels.

Gets or sets the width of the image in image dataset and the unit is pixel.

The default value is 256 pixels.

Sets the bounds of the image dataset.

Gets or sets the name of the image dataset.

The default value is UntitledDatasetImage.

Gets or sets the band number of the image dataset.

The default value is 1.

Provides data for the Datasets.Renamed event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetRenamingEventArgs class.

The specified name of dataset, which is to be renamed.The new name of dataset.

Gets or sets the new name of dataset.

Gets or sets the old name of dataset.

Represents the method that handles the Datasets.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A DatasetRenamingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasets.Renaming event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetRenamingEventArgs class.

The specified name of dataset, which is to be renamed.The new name of dataset.A value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates not to cancel.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets or sets the new name of dataset.

Gets or sets the old name of dataset.

Represents the method that handles the Datasets.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A DatasetRenamingEventArgs that contains the event data.

The datasets class.The Datasets is mainly used to manage datasets in workspace and perform some operations to dataset, for example, create dataset, rename and delete dataset etc.

Gets the enumerator of the Datasets.

Returns the enumerator of the dataset set.

Checks whether to contain the dataset of the specified name in this datasource.

the name of the dataset.True if the dataset of the specified name contains in this datasource; Otherwise, returns false.

Renames the dataset.

The original name of the dataset.The new name of the dataset.If rename the name of the dataset successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false. Specially, performing an operation such as datasets.Rename("world","WORLD") when the name is not case-sensitive. The value is false.

Gets a dataset name not being used in datasource.

The name of the dataset.A string that can be used as the name of the dataset.

Gets a dataset name not being used in datasource.

The name of the dataset.Type:a string that can be used as the name of the dataset.

Determines whether the name of the dataset is valid in the current Datasets object.

The name of the dataset to be checked.True if the name is valid; Otherwise, returns false.

Determines whether the name of the dataset is valid in the current Datasets object.

The name of the dataset to be checked.The type of the dataset to be checked.true if the name is valid; Otherwise, returns false.

Deletes all the datasets.

Deletes the dataset with the specified index.

The index of the dataset to be deleted.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the dataset with the specified name.

The name of the dataset to be deleted.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Creates a new dataset used in the datasource file with the specified template dataset.

The name of the dataset to be created and the name can not be identical with the other name of the dataset in the same datasource file.The template dataset.If created successfully, returns the new dataset.

Creates the image dataset with the specified information of the image dataset.

The information of the image dataset.Returns the created image dataset if successful.

Creates the grid dataset with the specified information of the grid dataset.

raster dataset information.Returns the created image dataset if successful.

Creates the volume dataset with the specified information of the volume dataset.

Volume dataset information.Returns the created image dataset if successful.

Creates the vector dataset with the specified information of the vector dataset.

vector dataset information.Returns the created image dataset if successful.

Creates the topology dataset with the specified information of the topology dataset.

The information of the topology dataset.Returns the created image dataset if successful.

Returns the index of dataset in the dataset collection according to its name.

The name of dataset.It represent the position of the dataset in the dataset set.

Create a raster dataset collection based on a given name and pixel format.

the name specified.The given pixel format.the new built raster dataset collection.

Creates the raster dataset collection with the specified information.

the specified raster dataset collection information.the new built raster dataset collection.

Creates the image dataset collection with the specified information.

the name specified.the new built image dataset collection.

Creates the image dataset collection with the specified information.

The specified information of the image dataset collection.the new built image dataset collection.

Sets external table.

The specified user table name of the external table.Returns the dataset if it is successful; returns null if it is failed.

Create Mosaic data sets based on the specified data set name.

Specifies the name of the Mosaic data set to be created.Returns the Mosaic data set created.

Create Mosaic data sets based on the specified data set name and projection information.

Specifies the name of the Mosaic data set to be created.Specifies the projection of the Mosaic data set.Returns the Mosaic data set created.

Gets the datasource contained the Datasets.

Returns the dataset of the specified index.

The specified index of the dataset.

Returns the dataset of the specified name.

The specified name of the dataset.

Returns the count of the dataset in the Datasets.

Occurs when an instance of Dataset is created.

Occurs when all the instances of Dataset is deleted.

Occurs when all the instances of Dataset is deleting.

Occurs when an instance of Dataset is deleted.

Occurs when an instance of Dataset is deleting.

Occurs when an instance of Dataset is renamed.

Occurs when an instance of Dataset is renaming.

Provides data for the Datasets.DeletedAll event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetsDeletingAllEventArgs class with the specified parameter.

The count of datasets.

Gets or sets the count of the datasets deleted.

Represents the method that handles a Datasets.DeletedAll event.

The source of the event.A DatasetsDeletedAllEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasets.DeletingAll event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetsDeletingAllEventArgs class with the specified parameter.

A value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates not to cancel.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles a Datasets.DeletingAll event.

The source of the event.A DatasetDeletingAllEventArgs that contains the event data.

The DatasetTopology class.

Gets the dirty region object.

Returns the dirty region object.

Adds the TopogyValidatingItem object to the DatasetTopology object.

The TopogyValidatingItem object.Returns the index of the TopogyValidatingItem object newly added in the DatasetTopology object.

Deletes the specified TopogyValidatingItem object with the given index in the DatasetTopology object.

the specified index of the TopogyValidatingItem object.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Clears all the TopogyValidatingItem objects in the DatasetTopology object.

Gets the TopogyValidatingItem object with the specified index in the DatasetTopology object.

The specified index of the TopogyValidatingItem object.Returns the TopogyValidatingItem object.

Sets the TopologyValidatingItem object with the specified index in the DatasetTopology object.

The index of the specified TopogyValidatingItem object.The TopogyValidatingItem object.

Gets the count of the TopogyValidatingItem objects in the DatasetTopology object.

Returns the count of the TopogyValidatingItem objects in the DatasetTopology object.

Gets or sets the node snap tolerance. The unit is the same with the dataset coordinate system.

Gets the collection of the TopologyDatasetRelationItem objects.

Gets the dataset of the points which have the topology error. The name of the dataset is "Sm_PE_" + DatasetTopology.Name.

Gets the dataset of the lines which have the topology error. The name of the dataset is "Sm_LE_" + DatasetTopology.Name.

Gets the dataset of the regions which have the topology error. The name of the dataset is "Sm_RE_" + DatasetTopology.Name.

It is not supported in this class.

The DatasetTopologyInfo class. This class contains the name information about topology dataset, through this class you can get the string which has the name of the topology dataset.

Creates a new DatasetTopologyInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name of the topology dataset.

Constructs a new object identical to the given DatasetTopologyInfo object.

The specified DatasetTopologyInfo object.

Constructs a new DatasetTopologyInfo object.

Returns the string which has the name of the topology dataset. The format is {Name=”” }.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the name of the topology dataset.

The default is UntitledDatasetTopology.

Defines dataset types.A dataset is a collection of related data stored together. According to the types of data, there are vector dataset, raster dataset, and the dataset designed for specific problems, such as topology dataset, network dataset etc. For different features may have different spatial representations, the vector dataset includes point dataset, line dataset, region dataset and so on, and the features with the same spatial representation and function will be organized together. Raster dataset includes grid dataset and image dataset.

The tabular dataset.The tabular dataset is mainly used to store and manage the pure attribute data that describe the information of the characters and shapes of the surface features, such as the length and width of the river.This dataset does not contain graphics data in it, namely the dataset can not be displayed in the map window as a layer.

Point dataset.The point dataset is mainly used to store the point objects, such as distributing of the disperse points in this figure.

Line dataset.The line dataset is mainly used to store the line objects, such as the river, boundary and road.

The polygon dataset.The region dataset is mainly used to store the region objects, such as distribution of the house and administrative region.

The text dataset.The text dataset is mainly used to store the text objects, such as the text of the annotation.

The CAD dataset.This CAD dataset can store the dataset contained various features or objects, namely the point, line, region and text.The features or objects in CAD dataset can have different styles, and CAD dataset will store the style for each feature or object.

Table of the external linking, namely a database table, does not include the system field that is the fields with the SM as the prefix. The dataset is readonly.

The network dataset.The network dataset is used to store the dataset with topological relationship in network, such as the transportation network.The network dataset is different with the point dataset and the line dataset. The network dataset contains the line objects, the note objects and the topological relationship between them.The network dataset is used for network analysis such as finding the shortest path, performing a service area analysis, closest facility analysis, location-allocation analysis, bus transfer, adjacent node and connected node analysis.

3D network dataset.The 3D network dataset is mainly used to store the 3D network objects.

the image dataset.The image dataset belongs to the raster dataset, such as image map, multi-wave image and photo. The image dataset is used to be displayed or used as the base map, so the value of a cell is the value of a color or the value of an indexed color.

The grid dataset.The grid dataset is mostly used to do some analysis based on raster, so the value of a cell represents certain attribute of a geographic feature, such as elevation, rainfall, etc.

Raster volume dataset. It is represented by tile format for the 3D volume data, such as cellular signal strength within given scope, haze polluted index, etc.

The route dataset.The Route dataset can only be used in network analysis, that is LineM dataset, as the event measure value is to be marked.

The WMS dataset belongs to the DatasetImage.A WMS (Web Map Service) creates maps using data with geospatial information.A WMS returns the layer-level map image.

The WCS dataset belongs to the DatasetImage.WCS (Web Coverage Service) defines a standard interface and operations that enables interoperable access to satellite images. WCS takes geospatial data with location values as Coverage and exchanges the Coverage via the internet.

Topology dataset.Topology dataset is used to manage topology error. It contains the key elements used for topology check, such as the topology related dataset, topology rules, topology preprocessing, topology error and dirty region auto-maintenance.Dirty region is the region that is processed before checked. if the data is edited in some area, then the dirty region will be generate again in this area.

Model dataset.

Texture dataset which is the sub dataset of the model dataset.

The ParametricLine dataset is used to store GeoParametricLineCompound objects.

The ParametricRegion dataset is used to store GeoParametricRegionCompound objects.

Point3D dataset.The Point3D dataset is mainly used to store the 3D point objects.

Line3D dataset.The Line3D dataset is mainly used to store the 3D line objects.

Region3D dataset.The Region3D dataset is mainly used to store the 3D region objects.

The dataset stores the DatasetGridCollection objects. See DatasetGridCollection for more information.

The dataset stores the DatasetImageCollectionobjects. See DatasetImageCollection for more information.

Tsinghua EPS point dataset. It is mainly used to store the Tsinghua EPS point objects.

Tsinghua EPS line dataset. It is mainly used to store the Tsinghua EPS line objects.

Tsinghua EPS region dataset. It is mainly used to store the Tsinghua EPS region objects.

Tsinghua EPS text dataset. It is mainly used to store the Tsinghua EPS text objects.

Mosaic data set.For efficient management and display of massive image data.

Vector dataset collection that stores multiple vector data sets that support only PostgreSQL engines.

The data set sets the neutron data set information class.The information of the data set is included, such as the name of the child data set, the type of the child data set, and the connection information of the data source of the child data set.

The default constructor is to construct a new CollectionDatasetInfo object.

Gets or sets the data source connection information for the dataset.

Gets or sets the data set name.

Gets or sets the data set type.

The DatasetVector class.This DatasetVector object is mainly to describe and manage the vector dataset. The operations on the vector dataset include data querying, data modifying, data deleting, building index and etc.Adds an independent NetWork3D dataset. The 3D network dataset generated in the old version needs to be upgraded to normal use. The first method is to reconstruct 3D network dataset, and it is recommended. The second method is by Tookit.UpdateOldNetwork3D(SuperMap.Data.Datasource datasource, String datasetName).

Determines whether current dataset can support the specified type of spatial index or not.

The specified type of spatial index. For more information about the type of spatial index, please see the SpatialIndexType enumeration.If the dataset supports the specified type of spatial index , returns true; Otherwise, false.

Rebuilds Spatial Index.

true if rebuilding spatial index successfully; otherwise false.

Deletes the spatial index.

Returns true if deleted successful; otherwise false.

Builds a spatial index for current vector dataset with the specified type of the spatial index.

The specified type of the spatial index to be built.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Builds a spatial index for current vector dataset with the specified information of the spatial index.

The specified information of the spatial index.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Recomputes the bounds of the dataset.

The spatial bound.

Specifies the fields by the index of the field. Updates those fields satisfying the attributeFilter condition with the specified expression. The fields to be updated can not be system fields, namely the fields' prefixion can not be sm except smUserID.

The index of the field to be updated.The expression used for updating, which can be the filed operation or mathematical operation, such as "SMID", "abs(SMID)", "SMID+1", "'character string'".The query condition. If attributeFilter is an empty string, all records will be updated.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Specifies the fields by the name of the field. Updates those fields satisfying the attributeFilter condition with the specified expression. The fields to be updated can not be system fields, namely the fields' prefixion can not be sm except smUserID.

the name of the field to be updated.The expression used for updating, which can be the filed operation or mathematical operation, such as "SMID", "abs(SMID)", "SMID+1", "'character string'".The query condition. If attributeFilter is an empty string, all records will be updated.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Specifies the fields by the index of the field. Updates those fields satisfying the attributeFilter condition with the specified value. The fields to be updated can not be system fields, namely the fields' prefixion can not be sm except smUserID.

the index of the field to be updated.The value used for updating.The query condition. If attributeFilter is an empty string, all records will be updated.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Specifies the fields by the name of the field. Updates those fields satisfying the attributeFilter condition with the specified value. The fields to be updated can not be system fields, namely the fields' prefixion can not be sm except smUserID.

The name of the field to be updated.The value used for updating.The query condition. If attributeFilter is an empty string, all records will be updated.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Specifies the field by the field index and performs statistic.

The index of the to-be-statistic filed.The specified statistic mode.The statistic result.

Performs statistic computing according to the specified field name.

The Specified field expression used to statistic, which is the field or operation expression such as SmID/100.The specified statistic mode.The statistic result.

Queries records through setting query parameters. The method will query spatial information and attribute information.

The defined query parameter.The recordset contains the query results.

Query according to the object ID array.

The specified geometric object ID array.The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.The recordset contains the query results.

Query filter. It is equal to Where in SOL expression.

The specified space bounds.The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.Query filter. It is equal to Where in SOL expression.The recordset contains the query results.

Query records which locate in the specified space bounds.

Query records which locate in the buffer zone of the specified Geometry object and satisfy a certain filter at the same time.

The Geometry object used for querying.The radius of the buffer. The unit is the same with the dataset been queried.Query filter. It is usually a SOL expression.The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.The recordset contains the query results.

Queries the records in the buffer zone of the specified Geometry object.

the Geometry object used for querying.The radius of the buffer. The unit is the same with the dataset been queried.The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.The recordset contains the query results.

Queries vector dataset with the query filter.This method is used to query the spatial data and the attribute data.

Query filter. It is equal to Where in SOL expression. The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.The recordset contains the query results.

Perform ID query according to the given field, the given field must be integer type.

The specified geometric object ID array.The specified name of the field.The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.

Determines whether the field name in the attribute table is legal or not. The name of the field can be composed of the number, letter or underscore, but it should not start with the number or the underline.

The name of the field.True if legal; otherwise false.

Gets a valid filed name with introduced parameter.

The introduced filed name.A valid filed name.

Returns the Recordset which contains all the records or a empty recordset with the specified parameter.

This parameter indicates that whether to return a empty recordset. True represents that this method will return a empty recordsetFalse represents that this method will returns a recordset which contains all the records. The specified cursor type of the query result.DYNAMIC and STATIC are supported cursor types. DYNAMIC indicates the recordset can be modified, and STATIC indicates the recordset is read-only. For more information, please refer to the CursorType.An empty recordset.

Delete the index of the field by the specified index name.

The index name.

Deletes the records in the vector dataset through the array of ID.

The array of ID to be deleted.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Creates index for dataset with non-spatial field. Non-spatial filed name is the name of user-defined field which need to create an index.

The non-spatial filed name.The index name.True, if the index creates successfully; otherwise false.

Adds the recordset (Recordset) to the vector dataset (DatasetVector). Appending the field directly when the field name in the recordset and the vector dataset is same; otherwise ignoring the appending operation.

The Recordset object to be appended.Returns true if successful, otherwise false.

Appends the recordset to the vector dataset according to sheet name. It is required that the index of the vector dataset is tile index. The newly added records will be regarded as a tile of the tile index. While appending, shared fields will be appended to the vector dataset directly and fields that are not common to the recordset and the vector dataset will be ignored.After appending, the recordset will positioned after the last record in the recordset, that is, the IsEOF attribute is true.

the recordset object added.The added sheet name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Append row to the vector dataset according to the target field array.For example, append the b and c field in the recordset to the a and b field in the vector dataset.

the resource recordset object.the source field array, corresponding to the field in the source recordset.the target field array, corresponding to the field in the vector dataset.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Used for return all the Features object in the recordset.

The first parameter in Dictionary represents the ID of the geometry object (the value of SmID), the second parameter is a reference of the Features.All the Features.

Update the attribute of the objects in the dataset with the spatial relationship.

Get the ID of the object in a dataset that meet certain spatial relationship with the current dataset.

The dataset that related to the current dataset.The given spatial relation type.Whether to contain the points on the border.Specify whether to show the progress bar. True means to show, otherwise not.An integer array, see the notes for the meaning of the array elements.

Get the ID of the object that meets certain spatial relationship with the objects in the current dataset.

Get the ID of the object in a recordset that meet certain spatial relationship with the current dataset.

the recordset that related to the current dataset.The given spatial relation type.Whether to contain the points on the border.Specify whether to show the progress bar. True means to show, otherwise not.An integer array, see the notes for the meaning of the array elements.

Gets the ID of object that meets a certain spatial relation with object of the current dataset from specified geometry array.

Resample the vector dataset, supports line dataset, region dataset and network dataset.

the resampling information setting specified.whether to show the progress bar.whether to reserve small objects, small objects are the objects whose area is 0.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Smooth the vector dataset, supports line dataset, region dataset and network dataset.

Smooth coefficient. The valid range is larger than or equal to 2, an exception will throw out if set as a value less than 2. The greater the smooth coefficient, the more the vertexes on the border of region or the line object, and the smoother the lines. The recommended range is [2,10].whether to show the progress bar.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Append fields, assign the fields with the query results.

Source dataset.The link field in the source dataset.The link field in the target dataset.the field name collection in the source dataset to append.The field name collection in the target dataset to append.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Append fields, assign the fields with the query results.

Source dataset.The link field in the source dataset.The link field in the target dataset.the field name collection in the source dataset to append.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the index created by the current dataset attribute and the relationship object that create the index.

The index created by the current dataset attribute and the relationship object that create the index.

Clear all the records in the vector dataset.

Returns true if cleared successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the field name according to the field ID.

Field ID.The name of the field.

The dataset collection adds a child data set.

Child vector data set.The added success returns true and the failure returns false.

Gets the data set type of the collection of data sets.

Data set type of a child data set.

Gets the FieldInfos object, that is, all fields information in attribute table.

Gets the number of the fields in the vector dataset.

Gets or sets the tolerance for the vector dataset. The unit is the same with the dataset.

Gets a Boolean value that indicates whether to rebuild the spatial index for the vector dataset. When the vector dataset is modified, the spatial index of it will be rebuilt.

Gets the type of spatial index.

Gets the number of the records in the vector dataset.

Gets or sets whether to use file caches.

The value indicating whether to use file caches. True indicates to use, while false indicates the opposite.

Gets the father dataset of the vector dataset. It is mainly used in the network dataset.

Gets the child dataset of the vector dataset. It is mainly used in the network dataset.

Gets or sets the character set of the vector dataset.

Gets the maximum of the model data set

Gets the minimum value of the model data set

The DatasetVectorInfo class.This class contains the information about vector dataset, such as the name of the dataset, the type of the vector dataset, the encode type, whether using file cache and etc.

Creates a new DatasetVectorInfo object according to the specified arguments.

the name of the dataset.The type of the vector dataset.

Constructs a new object identical to the given DatasetVectorInfo object.

the specified DatasetVectorInfo object.

Constructs a new DatasetVectorInfo object.

Creates a new DatasetVectorInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name.The specified template dataset.

Outputs the information of the vector dataset, including the name of the dataset, the type of the dataset, the encode type of the dataset and whether using the file cache.

The string represents the information of the vector dataset.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the DatasetVectorInfo is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the DatasetVectorInfo.

Gets or sets whether using the file cache or not. The file cache is only available for the tile spatial index.

True, if using the file cache, otherwise, false; The default is false.

Gets or sets the table space SmGeometry is in.

The name of the table space.

Gets or sets the encode type of the vector dataset.

Gets or sets the type of the vector dataset.

The default value is Point type.

Gets or sets the name of the vector dataset.

The default value is UntitledDatasetVector.

The Datasource class.This Datasource object is mainly to manage the the information such as the connection between datasource and database, the projection of the datasource.

Initializes a new Datasource instance according to the specified parameters.

The engine type.

Opens the datasource according to the specified connection information.

The connection information of the datasource.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Open datasource to get the dataset according to given datasource connection information and dataset name.

The connection information of the datasource.the name of the dataset.Dataset

Create datasource according to given datasource connection information.

The connection information of the datasource.Returns true if built successfully; otherwise false.

Closes the current datasource.

Determines whether the index name with specified table name exists.

The specified index name.the given table name.true represents existing and false represents not existing.

Refreshes the database datasource.

Executes a sql expression for a database datasource.This method is used to handle the user-defined query sentence that performed on an attribute table.

The standard SQL query expression.A Boolean value indicates that whether to perform the SQL query expression successfully. If successful, returns true; otherwise returns false.

Converts the content of the recordset to the corresponding vector dataset, such as point dataset and tabular dataset,etc.

The recordset to be converted.The name of the output vector dataset.A newly created vector dataset.

Creates a text dataset using a field in a dataset attribute table.

The vector dataset whose attributes would be converted to a text dataset.The name of the output text dataset which is saved in the same datasource with the source dataset.The name for whose attribute to be converted.The style of the text dataset.A text dataset.

Creates point dataset from a table containing x, y coordinates. Namely, creates the point dataset according to the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the new dataset, which got from the field.

The table that contains coordinates.The name of the point dataset to be created.The the field indicating x coordinate.The the field indicating y coordinate.The new point dataset.

Creates the inner point dataset for a geometry in the vector dataset and copies the corresponding attributes to the attribute table of the output point. If successful, it returns inner point dataset, otherwise it returns Nothing or Null.

The vector dataset to be calculated the inner points.The name of output point dataset.The point dataset which consists of the inner points.

Copies dataset among datasources with one or more data engine types.

The dataset to be copied.The new dataset that has been copied.The encode type of the dataset.The result dataset object.

Copy dataset with the given encoding type and the character set type. This method is used when upgrade text dataset or CAD dataset to UTF-8 character set. It is reserved for later versions and not supported in SuperMap Objects Java 6R(2012) SP2.

the dataset to be copied.The new dataset that has been copied.The encode type of the dataset.the character set of the dataset.The result dataset object.

Calls this method to establish a connection to an unconnected data source. If connecting successfully, returns true; otherwise, returns false.

If connected successfully, returns true; otherwise, returns false.

Modify the password of the opened datasource.This method is valid only in the file type datasource.

The specified old password.The specified new password.Returns true, if password is modified successfully; otherwise false.

Saves the data in the memory that has not been written to the database to the database.

The name of the dataset to refresh. If the string passed in is null, all datasets will be refreshed.

Create a sequence based on the given name. The sequence starts at 0 and has no fixed length, with 1 as the step size, the maximum value is the maximum value of Int64.

The name of the specified sequence to be created.A boolean specifies whether creating is successful. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Create a sequence according to the given parameters, the sequence length and the step size can be defined.

The name of the specified sequence to be created.Start value of specified sequence.The end value of specified sequence. -1 means to the maximum value of the Int64 type is used as a termination value.Specified growth step.A boolean specifies whether creating is successful. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes a sequence of specified name.

The name of the specified sequence to be deleted.true if successful to delete the sequence; otherwise, false.

Gets the next value of specified sequence.

The specified sequence name.The next value of the sequence.

Determins whether the specified sequence exists or not.

The specified sequence name.Returns true if it exists, otherwise false.

Gets whether the current datasource supports Unicode data store. SuperMap Objects .NET 6R(2012) SP2 is non-Unicode application, the property value is false.

Gets the workspace object contained the current datasource.

Returns a value that indicates that whether the datasource is opened in read-only mode.

Gets or sets the distance unit of datasource.

Gets or sets the unit of coordinates of datasource.

Returns or sets the projection information of the Datasource.

Returns whether the datasource has been modified. True means that it has been modified and false means that it has not been modified.

Gets the last updating time of the datasource.

Returns the engine type of the datasource.

Returns or sets the description of the Datasource.

Returns an object of the Datasets that is contained in the Datasource.

Returns the connected information of the Datasource.

Determines whether the datasource has been connected with the database. This property is invalid for non-dataset datasources.

Gets or sets a boolean value indicates whether the datasource connects the database automatically.

Returns the alias of the datasource.

Get the domain management object.

Gets the VersionManager object of the datasource.

Return or set the time interval of checking connecting database, the unit is millisecond. It is valid to the DatasourceDisconnectedEventArgs event.

Default value is 5000.

The event is triggered when the is disconnected.

Occurs when the datasource is refreshed.

The event of copied datasource step.

Get the RootGroup of the DatasetGroup.

Gets whether the datasource is opened. If the datasource is opened, the value got will be true. If the datasource is closed, the value got will be false.

Provides data for the Datasources.AliasModified event.

The base class for classes containing event data.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceEventArgs class with the specified datasource object.

The specified datasource object.

Gets the datasource object.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceAliasModifiedEventArgs class.

The specified datasource object.

Represents the method that handles a Datasources.AliasModified event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceAliasModifiedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasources.AliasModifying event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceAliasModifyingEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The specified datasource object.A value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates not to cancel.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles a Datasources.AliasModifying event.

The source of the event.A FormClosedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasources.Closed event.

Closes the new instance of DatasourceClosedEventAgrs according to the specified parameters.

The specified Datasource object.The alias of specified datasource.The index of specified datasource.

Gets the alias of the closed datasource.

Gets the index of the closed datasource.

Represents the method that handles a Datasources.Closed event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceClosedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasources.Closing event.

Initializes the DatasourceClosingEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The specified Datasource object.Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles a Datasources.Closing event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceClosingEventArgs that contains the event data.

The DatasourceConnectionInfo class.All the connection information about a datasource will be stored in an instance of this class, including the name of the server that the datasource will connect to, the name of the database, the user name and password needed to login the database etc.When saving a workspace, the connection information of all the datasources in it will be stored in the workspace file.

Creates a new instance of the DatasourceConnectionInfo object according to the given arguments.

The name of the UDB file.The alias of the datasource.The password for logging on the database.

Creates a new instance of the DatasourceConnectionInfo object according to the given arguments.

Server name or Web datasource service address.The name of the driver when using ODBC to access data.The name of the database.The alias of the datasource.The user name for logging on the database.The password for logging on the database.

Creates a new instance of the DatasourceConnectionInfo object according to the given arguments.

the TNS (Transparent Network Substrate) name of the client of the Oracle database.The name of the database.The alias of the datasource.The user name for logging on the database.The password for logging on the database.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceConnectionInfo class, and the default EngineType is UDB engine.

Returns a formatted string that represents the current object.

A string with a specific format that indicates the InterpolationIDWparameter.

Exports this DatasourceConnectionInfo object to a XML string.

The XML string that converted by this DatasourceConnectionInfo object.

Imports the connection information of a datasource represented by the specified XML string to this DatasourceConnectionInfo object.After calling this method, the connection information of the datasource represented by the specified XML string will replace all the original information stored in this DatsourcConnectionInfo object.

The connection information of the datasource to be imported.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Saves current datasource connection information as encrypted DCF file.

The path of encrypted DCF file you want to save.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Adds the connection information of a datasource represented by the specified encrypted DCF file to this DatasourceConnectionInfo object.

Specifies the path of the encrypted DCF file.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Frees the resources of the current DatasourceConnectionInfo object before it is reclaimed by the garbage collector.

Releases all resources used by the DatasourceConnectionInfo.

Gets or sets a boolean value indicates whether open the non-SuperMap datasheet as the LinkTable. False indicates not to open the non-SuperMap datasheet as the LinkTable.

The default value is false.

Gets or sets whether the datasource connects to the data automatically. If it is set to true, the datasource will connect to the data automatically when opening the workspace.

True if the datasource connects to the data automatically; otherwise, false. The default is true.

Gets or sets whether to open the datasource in readonly manner. If the database is opened in readonly manner, the related information about the datasource together with the data of the datasource can not be modified.

True if opening the datasource in readonly manner; otherwise, false. The default is false.

Gets or sets the driver name needed for the datasource connection.For SQL Server database, which uses the ODBC connect, the driver name is SQL Server or SQL Native Client.For the WMTS service published by iServer, the driver name is WMTS. It is a required property.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the password when logging on the database or connecting to the file.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the user name when logging on the database. Only applies to the database datasource.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the database name connected to the datasource.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the database server name, file name or service address.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the datasource connection engine type. So far, the following engines are supported; they are UDB engine, OraclePlus engine, SQLPlus engine, PostgreSQL engine and DB2 engine. For more information about the engines that supported, please refer to the EngineType class.

The default value is UDB.

Gets or sets the alias of the datasource. The alias is the unique identifier of a datasource and the identifier is not case sensitive.

The default value is UntitledDatasource.

Provides data for the Datasources.Created event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceCreatedEventArgs class with the specified datasource.

The specified datasource object.

Represents the method that handles the Datasources.Created event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceCreatedEventArgs that contains the event data.

A DatasourceDisconnectedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceDisconnectedEventArgs class with the specified datasource.

The specified datasource object.

The method that handles the Datasource.Disconnected event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceDisconnectedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Datasources.Opened event.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceOpenedEventArgs class with the specified datasource object.

The specified datasource object.

Represents the method that handles a Datasources.Opened event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceOpenedEventArgs that contains the event data.

A DatasourceRefreshedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasourceRefreshedEventArgs class with the specified datasource.

The specified datasource object.

Represents the method that handles the Datasource.Refreshed event.

The source of the event.A DatasourceRefreshedEventArgs that contains the DatasourceRefreshedEventArgsevent data.

The Datasources Class.This class is mainly used to manage the datasource, and performs some operations, for example, create, open and close the datasource.

Gets the enumerator of the Datasources.

An enumerator of the Datasources.

This method is used to modify the alias of the datasource.

The alias of this datasource to be modified.The new alias of this datasource.If modifying the alias of the datasource successfully, returns true; Otherwise, returns false. Specially, performing an operation such as Datasources.ModifyAlias ("aaa","AAA") when the alias is not case-sensitive. The value is false.

Gets the index number of the datasource of the specified alias in this Datasources.

The specified alias of the datasource.The index number of the the datasource of the specified alias in this Datasources. If the datasource does not exist, returns -1.

Determines whether the datasource of the specified alias is contained in this Datasources.

The specified alias of the datasource.True, if the datasource of the specified alias is in this Datasources; Otherwise, returns False.

Closes all the datasources.

Closes the datasource according to the specified alias of the datasource.

The alias of the datasource.True, if the datasource is closed successfully; otherwise, false.

Closes the datasource of the specified index number in this Datasources.

The specified index number of the datasource.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Creates the datasource according to the specified connection information of the datasource. Returns null if the datasource to be created has already existed.

The connection information of the datasource.The created datasource.

Opens the existing datasource according to the specified connection information. Returns null if the datasource does not exist.

The connection information of the datasource.The opened datasource.

Returns the datasource of the specified alias in this Datasources.

The alias of the datasource.

Gets the datasource of the specified index number in this Datasources.

The specified index number of the datasource.

Gets the count of the datasources in this Datasources.

The default value is 200.

Occurs after the alias of the datasource is modified.

Occurs before the alias of the datasource is modified.

Occurs when an instance of the datasource object is closed.

Occurs after an instance of the datasource object is closed.

Occurs after an instance of the datasource object is opened.

Occurs after an instance of the datasource object is created.

Defines the position types for line decoration.

Line start.

Lind end.

Line vertices.

Line segment centers.

Polyline center.

Defines line decoration types.

None.

Non-filled arrow.

Filled arrow.

40% filled arrow.

60% filled arrow.

◆ Filled diamond.

○ Non-filled ellipse.

□ Non-filled rectangle.

● Filled ellipse.

■ Filled rectangle.

Custom.

The EditHistory class. This class includes the history information of the edit operation.

Constructs a new EditHistory object.

Adds the record of the edit operation to the record set of the edit history. Call this method after adding new instance, or before editing and deleting the object.

The type of the edit operation. For more information, please refer to the EditType class.The record set of the edit operation.Whether to record the current edit operation only.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Cancel current operation. If using the batch mode, the operations between BatchBegin to BatchEnd is regarded as an editing record.

Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Redoes the specified count of the edit operations.

Specify the historical items number of editing. If using the batch mode, the operations between BatchBegin to BatchEnd is regarded as an editing record.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Forward, resume the next operation. If using the batch mode, the operations between BatchBegin to BatchEnd is regarded as an editing record.

Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Redoes the specified count of the edit operations.

Specify the historical items number of editing. If using the batch mode, the operations between BatchBegin to BatchEnd is regarded as an editing record.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Deletes the item in the edit history with the specified index.

The index of the item in edit history.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the items in the edit history according to the index to begin with and the count of items to be deleted.

The specified index which it deletes the items in the edit history beginning with.The count of the items in the edit history to be deleted.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Clears the edit history.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Begins to record the edit operations on the recordset in batches.

Ends to record the edit operations on the recordset in batches.

Cancel batch mode. By this method, the batch mode can be canceled. After calling this method, all the actions of the recordset will be discarded from the start of the batch mode to the method calling.

Releases the resource possessed by EditHistory object.

Gets the count of the items in edit history.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the maximum count of the items in edit history.

The default value is 1000.

Gets or sets the index of the current item in edit history.

The default value is -1.

Gets whether the edit operation can be redone.

The default value is false.

Gets whether the edit operation can be undone.

The default value is false.

Defines operation types.

The operation of adding new object.

The operation of modifying.

The operation of deleting.

Defines the encoding modes for dataset compression.For the volume of spatial data is usually very tremendous, to encode the dataset can compress the data, in this way, the space used to store the dataset can be saved. For vector dataset, four encode types are supported, they are single-byte, double-byte, triple-byte and four-byte. The four encode types are based on the similar encoding mechanism, but the compression ratios are different, and the four encodings are lossy. Note that the point dataset and the tabular dataset can not be encoded. Note that the point dataset and the tabular dataset can not be encoded. For the raster data, four kinds of encoding can be used, they are DCT, SGL, LZW and COMPOUND, among which, the SGL and LZW encoding are lossless.The cad dataset do not support any encode type.

SGL (SuperMap Grid LZW) is a compression format defined by SuperMap. Actually, it is an improved LZW encoding. SGL improves the LZW encoding, and is a more effective compression and storage manner. So far, the compression or storage used for the Grid dataset and the DEM dataset in SuperMap is the SGL encoding, and it is a lossless compression. (For Grid and DEM dataset only)

LZW is a widely used dictionary compression method, and from the very beginning it is used in the compression of text. The principle of LZW encoding is to use certain code to replace a section of string, the following identical string will be replaced by the same code, so this method not only can compress the repeated data, but also can compress data that does not repeat. It applies to index color images, and is a lossless encoding. (For Grid, DEM or Image dataset)

DCT(Discrete Cosine Transform) is a transform encoding method widely used to compress images. This transform method provides a balance between compression ability, the quality of the reconstructed image, applicable scope and complexity of algorithm etc., and is the most widely used image compression technology recently. The principle of this method is to reduce the strong relativity that exists in the spatial domain representation through transformation, so that the signals can be expressed compactly. This method has got high compression ratio and performance, but the encoding will lack fidelity. For the image dataset usually not used to do some analysis, DCT encoding type often applies to image dataset. (For Image dataset only)

Four byte encoding. Use 4 bytes to store a coordinate value. (only for line and region datasets)

Three byte encoding. Use 3 bytes to store a coordinate value. (only for line and region datasets)

Two byte encoding. Use 2 bytes to store a coordinate value. (only for line and region datasets)

Single byte encoding. Use 1 byte to store a coordinate value. (only for line and region datasets)

No encoding mode is employed.

PNG compression encoding, which supports for multiple bit depth images, and is a lossless compression. (Applicable to image datasets).

Dataset compound encoding, the compression ratio is close to DCT encoding, it is used to solve the border image aliasing problem in DCT composition. (Applies to image dataset in RGB format)

Specifies constants that define the types of spatial database engines for use.

Database engine type.

File engine type.

Web engine type.

The EngineInfo class. The class provides a series methods and properties such as SupportExtension, Type, ToString.

Returns the string represent the EngineInfo object, the format of the string is {Type=,SupportExtensions={“.udb”,”.udd”} }.

A string that represents the EngineInfo object.

It is obsolete. It is recommended to use the SupportExtensions property of this class.Gets the postfix name of the file which the engine supports. The postfix name contains the ".", for example the UDB engine type file will return the ".udb",".udd".

Gets the postfix name of the file which the engine supports. The postfix name contains the ".", for example the UDB engine type file will return the ".udb",".udd".

Gets the type of the engine.

Gets the name of the engine.

Gets the class of the engine.

Specifies constants that define the types of spatial database engines for use.

SQL Server engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 16. It is used for SQL Server datasource.

Oracle engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 12. It is used for Oracle datasource.

Read-only engine for image file, the corresponding enumeration value is 5. It is used for common image formats like BMP, JPG, TIFF, the SuperMap-defined SIT format, 2D map cache configuration file format SCI, etc.While loading 2D map caches, the engine type should be employed. Besides, it is needed to set the Server property of the DatasourceConnectionInfo class to the 2D map cache configuration file (SCI).For MrSID and ECW, to improve the opening speed in read only mode, it will be opened in the form of synthetic bands, non gray data will be the set by default for RGB or RGBA way to show, and the gray data is shown in the original way.

The OGC engine type for internet datasource. The corresponding enumeration value is 23. The current version supports following types, they are WMS, WFS, WCS and WMTS.The default BoundingBox and TopLeftCorner tags in the WMTS service are read in the form of (longitude, latitude), but a part of the service provider provides the coordinates of the format (latitude, longitude). when you encounter this situation, in order to ensure the correctness of the coordinates reading, please modify the SuperMap.xml file (the file is located in the Bin directory). The performance of this situation is usually that the local vector data and the published WMTS service data can not be overlaid well together.1 When IsBoundsCornerExchang is true, reading as the way(latitude, longitude); otherwise it is (longitude, latitude).2 When IsTopLeftCornerExchange is true, reading as the way(latitude, longitude); otherwise it is (longitude, latitude).Note:If you find that the WMTs service is offset, modify the CustomDPIY and CustomDPIX settings in the SuperMap.xml to 90.7.

The cross-platform file engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 219.

PostgreSQL engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 220. It is used for PostgreSQL datasource.

DB2 engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 18. It is used for DB2 datasource.

Used for Kingbase datasource, multiband data is not supported. The supported enumeration value is 19. This engine is only supported in projects. KingbaseES V4 and KingbaseES V6 are supported,there is no need to configure ODBC datasource.The functionality support are as follows:1. Create datasource and copy dataset.2. Support RTree index.3. Browse map in the map window, and edit points, lines, regions, texts and CAD data;4. Create and edit all kinds of field types.5. Input the data into a database.Methods to create Kingbase datasource:1. Start KingbaseES enterprise manager, create KingbaseES registration at the console root directory.2. Add server, and create database on the server.3. Use SuperMap Deskpro .NET or SuperMap Objects .NET to fill in the DatasourceConnectionInfo to finish the creation of the datasource. See DatasourceConnectionInfo for details about the parameter setting.

MySQL engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 32. Supports MySQL 5.6.16 aboveNot support dataset collection

BeyonDB engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2001.

MongoDB engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 401.

GBase engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2002.

HighGoDB engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2003.

GoogleMaps engine. The corresponding enumeration value is 223. It's a read only engine and can not be created. Note:1. When visit GoogleMaps engine, it is needed to meet the conditions, see “Google Static Maps API”;2. Network does not support the related display of multiple windows.

Baidu map service engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 227.

Bing map service engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 230.

OpenStreetMap engine, the enumeration value is 228. It is support only in Windows 32 bit platform.

SuperMap Cloud Services. The enumeration value is 224. It's a read only engine and can not be created. Note: Network does not support the related display of multiple windows.

REST map services engine. The enumeration value is 225. It's a read only engine and can not be created. Note: Network does not support the related display of multiple windows.

Vector cache engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 229.

Supports PCI image format, and indirectly supports other RS data formats. The enumeration value is 300.

The third generation DM engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 17.

Oracle Spatial engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 10.

Vector file engine type, the corresponding value is 101. For general vector format, such as SHP, tab, Acad, etc., supporting vector file editing and save, if it is the type of FME support, it is required for the corresponding FME license, currently only supporting FileGDBVector format by FME license.

ArcSDE engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 4. Supports ArcSDE 9.2.0 and above1 support reading 5 types of datasets: point, line, region, text and raster in ArcSDE 9.2.0 and above, do not support writing.2 Not support reading ArcSDE text style, ArcSDE default field "TEXTSTRING" can not be deleted, otherwise we can not read the text.3 Not support reading 2bit depth ArcSDE raster data, supports the rest depth types and they can be stretched to display.4 No support for multiple threads.5 To use the SDE engine, there is the need for ArcInfo license, and copy sde.dll bin, sg.dll and pe.dll in the ArcSDE installation directory to the SuperMap Bin directory (that is, the same directory with SuSDECI.dll and SuEngineSDE.sdx)6 Supported OS: Windows 32bit, Windows 64bit.

The memory datasource, and the enumeraion value is 20.

Altibase engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2004.

KDB engine, the corresponding enumeration value is 2005.

SRDB engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2006.

MySQLPlus database engine type, it is MySQL+Mongo, the enumeration value is 2007.

The Elasticsearch engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2011.

PostgreSQL's spatial data extends the PostGIS engine type, which corresponds to the enumeration value of 2012.

The SQLSpatial engine type, the corresponding enumeration value is 2013.

This environment class is used to manage the configuration information about develop environment, for example setting the location folder saved the cache file and setting the equal-zero precision. Through this class you can set the ratio of device coordinate (pixel) to logical coordinate.

The default minimum equal-zero precision. The default value is -1E-10.

The default maximum equal-zero precision. The default value is 1E-10.

Check whether the computer can use GPU for the CUDA parallel computing.

The checking result.

Check whether the computer can use GPU for the OpenCL parallel computing.

Whether a computer has the ability to carry out the OpenCL parallel computing.

Gets whether the current version is Unicode version, SuperMap Objects .NET 6R(2012) SP2 is not Unicode version, the property value is false.

Gets the list of the current loaded engine, which is a copy.

Gets or sets the minimum equal-zero precision that is used to determine whether the float value and double value are zero. The default value is 1E-10.

Gets or sets the maximum equal-zero precision that is used to determine whether the float value and double value are zero. The default value is 1E-10.

Gets or sets the location folder saved the cache file of the dataset.

Gets or sets whether the proportion of custom pixel to logical coordinate. if true, use custom proportion, otherwise, use the proportion of system pixel to logical coordinate. It is obsolete. Use CustomDPIEnabled to replace it.

Gets or sets whether to use the default DPI.

Gets or sets the ratio of the device coordinate in the horizontal direction to the logical coordinate. This property is valid when the property value of CustomMapRatioEnable is true. It is obsolete. Use CustomDPIX to replace it.

Gets or sets the DPI on horizontal orientation. It is supported only when CustomDPIEnable is true.

Gets or sets the ratio of the device coordinate in the vertical direction to the logical coordinate. This property is valid when the property value of CustomMapRatioEnable is true. It is obsolete. Use CustomDPIY to replace it.

Gets or sets the DPI on vertical orientation. It is supported only when CustomDPIEnable is true.

Gets or sets the map DPI.

Gets the array value which represents the list of the loaded engine information.

Gets or sets the charset which the current system used.

Gets or sets whether to use ClearType mode for antialiasing display. Only applicable to Windows platforms.ClearType attempts to improve the appearance of text on certain types of computer display screens by sacrificing color fidelity for additional intensity variation. This trade-off is asserted to work well on LCD flat panel monitors.

The default value is false.

Gets or sets whether enable the full screen antialiasing.

the default value is false.

Gets or sets whether to support float texture.

Gets or sets the full screen antialiasing coefficient.

Gets or sets the number of threads used in parallel computing.

The default value is the node value of <OMPNumThreads></OMPNumThreads> in the SuperMap.xml file.The value is less than 0 or larger than 16.

Gets or sets the analysis mode and the available memory side in memory mode(for the next version).

The default value is the value in the <AnalystMemorySize></AnalystMemorySize> node in the SuperMap.xml file.

Gets or sets whether to start extending the query range. True means to start, false means not.

The default is false, not to start extending the query range.

Gets or sets whether to start CUDA parallel computing mode.

The default value is the value in the <IsCUDAComputingEnabled></IsCUDAComputingEnabled> node in the SuperMap.xml file.

Gets or sets whether to start OpenCL parallel computing mode.

The default value is the node value of <IsOpenCLComputingEnabled></IsOpenCLComputingEnabled> in the SuperMap.xml file.

Gets or sets whether to open the hardware accelerated rendering, true means to open; false means to close. Current hardware accelerated rendering only works on dynamic layers.

Gets or sets the number of scanned tiles that reside in memory.

Gets or sets the maximum number of threads for a network tile download.

Gets or sets the maximum number of file IO handles.

The ErrorInfo class.

Gets the thread id which the error has been found.

Gets the error information.

Gets the name of the error which is the exclusive identifiers of the error.

The Feature class.

Construct a new Feature object.

Construct a new object that is exactly the same as the given Feature object.

A given Feature object.

Gets the field value of any type at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.The field value of any type of the current Feature.

Gets the field value of any type at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.The field value of any type of the current Feature.

Gets the ID of the geometry object of the current Feature (The value of SmID).

The ID of the Geometry object.

Gets the geometry object of the current Feature.

Returns the geometric object if successful; otherwise, null.

Determines whether the Feature object has the same fields.

This includes the field name, the order of the field, field type,and field length, etc.The Feature object.Bool, whether the Feature object has the same fields.

Returns the field value of bool type at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.A field type of bool type.

Returns the field value of bool type at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.A field type of bool type.

Returns the field value of binary type at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.A field value in binary type.

Returns the field value in binary type at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.A field value in binary type.

Returns the field value in Byte at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.A field value in Byte type.

Returns the field value of Byte type at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.A field value in Byte type.

Returns the field value in Int32 at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.The field value in Int32.

Returns the field value in Int32 at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.The field value in Int32.

Returns the field value in single at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.The field value in single.

Returns the field value in single at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.The field value in single.

Returns the field value in double at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.The field value in double.

Returns the field value in double at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.The field value in double.

Returns the field value in Int16 at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.The field value in Int16.

Returns the field value in Int16 at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.The field value in Int16.

Returns the field value in string at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.A field value in string type.

Returns the field value of string type at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.A field value in string type.

Returns the field value in Int64 at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.The field value in Int64.

Returns the field value in Int64 at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.The field value in Int64.

Returns the field value in time at the specific index in Feature.

The index of specified field.A field value in time type.

Returns the field value of time type at the specific field name in Feature.

The specified name of the field.A field value in time type.

Whether the value of the field in the previous operation is null or not.

Returns true if it is empty; Otherwise false.

Serialize the current feature to the string in specified format.

The format type to be serialized.The string after serialization.

Anti-serialize the string in specified format to the current feature.

The specified string.The format type to be anti-serialized.True, if successfully; otherwise false.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the Feature is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the Feature.

The FieldInfo class stores the informations of the field such as name, type, default value and length etc.

Constructs a new object identical to the given FieldInfo object.

The given FieldInfo object.

The default constructor, initializes a new instance of the FieldInfo class.

Builds a new FieldInfo object according to the arguments.

The specified name of the field.The specified type of the field.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current FieldInfo instance.

A copy of the current instance.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the FieldInfo is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the FieldInfo.

Note that the sm should not be used as the prefix of the name of the field, because the system fields of SuperMap all use the sm as the prefix, except the smUserID field.

True if a field is a SuperMap system field, otherwise false, the default value is false.

Returns or sets the type of the field.

The default value is Text.

Specifies the maximum length of the field. Available for text field only. Unit: Bytes.

The default value is 255.

Determines whether the field is the required one.

True if the field is the required one, otherwise false, the default is false.Determines whether a field is a SuperMap system field.

The name of the field.

The default value is UntitledField.

Gets or sets the default value of the field.When a new record is added, and the value of this field is not set, this default value will be used as the value of this field automatically.

The default value is String .Empty.

Gets or sets the caption for a field. The default value is UntitledField.

The default value is UntitledField.

Determines whether the field allows for a length of zero. Available for text field only.

True if the field allows for a length of zero, otherwise false, the default is true.

The FieldInfos class.

Creates a new LayersControl object according to the specified arguments.

The specified array of FieldInfo objects.

Constructs a new object identical to the given FieldInfos object.

The specified FieldInfos object.

Initializes a new instance of the FieldInfos class, and the count property of the new object is zero.

Converts current FieldInfos object to a FieldInfo array.

Removes the elements with the specified index number from current FeildInfos.

The index number of the elements to remove.If successful, returns true; otherwise returns false.

Removes the element with the specified name from current FieldInfos.

The name of the FieldInfo to be removed.If successful, returns true; otherwise returns false.

Gets the index number of the specified FieldInfo object in current FieldInfos.

The fieldInfo name to be got.The name is the index value of the fieldinfo within the filedInfos.

This method is used to insert a new item(that is, a FieldInfo object) to the FieldInfos at the specified index.

The zero-based index at which to insert begin.The new FieldInfo to insert.If successful, returns true; otherwise returns false.

Exchanges the two specified FieldInfo objects in this FieldInfos.

The index number of the first FieldInfo object to be exchanged.The index number of the second FieldInfo object to be exchanged.

Clears all the elements in the FieldInfos.

Adds the FieldInfo array to the current FiledInfos.

A FieldInfo array to be added to the instance of the FieldInfos.The count of addition.

This method is used to add an element to the FieldInfos, that is, add the specified FieldInfo to current FieldInfos object.

A new FieldInfo to be added to.The index number of the new added FieldInfo.

Modifies the field attribute of the specified field name.

The name of the field to be modified.The attribute of the field to be modified.Returns true if modified successfully; otherwise false.

Returns a copy of the current object.

The FieldInfos object generated from the clone operation.

Returns an enumerator that can iterate through the collection.

An IEnumerator object used to iterate through a collection.

Gets the name of the field according the the field sign. See FieldSign.

the specified field sign.the name of the corresponding field.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the FieldInfos is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the Fieldinfos.

Gets or sets the specified FieldInfo object in this FieldInfos object.

The Index of the item to get, The index starts from 0.

Returns or sets the specified FieldInfo object in this FieldInfos object.

The name of the FieldInfo object to be set or got.

Returns the total count of elements in the specified FieldInfos.

The default value is 200.

Defines a set of field types for storing different types of values.

The Char type. The field that stores fixed-length multibyte character strings.For example, if the specified length of the character string is 10, the actual length of a character string is 3, and then the remaining digits will be filled with zero.

The Text type. Field that stores text values.

The Wide Text type. The field that stores wide-length character strings.

The Binary type. The field that stores variable-length wide character strings,which can not support creating.

The DateTime type. Field that stores date or time values.

The Double type. Field that stores 64-bit single-precision float-point values.

The Single type. The Double type. Field that stores 32-bit single-precision float-point values.

The Int type. Field that stores 32-bit signed integer values.

The Short type. Field that stores 16-bit signed integer values.

The Byte type. Field that stores Byte values.

The Boolean Type. Field that stores Boolean values.

The Long type. Field that stores 64-bit signed integer values.

All the supported gradient fills are performed based on the boundary rectangle of the filled shape, that is, the bounds of the filled shape.

Line mode.

Fill mode.

Line and fill mode.

Defines the fill direction types of the GeoMapBorder object.

From inside to outside.The following shows the result of the border filling with the filling mode of from inside to outside. This result applies to the text filling, the symbol filling and the image filling.The specified image.The filling result.

From outside to inside.The following shows the result of the border filling with the filling mode of from outside to inside. This result applies to the text filling, the symbol filling and the image filling.The specified image.The filling result.

Defines the gradient types of the gradient fill mode. All the gradient types are gradient between two colors, that is, from the starting color to the ending color.The fill area is the minimum enclosing envelope.

A foursquare gradient.In a foursquare gradient, the color of the shape changes gradually from starting point to ending point with square pattern, and the starting point is the center of the boundary rectangle, while the ending point is the middle point of one of the short side(the shorter one between width and height ) of the boundary rectangle.Note that the color on a square does not change, while different squares have different colors, namely gradient occurs between different squares.As shown in the figure, from the start point to the end point of the gradient fill, the colors of the squares centered at the start point gradually change from the start color to the end color as the lengths of the sides increase.

A conical gradient.In a conical gradient, gradient will be performed both anticlockwise and clockwise, and the color changes along two directions all from the starting color to the ending color.Note: The fill area is treated as the conical vertex, and color in generatrix is the same.As shown in the figure, the start line of the gradient fill is the horizontal line which is on the right side of the fill extent center and passes this center. The color of the upper half of the conic gradually changes counterclockwise, and the color of the lower half of the conic gradually changes clockwise. The start line and the end line of one half is the end line and the start line of the other half, respectively. When moving from the start line to the end line in the counterclockwise direction or in the clockwise direction, the color changes from the start color to the end color in both directions.

A radial gradient.In a radial gradient, The color of the shape changes gradually from starting point to ending point with circle pattern, and the starting point is the center of the boundary rectangle of the filled shape, which is also the center of these circles, while the ending point is the farthest border point of the shape from the center of the boundary rectangle.Note that the color is not changed in the same circle. Colors in different circles are different gradually.As shown in the figure, from the origin point to the end point of the gradient fill, the colors of the circles centered at the origin point of the fill gradually changes from the start color to the end color as the circle radius increases.

Linear gradient fill.Color in linear gradient fill starts with one color and ends with another color. Colors that position the line vertically have the same color.

No gradient.The common fill mode is no fill mode.

Defines resolution types for fill symbols.

DPI is 72.

DPI is 81.

DPI is 96.

DPI is 127.

DPI is 150.

DPI is 200.

DPI is 254.

The GeoArc object. This class is primarily used for CAD layer, and it is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoArc object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoArc object.

The given GeoArc object.

Creates a new GeoArc object according to the specified arguments.

the center of the arc.The radius of the circular arc.The start angle defining where the arc starts.The sweep angle measured from the start angle defining where the arc ends.

Creates a new GeoArc object according to the specified arguments.

The specified start point.The specified middle point.The specified end point.

Converts the GeoArc object to the GeoLine object.

The count of the segments that are divided equally into,that is, the count of the part of the GeoLine object.Returns the GeoLine object.

Gets one point of the circular arc according to the specified angle.

The sweep angle. This angle ranges from 0 to the property value of SweepAngle.Returns the Point2D object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center of the circular arc.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the radius of the circular arc.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the start angle which unit is degree. It is accurate to 0.1 degree.

The default value is 200.

Gets or set the sweep angle in degrees. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The sweep angle (measured from the start angle) ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the arc ends. Positive angle indicates the sweep direction is anticlockwise, negative is clockwise.

The default value is 180.

Gets the length of the circular arc.

The default value is 3.141592654.

The GeoBox class. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is inherited from the Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method.

Constructs a new GeoBox object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoBox object.

The given GeoBox object.

Creates a new GeoBox object according to the specified arguments.

The position of the GeoBox object.The size of the bottom side of the GeoBox object.The height of the GeoBox object. The unit is meters.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the size of the bottom side of the GeoBox object.

The default value is Width=1,Height=1.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoBox object, which is the length along Z axis direction.

The default value is 1. The unit is meters.

Gets the center of the GeoBox object.

The default value is X=0, Y=0, Z=0.5.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoBSpline object. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Builds a new GeoBSpline object according to the arguments.

The control points.

Constructs a new GeoBSpline object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoBSpline object.

The specified GeoBSpline object.

Converts the GeoBSpline object to the GeoLine object.

The number of vertices between two neighbor control points.Returns a GeoLine.

Gets the length of the GeoBSpline object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the control points.

The default value is a empty Point2Ds object.

This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoCardinal object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoCardinal object.

the specified GeoCardinal object.

Builds a new GeoCardinal object according to the arguments.

The control points.

Converts the GeoCardinal object to the GeoLine object.

The number of vertices between two neighbor control points.Returns a GeoLine.

Gets the length of the GeoCardinal object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the control points.

The default value is an empty Point2Ds object.

The GeoChord class. It is the segment consist of an ellipse's chord and arc with arotation angle. This class is mainly used in the CAD layer, it is the subobject of the Geometry object.

Constructs a new GeoChord object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoChord object.

The given GeoChord object.

Creates a new GeoChord object according to the specified arguments.

The center of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.The semi-major axis of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.The semi-minor axis of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.The start angle of the elliptical arc which the GeoChord object corresponds to.The sweep angle of the elliptic arc corresponding to the GeoChord object.The rotation angle of the GeoChord object. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.

Converts the GeoChord object to the GeoLine object.

The count of elliptical arc which the partition of the GeoChord produces.Returns a GeoLine.

Converts the GeoChord obhect to the GeoRegion object.

The count of elliptical arc which the partition of the GeoChord produces.Returns a GeoRegion.

Refactor this GeoChord object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the semi-major axis of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the semi-minor axis of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the start angle of the elliptical arc which the GeoChord object corresponds to. It is accurate to 0.1 degree.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the sweep angle in degrees of the elliptical arc which the GeoChord object corresponds to. It is accurate to 0.1 degree.The sweep angle (measured from the start angle) ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends. Positive angle indicates the sweep direction is anticlockwise, negative is clockwise.

The default value is 180.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the GeoChord object. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse which the GeoChord object belongs to.The rotation angle of the GeoChord object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoChord object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoChord object.

The default value is 0.

Gets the area of the GeoChord object.

The default value is 0.

The GeoCircle class. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoCircle object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoCircle object.

The given GeoCircle object.

Creates a new GeoCircle object according to the specified arguments.

The specified center of the circle.The specified radius of the circle.

Creates a new GeoCircle object according to the specified arguments.

One specified point which is one of the two end points of the diameter of the circle.One specified point which is the other end points of the diameter of the circle.

Creates a new GeoCircle object according to the specified arguments.

The first specified point.The second specified point.The third specified point.

Converts the GeoCircle object to the GeoLine object.

The count of the circle that are divided equally into,that is, the count of the part of the GeoLine object.Returns a GeoLine.

Converts the GeoCircle object to the GeoRegion object.

The count of the circle that are divided equally into..Returns a GeoRegion.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center of the circle.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the radius of the circle.

The default value is 1.

Gets the perimeter of the circle.

The default value is 6.28318530717959.

Gets the area of the GeoCircle object.

The default value is 3.14159265358979.

The GeoCircle3D class inherited from the Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoCircle3D object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoCircle3D object.

The specified GeoCircle3D object.

Builds a new GeoCircle3D object according to the arguments. .

The 3D coordinates of the GeoCircle3D object.The radius of the GeoCircle3D object, in meters.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the radius of the GeoCircle3D object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoCompound class inherited from the Geometry class. This class is used for the CAD layer. The GeoCompound object is composed of more subobjects and each subobject corresponds to a Geometry object. This class provides the functions of managing the subobjects such as adding and removing the subobject.

Constructs a new GeoCompound object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoCompound object.

The given GeoCompound object.

Adds a subobject to the GeoCompound object.

The specified Geometry object to be added to the GeoCompound object as a subobject.Returns the index of the successfully added subobject.

Removes the subobject of the GeoCompound object with the specified index.

The index of the specified subobject of the GeoCompound object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Inserts a subobject to the GeoCompound object at the specified index.

The specified index. The default value is one.The specified Geometry object to be inserted to the GeoCompound object as the subobject.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Adjusts the order of the subobjects of the GeoCompound object. Whether to place the smaller subobjects on top.

Determines whether to move the small subobjects to the top.

Divides the GeoCompound object. The structure of the GeoCompoud object can be regarded as a tree. If only the top level is divided, there might still be compound objects; otherwise, there will not be compound geometric objects.

Determines whether only divide the top subobjects of the GeoCompound object or not. If the parameter is true it will only divide the top subobject.Returns the geometric object array.

Gets the count of the subobjects which composes the GeoCompound object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the subobject with the specified index in the GeoCompound object.

The specified index of the subobject in the GeoCompound object.

The GeoCone class inherited from the Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoCone object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoCone object.

The given GeoCone object.

Constructs a new GeoCone object according to the given arguments.

The position of the GeoCone object.The radius of the bottom of the GeoCone object. The unit is meters.Gets or sets the height of the GeoCone object. The unit is meters.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the radius of the bottom of the GeoCone object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoCone object.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoCoordSys class.The geographic coordinate system is composed of Datum, Central Meridian and an angular unit of measure. In GIS, the unit can be degrees, minutes or seconds. The horizontal direction ranges from -180 to 180 and the vertical direction ranges from -90 to 90.

Constructs a new GeoCoordSys object.

Creates a new GeoCoordSys object according to the specified arguments.

The type of the geographic coordinate system.The type of the spatial reference system. There are three types, they are the planar coordinate system, the geographic coordinate system and the projected coordinate system.

Creates a new GeoCoordSys object according to the specified arguments.

The spheroid reference datum of the geographic coordinate system.The central meridian of the geographic coordinate system.The type of the spatial reference system.The units of the geographic coordinate system.The name of the geographic coordinate system.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoCoordSysobject.

The specified GeoCoordSys object.

Exports the XML string represents the GeoCoordSys object.

The XML string represents the GeoCoordSys object.

Retrieves the GeoCoordSys object with the introduced XML string. Returns true if successful.

The specified XML string.Returns true, if successful; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources used by the GeoCoordSys.

Gets or sets the name of the geographic coordinate system.

The default value is GCS_WGS_1984.

Gets or sets the type of the geographic coordinate system.

The default value is UserDefined .

Gets or sets the constant that distinguishes the planar coordinate system, the geographic coordinate system and the projected coordinate system.

The default value is NoneEarth.

Gets or sets the spheroid reference datum of the geographic coordinate system.

The default value is an empty GeoDatum object.

Gets or sets the central meridian object.

The default value is an empty GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Gets or sets the units of the geographic coordinate system.

The default value is Degree .

Defines geographic coordinate system types.

User-defined.

Airy 1830

Airy modified

Australian National

Bessel 1841

Bessel modified

Bessel Namibia

Clarke 1858

Clarke 1866

Clarke 1866 Michigan

Clarke 1880 (IGN)

Clarke 1880 (RGS)

Clarke 1880 (Arc)

Clarke 1880 (SGA)

Everest 1830

Everest (definition 1967)

Everest (definition 1975)

Everest modified

GRS 1980

Helmert 1906

Indonesian National

International 1927

International 1967

Krasovsky 1940

Transit precise ephemeris

Plessis 1817

Struve 1860

War Office

GEM gravity potential model

OSU 1986 geoidal model

OSU 1991 geoidal model

Clarke 1880

Authalic sphere

GRS 1967

WGS 1966

Fischer 1960

Fischer 1968

Fischer modified

Hough 1960

Everest modified 1969

Walbeck

Authalic sphere (ARC/INFO)

Greek

Greek Geodetic Ref. System 1987

Average Terrestrial System 1977

Kartastokoordinaattijarjestelma

Pulkovo 1995

Adindan

Australian Geodetic Datum 1966

Australian Geodetic Datum 1984

Ain el Abd 1970

Afgooye

Agadez

Lisbon

Aratu

Arc 1950

Arc 1960

Batavia

Barbados

Beduaram

Beijing 1954

Reseau National Belge 1950

Bermuda 1957

Bern 1898

Bogota

Bukit Rimpah

Camacupa

Campo Inchauspe

Cape

Carthage

Chua

Corrego Alegre

Cote d'Ivoire

Deir ez Zor

Douala

Egypt 1907

European Datum 1950

European Datum 1987

Fahud

Gandajika 1970

Garoua

Guyane Francaise

Hu Tzu Shan

Hungarian Datum 1972

Indonesian Datum 1974

Indian 1954

Indian 1975

Jamaica 1875

Jamaica 1969

Kalianpur

Kandawala

Kertau

Kuwait Oil Company

La Canoa

Provisional South Amer. Datum 1956

Lake

Leigon

Liberia 1964

Lome

Luzon 1911

Hito XVIII 1963

Herat North

Mahe 1971

Makassar

European Terrestrial Ref. Sys. 1989

Malongo 1987

Manoca

Merchich

Massawa

Minna

Mhast

Monte Mario

M'poraloko

North American Datum 1927

NAD Michigan

North American Datum 1983

Nahrwan 1967

Naparima 1972

New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949

NGO 1948

Datum 73

Nouvelle Triangulation Francaise

NSWC 9Z-2

OSGB 1936

OSGB 1970 (SN)

OS (SN) 1980

Padang 1884

Palestine 1923

Pointe Noire

Geocentric Datum of Australia 1994

Pulkovo 1942

Qatar

Qatar 1948

Qornoq

Loma Quintana

Amersfoort

South American Datum 1969

Sapper Hill 1943

Schwarzeck

Segora

Serindung

Sudan

Tananarive 1925

Timbalai 1948

TM65

TM75

Tokyo

Trinidad 1903

Trucial Coast 1948

Voirol 1875

Voirol Unifie 1960

Bern 1938

Nord Sahara 1959

RT38

Yacare

Yoff

Zanderij

Militar-Geographische Institut

Reseau National Belge 1972

Deutsche Hauptdreiecksnetz

Conakry 1905

Dealul Piscului 1933 (Romania)

Dealul Piscului 1970 (Romania)

National Geodetic Network (Kuwait)

Kuwait Utility

WGS 1972

WGS 1972 Transit Broadcast Ephemer.

WGS 1984

Bern 1898 (Bern)

Bogota (Bogota)

Lisbon (Lisbon)

Makassar (Jakarta)

MGI (Ferro)

Monte Mario (Rome)

NTF (Paris)

Padang 1884 (Jakarta)

Belge 1950 (Brussels)

Tananarive 1925 (Paris)

Voirol 1875 (Paris)

Voirol Unifie 1960 (Paris)

Batavia (Jakarta)

RT38 (Stockholm)

Greek (Athens)

ATF (Paris)

Nord de Guerre (Paris)

European 1979

Everest - Bangladesh

Everest - India and Nepal

Hjorsey 1955

Hong Kong 1963

Oman

South Asia Singapore

Ayabelle Lighthouse

Bissau

Dabola

Point 58

Astro Beacon E 1945

Tern Island Astro 1961

Astronomical Station 1952

Bellevue IGN

Canton Astro 1966

Chatham Island Astro 1971

DOS 1968

Easter Island 1967

Guam 1963

GUX 1 Astro

Johnston Island 1961

Carthage (degrees)

Midway Astro 1961

Old Hawaiian

Pitcairn Astro 1967

Santo DOS 1965

Viti Levu 1916

Wake-Eniwetok 1960

Wake Island Astro 1952

Anna 1 Astro 1965

Gan 1970

ISTS 073 Astro 1969

Kerguelen Island 1949

Reunion

Antigua Island Astro 1943

Ascension Island 1958

Astro DOS 71/4

Cape Canaveral

Fort Thomas 1955

Graciosa Base SW 1948

ISTS 061 Astro 1968

L.C. 5 Astro 1961

Montserrat Astro 1958

Observ. Meteorologico 1939

Pico de Las Nieves

Porto Santo 1936

Puerto Rico

Sao Braz

Selvagem Grande 1938

Tristan Astro 1968

American Samoa 1962

Camp Area Astro

Deception Island

Gunung Segara

Indian 1960

S-42 Hungary

S-JTSK

Kusaie Astro 1951

Alaskan Islands

Japanese Geodetic Datum 2000 (JGD2000).

Xi'an 1980 coordinate system.

China Geodetic Coordinate System 2000 (geocentric coordinate system), or CGCS2000 for short.

Clarke 1880 (Benoit).

The GeoRectangle class. This class is mainly used in the CAD layer, it is the subobject of the Geometry object.

Constructs a new GeoCurve object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoCurve object.

The specified GeoCurve object.

Builds a new GeoCurve object according to the arguments.

The control points.

Converts the GeoCurve object to the GeoLine object.

The number of vertices between two neighbor control points.Returns a GeoLine.

Gets the length of the GeoCurve object.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the control points.

The default value is an empty Point2Ds object.

The GeoCylinder class which is the subclass of the Geometry3D class. If the radius of the top circle equals to the bottom circle of the GeoCylinder object, the object of this class is a cylinder.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoCylinder object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoCylinder object.

The given GeoCylinder object.

Builds a new GeoCylinder object according to the arguments.

The position of the GeoCylinder object.The radius of the top of the GeoCylinder object. The unit is meters.The radius of the bottom of the GeoCylinder object. The unit is meters.Gets or sets the height of the GeoCylinder object. The unit is meters.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the radius of the top of the GeoCylinder object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the radius of the bottom of the GeoCylinder object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 2.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoCylinder object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoDatum class. The earth reference system object which includes the earth ellipsoid parameters.

Constructs a new GeoDatum object.

Creates a new GeoDatum object according to the specified arguments.

The specified GeoDatum object.

Creates a new GeoDatum object according to the specified arguments.

The specified spheroid object of the datum.The name of the datum.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoDatum object.

The specified GeoDatum object.

Exports the XML string represents the GeoDatum object.

The XML string represents the GeoDatum object.

Creates a GeoDatum object with the specified XML string. Returns true if successful.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Releases all resources used by the GeoDatum.

Gets or sets the name of the GeoDatum.

The default value is User Define.

Gets or sets the spheroid object of the datum. It is available when the type of datum is user-defined.

The default value is GeoSpheroid.

Gets or sets the type of the datum. The default value is UserDefined.

Defines datum types.

User-defined datum.

Airy 1830

Airy modified

Australian National

Bessel 1841

Bessel Modified.

Bessel Namibia

Clarke 1858

Clarke 1866

Clarke 1866 Michigan

Clarke 1880

Clarke 1880 (Arc)

Clarke 1880 (Benoit)

Clarke 1880 (IGN)

Clarke 1880 (RGS)

Clarke 1880 (SGA)

Everest 1830

Everest (definition 1967)

Everest (definition 1975)

Everest modified

GEM gravity potential model

GRS 1967

GTS 1980

Helmert 1906

Indonesian National

International 1924

International 1967

Krasovsky 1940

Transit precise ephemeris

OSU 1986 geoidal model

OSU 1991 geoidal model

Plessis 1817

Authalic sphere

Struve 1860

War Office

WGS 1966

Fischer 1960

Fischer 1968

Fischer modified

Hough 1960

Everest modified 1969

Walbeck

Authalic sphere (ARC/INFO)

Adindan

Afgooye

Agadez

Australian Geodetic Datum 1966

Australian Geodetic Datum 1984

Ain el Abd 1970

Amersfoort

Aratu

Arc 1950

Arc1960

Ancienne Triangulation Francaise

Average Terrestrial System 1977

Barbados

Batavia

Beduaram

Beijing 1954 Reference system

Reseau National Belge 1950

Reseau National Belge 1972

Bermuda 1957

Bern 1898

Bern 1938

Bogota

BukitRimpah

Camacupa

CampoInchauspe

Cape

Carthage

Chua

Conakry 1905

Corrego Alegre

Cote d'Ivoire

Datum 73

Deir ez Zor

Dealul Piscului 1933

Dealul Piscului 1970

Deutsche Hauptdreiecksnetz

Douala

European Datum 1950

European Datum 1987

Egypt 1907

European Terrestrial Ref. Sys. 1989

Fahud

Gandajika 1970

Garoua

Geocentric Datum of Australia 1994

Greek Geodetic Reference System 1987

Greek

Guyane Francaise

Herat North

Hito XVIII 1963

HuTzuShan

Hungarian Datum 1972

Indian 1954

Indian 1975

Indonesian Datum 1974

Jamaica 1875

Jamaica 1969

Kalianpur

Kandawala

Kertau

Kartastokoordinaattijarjestelma

Kuwait Oil Company

Kuwait Utility

LaCanoa

Lake

Leigon

Liberia1964

Lisbon

LomaQuintana

Lome

Luzon 1911

Mahe 1971

Makassar

Malongo 1987

Manoca

Massawa

Merchich

Militar-Geographische Institut

Mhast

Minna

Monte Mario

M'poraloko

NAD Michigan

North American Datum 1927

North American Datum 1983

Nahrwan 1967

Nord de Guerre

National Geodetic Network (Kuwait)

NGO 1948

Nord Sahara 1959

NSWC 9Z-2

Nouvelle Triangulation Francaise

New Zealand Geodetic Datum 1949

OS (SN) 1980

Osgb 1936

OSGB 1970 (SN)

Padang 1884

Palestine 1923

Pointe Noire

Provisional South Amer. Datum 1956

Pulkovo 1942

Pulkovo 1995

Qatar

Qatar 1948

Qornoq

South American Datum 1969

Sapper Hill 1943

Schwarzeck

Segora

Serindung

Stockholm 1938

Sudan

Tananarive 1925

Timbalai 1948

TM65

TM75

Tokyo

Trinidad 1903

Trucial Coast 1948

Voirol 1875

Voirol Unifie 1960

WGS 1972

WGS 1972 Transit Broadcast Ephemeris

WGS 1984

Yacare

Yoff

Zanderij

European 1979

Everest - Bangladesh

Everest - India and Nepal

Hjorsey 1955

Hong Kong 1963

Oman

South Asia Singapore

Ayabelle Lighthouse

Bissau

Dabola

Point 58

Astro Beacon E 1945

Tern Island Astro 1961

Astronomical Station 1952

Bellevue IGN

Canton Astro 1966

Chatham Island Astro 1971

Dos 1968

Easter Island 1967

Guam 1963

GUX 1 Astro

Johnston Island 1961

Kusaie Astro 1951

Midway Astro 1961

Old Hawaiian

Pitcairn Astro 1967

Santo DOS 1965

Viti Levu 1916

Wake-Eniwetok 1960

Wake Island Astro 1952

Anna 1 Astro 1965

Gan 1970

ISTS 073 Astro 1969

Kerguelen Island 1949

Reunion

Antigua Island 1943

Ascension Island 1958

Astro DOS 71/4

Cape Canaveral

Fort Thomas 1955

Graciosa Base SW 1948

ISTS 061 Astro 1968

L.C. 5 Astro 1961

Montserrat Island 1958

Observ. Meteorologico 1939

Pico DeLas Nieves

Porto Santo 1936

Puerto Rico

Sao Braz

Selvagem Grande 1938

Tristan 1968

Samoa 1962

Camp Area

Deception Island

Gunung Segara

Indian 1960

S-42 Hungary

S-JTSK

Alaskan Islands

Japan JGD2000 datum (ITRF84).

China Xian 80 datum

China 2000

The GeoEllipse class. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoEllipse object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoEllipseGeoEllipse object.

The given GeoEllipse object.

Creates a new GeoEllipse object according to the specified arguments.

the center of the ellipse.The length of the semimajor of the ellipse.The length of the semiminor of the ellipse.The rotation angle of the ellipse. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse.

Initializes a new GeoEllipse object according to the specified arguments. The Rotation property of the GeoEllipse object is by default the Rotation property value of the GeoRectangle object.

The specified GeoRectangle object used to specify the GeoEllipse object.

Initializes a new GeoEllipse object according to the specified arguments. The default value of the Rotation property of the GeoEllipse object is 0.

The specified GeoRectangle object used to specify the GeoEllipse object.

Converts the GeoEllipse object to the GeoLine object.

The count of the ellipse that are divided equally into.Returns a GeoLine.

Converts the GeoEllipse object to the GeoRegion object.

The count of the ellipse that are divided equally into.Returns a GeoRegion.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center of the ellipse.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the length of the semimajor axis of the ellipse.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the length of the semiminor axis of the ellipse.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the ellipse. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse.The rotation angle of the GeoEllipse object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoEllipse object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the perimeter of the ellipse.

The default value is 9.6942840029957.

Gets the area of the ellipse.

The default value is 6.28318530717959.

The GeoEllipsoid class. This class inherits from Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoEllipsoid object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoEllipsoid object.

The given GeoEllipsoid object.

Creates a new GeoEllipsoid object according to the specified arguments.

The specified position of the GeoEllipsoid object.The length of the semi-axis of the GeoEllipsoid object along the direction of the X axis. The unit is meters.The length of the semi-axis of the GeoEllipsoid object along the direction of the Y axis. The unit is meters.The length of the semi-axis of the GeoEllipsoid object along the direction of the Z axis. The unit is meters.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the length of the semi-axis of the GeoEllipsoid object along the direction of the X axis. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the length of the semi-axis of the GeoEllipsoid object along the direction of the Y axis. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the length of the semi-axis of the GeoEllipsoid object along the direction of the Z axis. The unit is meters.

The default value is 2.0. The unit is meters.

Gets the center of the GeoEllipsoid object.

The default value is X=0, Y=0, Z=3 .

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoEllipticArc class. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Initializes a new GeoEllipticArc object.

Initializes an object identical to the given GeoEllipticArc object.

The given GeoEllipticArc object.

Initializes a GeoEllipticArc object according to the given arguments.

The specified center of the ellipse where the elliptic arc lies.The semimajor axis.The semiminor of the ellipse where the elliptic arc lies.The start angle.The sweep angle measured from the start angle ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends.The rotation angle of the ellipse where the elliptic arc lies. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse which the GeoEllipticArc object belongs to.

Converts the GeoEllipticArc object to the GeoLine object.

The count of the segment that are divided equally into.Returns a GeoLine.

Gets one point of the elliptic arc according to the specified angle.

The sweep angle. This angle ranges from 0 to the property value of SweepAngle.Returns the Point2D object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center of the ellipse where the elliptic arc lies.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the length of the semimajor of the ellipse where the elliptic arc lies.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the length of the semiminor of the ellipse where the elliptic arc lies.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the start angle of the elliptic arc, with the accuracy being 0.1 degrees.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the sweep angle in degrees of the elliptical arc. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The sweep angle (measured from the start angle) ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends. Positive angle indicates the sweep direction is anticlockwise, negative is clockwise.

The default value is 180.

Gets or sets the angle of the rotation of the elliptic arc. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse which the GeoEllipticArc object belongs to.The rotation angle of the GeoEllipticArc object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoEllipticArc object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the length of the elliptic arc.

The default value is 4.84383983945815.

The GeoHemiSphere class. This class inherits from Geometry3D class. Hemisphere can rotate and the 0 degree refers to the upper hemisphere.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoHemiSphere object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoHemiSphere object.

The given GeoHemiSphere object.

Initializes a GeoHemiSphere object according to the given arguments.

The position of the GeoHemiSphere object.The radius of the great circle of the hemisphere. The unit is meters.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the radius of the great circle of the hemisphere. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoLegend class which inherits from the Geometry class.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoLegend object.

The specified GeoLegend object.

Creates a new GeoLegend object according to the specified arguments.

The name of the associated map.The associated workspace.

Creates a new GeoLegend object according to the specified arguments.

The name of the associated map.The associated workspace.The title of the legend.

Returns a value indicating whether the specified item is visible or not.

True, if it is visible; otherwise, false.

Sets that whether the specified item is visible or not.

The name of the legend item.Whether to set the legend item visible or not.

Loads the settings of the GeoLegend object.

Whether to add to the screen layer or not. The legend added to the screen layer will not zoom with the layout or map zoom, which results in favorable display effects. However, while printing, it is suggested that you add the legend to the layout, not the screen layer.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the name of the map associated with the GeoLegend Object. Note that the workspace which the GeoLegend is in must contain the map, otherwise the map can not display correctly.

Gets or sets the title of the legend.

Gets or sets the style of the legend title.

Gets or sets the Text Style of Item.

Gets or sets the Text Style of SubItem.

Gets or sets the Style of background.

Gets or sets the distance of the left margin extend.

Gets or sets the distance of the right margin extend.

Gets or sets the distance of the top margin extend.

Gets or sets the distance of the bottom margin extend.

Gets or sets the column count of the item.

Gets the name array of the items.

Gets the associated workspace. The default value is the workspace which the GeoLegend object is in.

Gets the GeoCompound object contained in the GeoLegend object.

Gets or sets the center point of the GeoLegend object.

Gets or sets the width of the GeoLegend object.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoLegend object.

Gets or sets the style of the sub-item. Fix text size is not supported.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoLine class is derived from the Geometry class.This class is used to depict the linear geographical entity, such as river, road, boundary, and isoline , etc. , using an or multiple ordered sets of points.

Creates a new GeoLine object according to the specified arguments.

The ordered set of point to form the line.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoLine object.

The given GeoLine object.

Constructs a new GeoLine object.

Returns the index number of the part of the GeoLine , and the part is represents by the specified ordered set of points.

An ordered set of points.If the part dose not exist, returns -1.

Changes the direction of the part of the GeoLine, namely, reverses the sequence of the ordered set of points that form each part of the GeoLine.

If successful, this method will return true; otherwise it will return false.

Inserts a part to the GeoLine object at specified place. If succeeded, this method will return true; otherwise false.

The index at which to insert the part.The ordered set of points that form the part that will be inserted.If successful, this method will return true; otherwise it will return false. ,

Finds point on the GeoLine according to the specified distance. The searching start point is the starting point of the GeoLine.

The distance that the destination point is away from the starting point.If succeeded, returns the Point2D; otherwise returns null.

Converts the GeoLine object to a GeoRegion object. If succeeded, this method will return the result GeoRegion.

A GeoRegion object, if succeeded.

Removes the part of the GeoLine object with a specified index number.

The specified index of the part to be removed.Returns true if deleting successfully; otherwise false. ,

Appends a part to the GeoLine object.

An ordered set of points.Returns the index number of the part if successful. ,

Clears the spatial data of current GeoLine, namely deletes all the parts of this GeoLine.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object. ,

Refactor this 2D line geometric object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets GeoLine object symmetrical to the current GeoLine object with respect to specific segment.

The start point of the specific segment.The end point of the specific segment.The color of the GeoLine object.

Moves this GeoLine object by a specified amount.

The offset on X-coordinate.The offset on Y-coordinate.

Resizes the GeoLine object to let the bounds equal the specified Rectangle2D.

The range of the object after resizing specified.

Rotate the GeoLine object by specific degree with the specific base point, anticlockwise is the positive direction, in degree.

The base point specified.The rotated angle specified, in degrees.

Gets or sets the part of the GeoLine with the specified index number.

The index number of the part object.The part object with the specified index number.,

Returns the count of the parts of the GeoLine object.

The default value is 200. ,

Returns the length of the GeoLine object and the unit is the same as that of the dataset.

The default value is 0.0 .

Gets a value indicating whether the count of the parts of this GeoPoint is zero.

The GeoLine3D class inherits from the Geometry3D class. The 3D line is constructed by 3D points which can locate at the same plane or not.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Constructs a new GeoLine3D object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoLine3D object.

The given GeoLine3D object.

Creates a new GeoLine3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified Point3D object.

Adds a part to the GeoLine3D object.

The Point3Ds object that will form the part.Returns the index number of the part if successful.

Removes the part of the GeoLine3D object with a specified index.

The index number of the specified part.Returns true if deleting successfully; otherwise false.

Inserts a part to the GeoLine3D object at specified place. If succeeded, this method will return true; otherwise false.

The index at which to insert the part. The default value is 1.The Point3Ds object to be inserted.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Gets the index of the part of the GeoLine3D, and the part is represents by the specified o Point3Ds object.

The Point3Ds object which Is used to form a part.Returns the index of the part of the GeoLine3D, and the part is represents by the specified o Point3Ds object. Returns -1 if the part does not exist in the GeoLine3D object.

Converts the GeoLine3D object to a GeoRegion3D object.

Returns a GeoRegion3D object, if succeeded.

It is not supported in this class.

This class does not support the method.

Gets the length of the GeoLine3D object and the length is the sum of the lengths of all the parts of the GeoLine3D object.

The default value is 0. The unit is meters.

Returns the count of the parts of the GeoLine3D object.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the group of point object of subobject which is specified by a geometry object in 3d surface.

the index of the subobject. if the GeoLine3D object is a complex line object, the index of the subobject starts from 0.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoLineM class. This GeoLineM object is the linear feature which is composed with a set of PointMs with x coordinate, y coordinate and linear measure value, such as, road, street or river etc.

Constructs a new GeoLineM object.

Initializes a new instance identical to the given GeoLineM object.

The given GeoLineM object.

Creates a new GeoLineM object according to the specified arguments.

The specified PointMs object to form the GeoLineM.

Appends a part to the GeoLineM object.

The specified PointMs.Returns the index number of the part if successful.

Converts the GeoLineM object to a GeoRegion object.

Returns a GeoRegion object, if succeeded.

Finds point on the GeoLineM according to the specified distance. The searching start point is the starting point of the GeoLine.

The specified distance. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.If successful, returns the Point2D; otherwise returns null.

Returns the index number of the part of the GeoLineM, and the part is represented by the specified set of pointMs.

The specified set of pointMs.If the part dose not exist, returns -1.

Transfers the Geoline object to a two-dimensional line object. Return a line object if it's successful. It is obsolete. Use ConvertToLine to replace it.

Returns the GeoLine object if successful.

Converts the GeoLineM object to a GeoLine object.

Returns the GeoLine object if successful.

Inserts a part to the GeoLineM object at specified place.

The index at which to insert the part, and begin with zero.The pointMs that form the part that will be inserted.If successful, this method will return true; otherwise it will return false.

Removes the part of the GeoLineM object with a specified index.

The specified index of the part to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Changes the direction of the part of the GeoLine, namely, reverses the sequence of set of points that form each part of the GeoLine.

true, if successful; otherwise it will return false.

Gets the M values for points with no M values through interpolation.

Whether to ignore the distances between parts.

Calibrates the GeoLineM object with pointMs.

The specified pointMs.The calibration mode.Whether to ignore the distances between parts.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Clibrates the GeoLineM object according to the given GeoLineM object.

The given GeoLineM object.The calibration mode.Whether to ignore the distances between parts.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Clips the GeoLineM object according to the given clip region.

The GeoLineM object to be clipped.The given clip region.The GeoLineM object after being clipped.

Interpolates the GeoLineM to get M values at the positions of BEFORE and AFTER. About the definition of the position, please refer to the WhereToCalibrate enumeration.

The start point of the line for interpolation.The end point of the line for interpolation.The M value of the start point of the line for interpolation.The M value of the end point of the line for interpolation.The tolerance. It is used to determine whether the specified from node and to node are on the GeoLineM object. If the vertical distances from the nodes to the object are greater than the value, the specified nodes are invalid. The interpolation will not be performed. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.The calibration mode.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the distance from the point object with the specified M value to the start point of the GeoLineM object.

The specified M value.The distance between the point object of the given M-value and the start point of the route object. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.

Gets the distance from the point object with the specified M value to the start point of the specified route object.

The specified M value.Specifies whether to ignore the distances between parts.The distance between the point object of the given M-value and the start point of the route subobject. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.

Returns the distance from the point object with the specified M value to the start point of the specified GeoLineM subobject.

The specified M value.The specified index of specified route subobject.Specifies whether to ignore the distances between parts.The distance between the point object of the given M-value and the start point of the route subobject. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.

Joint two GeoLineM objects, the end node of the current GeoLineM object joint with the start point of another GeoLineM object.

The specified GeoLineM object to add.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Create new GeoLineM object with the specified line object and PointMs.

The line object specified.The route points collection, including at least two points.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets geometry object symmetrical to the current GeoLineM object with respect to specific segment.

The start point of the specific segment.The end point of the specific segment.The image of the GeoLineM object.

Refactor this GeoLineM object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves this GeoLineM object by a specified amount.

The specified X offset. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.The specified Y offset. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.

Modify the M value of the GeoLineM object according to the offset of the M value.

The M value offset specified.

Resizes the GeoLineM object to let the bounds equal the specified Rectangle2D.

The range of the object after resizing specified.

Rotate the rotate object by specific degree with the specific base point, anticlockwise is the positive direction, in degree.

The base point specified.The rotated angle specified, in degrees.

Reverse the M values of this GeoLineM object.

Set the M values of the GeoLineM object according to the distance.

The M value of the start point specified.

Set the M values of the GeoLineM object according to the distance.

The M value of the start point specified.The zoom scale of the M values specified. The M values of the GeoLineM object will be the twice of the actual distance is the zoom scale is 2.

Set the M values of the GeoLineM object according to the distance.

The M value of the start point specified. The zoom scale of the M values specified. The M values of the GeoLineM object will be the twice of the actual distance is the zoom scale is 2.Specifies whether to ignore the interval between the subobject of the GeoLineM object.

Sets the M value of the specified point of the GeoLineM object.

The specified point object.The specified M value.A Boolean value indicates whether the setting was successful. true indicates it was successful, and false indicates it was not.

Sets the M value of the specified point of the GeoLineM object.

The specified point object.The specified M value.The tolerance. It is used to determine whether the specified point is on the GeoLineM object. If the vertical distances from the point to the GeoLineM object are greater than the value, the specified nodes are invalid. The setting will not be performed. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.Specifies the position types of calibrating the M value.A Boolean value indicates whether the setting was successful. true indicates it was successful, and false indicates it was not.

Modify 2D line subobject at the specific location.

The index of the subobject specified to be changed.The point string of the specified subobject.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Split the GeoLineM object based on the specific point object.

The split point specified, it's on the GeoLineM object. The first GeoLineM object specified after split.The second GeoLineM object specified after split.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Union the two GeoLineM objects.

The GeoLineM objects specified to union.Another GeoLineM objects specified to union.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Update the M value of the GeoLineM object.

The index of the start point of the route to update.The index of the end point of the route to update.The M value of the start point of the route to update.The M value of the end point of the route to update.Specifies the position types of calibrating the M value.The calibration mode specified.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Update the M value of the GeoLineM object.

The from point of the route to update.The to point of the route to update.The M value of the start point of the route to update.The M value of the end point of the route to update.The tolerance. It is used to determine whether the specified from node and to node are on the GeoLineM object. If the vertical distances from the nodes to the object are greater than the value, the specified nodes are invalid. The update will not be performed. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.Specifies the position types of calibrating the M value of GeoLineM object.The calibration mode specified.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Returns the M value of the point object at the specified distance.

The distance. It is the distance between the point object and the start point of the route object. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.The M value of the point object at the specified distance.

Returns the M value of the point object at the specified distance.

The distance. It is the distance between the point object and the start point of the route object. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.Whether to ignore the distances between parts.The M value of the point object at the specified distance.

Returns the M value of the point object at the specified distance.

The distance. It is the distance between the point object and the start point of the route object. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.The index of the part to be returned.Whether to ignore the distances between parts.The M value of the point object at the specified distance.

Returns the M value of the specified point of the GeoLineM object.

The specified point object.The tolerance. It is used to determine whether the specified point is on the GeoLineM object. If the vertical distances from the point to the GeoLineM object are greater than the value, the specified nodes are invalid. The return will not be performed. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route object.Whether to ignore the distances between parts.The M value of the specified point of the GeoLineM object.

Returns the pointMs of the part at the specified index of the line object. The point object will be returned if successful; otherwise, null will be returned.

The index of the part.The pointMs of the part at the specified index of the line object.

Returns the point object at the specified distance.

The distance. It is the distance between the point object and the start point of the route object. The unit is the same with the dataset that contains the route.The point object at the specified distance.

Returns the point object at the specified distance.

Returns the point object with the specified M value.

The specified M value.The point object with the specified M value.

Returns the route object with specified start M value and end M value. Make sure that the M values are monotonous.

The start M value specified.The end M value specified.The corresponding GeoLineM object with the given start measure and end measure.

Returns the point object with the specified M value.

The specified M value.The offset value of the M value. If measure = 10, offset = 2, then the specified range of M value is [8,12].Whether to ignore the distances between parts.The point object with the specified M value.

Returns the line objects corresponding to the route object with specified M value range. Make sure that the M values are monotonous.

The start M value.The end M value.The line object corresponding to the specified M range.

Interpolates the GeoLineM at the INTERVAL position to get M values. About the definition of the position, please refer to the WhereToCalibrate enumeration.

Gets a copy of the current GeoLineM object.

Gets the length of the GeoLineM object and the unit is the same as that of the dataset.

The default value is 200.

Gets the maximum measure value of the GeoLineM object.

The default value is 200.

Gets the minimum measure value of the GeoLineM object.

The default value is 200.

Gets the count of the parts of the GeoLineM object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the pointMs of the part in the line object.

The index of the part.,

Gets whether the current object is null.

The GeoMap class. This class is used to add a map to the MapPageLayout object.

Constructs a new GeoMap object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoMap object.

The given GeoMap object.

To construct a new GeoMap object based on the specified parameters, the object will be linked to the map.

The name of the map in the GeoMap object.The shape of the GeoMap object.

Creates a new GeoMap object according to the specified map XML.

The specified map XML.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the shape of the GeoMap object.

The default value is an empty GeoRectangle object.

Gets or sets the name of the map associated with the GeoLegend Object. Note that the workspace which the GeoLegend is in must contain the map, otherwise the map can not display correctly.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the GeoMapBorder object used by this GeoMap object. For more information about the border of the GeoMap object, please refer to the GeoMapBorder class.

The default value is an empty GeoMapBorder object.

Gets or sets whether the GeoMapBorder object used by this GeoMap object is visible.

The default value is false.

Gets or sets the map scale of the geometry object of the map.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the geometry object of the map.

Gets or sets the graticules or MeasuredGrid added to map object, or add custom reference grid, used for the map objects in the layout.

If add graticules or MeasuredGrid to the map object, or add custom reference gird, this property is used to gets or sets whether to display grid.

Gets or sets the map center.

Gets or sets the map XML content.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoMapBorder class. This class is used to decorate the frame of the GeoMap object with different kinds of border type.

Constructs a new GeoMapBorder object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoMapBorder object.

The given GeoMapBorder object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the border type of the GeoMap object. For more information about the style of the border, please refer to the GeoMapBorderType class.

The default value is SingleLine type.

Gets or sets the filling type of the frame of the GeoMap object. For more information about the style of the filling, please refer to the GeoMapBorderFillType class.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the filling type of the corner of the frame of the GeoMap object. For more information about the filling type of the corner, please refer to the GeoMapBorderFillType class.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the path of the image used to fill the frame of the GeoMap object when the value of the FillType property is Image.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the path of the image used to fill the corner of the frame of the GeoMap object when the value of the CornerFillType property is Image.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the bounds of the frame of the GeoMap object. The bounds represents the size of the GeoMapBorder object in the MapLayout object.

The default value is {Left=0,Bottom=0,Right=100,Top=100}.

Gets or sets the color of the inner frame.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0].

Gets or sets the style of the inner frame.

The default value is {FillBackColor=Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255],FillForeColor=Color [A=255, R=189, G=235, B=255],FillGradientAngle=0,FillGradientMode=None,FillGradientOffsetRatioX=0,FillGradientOffsetRatioY=0,FillOpaqueRate=100,FillSymbolID=0,LineColor=Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0],LineSymbolID=0,LineWidth=0.1,MarkerAngle=0,MarkerSize={Width=2.4,Height=-0.1},MarkerSymbolID=0}.

Gets or sets the line width of the inner frame. Unit: 0.1 millimetres.

The default value is 0.1.

Gets or sets the interval between the inner frame of the GeoMapBorder object and the GeoMap object. Unit: 0.1 millimetres.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the color of the out frame.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0].

Gets or sets the style of the out frame.

Gets or sets the line width of the out frame. Unit: 0.1 millimetres.

The default value is 0.2.

Gets or sets the interval between the out frame and the out line of the GeoMapBorder object. Unit: 0.1 millimetres.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the color of the inner line.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0].

Gets or sets the style of the inner line.

Gets or sets the line width of the inner line. Unit: 0.1 millimeters.

The default value is 0.1.

Gets or sets the interval between the inner line and the inner frame of the GeoMapBorder object. Unit: 0.1 millimetres.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the color of the out line.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0].

Gets or sets the style of the out line.

Gets or sets the line width of the outer. Unit: 0.1 millimeters.

The default value is 0.1.

Gets or sets the interval between the outer line and the inner line of the GeoMapBorder object. Unit: 0.1 millimetres.

The default value is 5.

Gets or sets the filling mode of the frame of the GeoMap object. There are two modes such as from outside to inside and from inside to outside. For more information, please refer to the FillDirectionType class.

The default value is Inner type.

Gets or sets the start mode of the corner filling. For more information, please refer to the CornerFillStartMode class.

The default value is LeftTop type.

Gets or sets the filling style of the frame of the GeoMap object.

Gets or sets the text used for filling when the filling type of the frame of the GeoMap object is the text filling.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the text style when the filling type of the frame of the GeoMap object is the text filling.

The default value is {Alignment=TopLeft,BackColor=Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0],BackOpaque=false,Bold=false,FontHeight=6,FontWidth=0,ForeColor=Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0],IsSizeFixed=false,Italic=false,Outline=false,Rotation=0,Shadow=false,Strikeout=false,Underline=false,Weight=0}.

Gets or sets the text used for corner filling when the filling type of the corner of the frame of the GeoMap object is the text filling.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the text style for corner filling when the filling type of the corner of the frame of the GeoMap object is the text filling.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoMapBorderType class. When the border type of the GeoMapBorder object is the complex border, the users can fill the border. The border filling region is the region between the inner line and the out line of the GeoMapBorder object except the corner filling region.

Null.

Picture Fill.

Text Fill.

Symbol Fill.

Defines map border types.

None, as shown below.

Single-border, as shown below.

Complex.The complex border consists of outer frame, inner frame, outer line, innner line, corners, and fill regions. Users can set the frames, lines, and fill styles for regions to get favorable effects.Below is the illustration for the complex border. In the picture, the red rectangle line is the out frame of the GeoMapBorder object; the green rectangle line is the inner frame; the yellow rectangle line is the inner line; the blue rectangle line is the out line; the region with the slash is the border filling region; the black region is the corner filling region.The border of the GeoMap object below is complex border.

The GeoMapScale class. This class is used to add the scale of the map to the PageMapLayout object.

Constructs a new GeoMapScale object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoMapScale object.

The given GeoMapScale object.

Creates a new GeoMapScale object according to the specified arguments.

The specified left bottom point of the GeoMapScale object.Specified width. Unit: 0.1 MM.Specified height. Unit: 0.1MM.

Creates a new GeoMapScale object according to the specified arguments.

The ID of the specified GeoMap object which the GeoMapScale object is related with.The specified left bottom point of the GeoMapScale object.Specified width. Unit: 0.1 MM.Specified height. Unit: 0.1MM.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the ID of the GeoMap object which is corresponding to the GeoMapScale object.

The default value is -1.

Gets or sets the type of the GeoMapScale object.

The default value is RailwayMidSplit.

Gets or sets the value of the scale.

The default value is 1000000.

Gets or sets the count of the segments of the GeoMapScale object.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the length of each segment of the GeoMapScale object.

The default value is 20.

Gets or sets the count of the segments of the left side of the GeoMapScale object,The minimum value is 2.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the unit of the scale.

The default value is Kilometer.

Gets or sets the text style of the GeoMapScale object.

The default value is {Alignment=TopLeft,BackColor=Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0],BackOpaque=false,Bold=false,FontHeight=30.0,FontWidth=0.0,ForeColor=Color [A=255, R=2, G=2, B=2],IsSizeFixed=false,Italic=false,Outline=false,Rotation=0.0,Shadow=false,Strikeout=false,Underline=false,Weight=0}.

Gets the width of the GeoMapScale object. Unit: 0.1 millimeter.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoMapScale object. Unit: 0.1 millimeter.

The default value is 0.

Gets the left bottom point of the GeoMapScale object.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the style of the GeoMapScale object.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoMapScaleType class. This class defines the representation of the map scale.

Text.

Grid.

Railway.

Railway Midsplit.

Ruler.

Barrier.

Great Wall.

Railway Crossed by Line.

Jagged.

The Geometrist class.There are two uses of this class. First this class can be used to determine the spatial relationship of the two geometry objects, such as determining the relationship of the two geometry objects is disjoint or contain. The other use of this class is to perform operations on the geometry object.

Gets the distance between the two specified geometry objects.

The first geometry.The second geometry.The distance between two geometry objects.

Resample the geometry object with the resampling distance tolerance. It is obsolete. Use Resample to replace it.

The geometry object used to be resampled.The tolerance of resampling. The greater value user specifies, the fewer vertices there will be in result data.The resampled geometry object.

Resample for the geometry object.

The geometry to resample. Line objects an region objects are supported.The specified method for resampling.The given resampling tolerance. See ResampleType.The resampled geometry object.

Performs the identity operation on the operated geometry object, that is, the returned geometry object contains the shape of the operate geometry object.

Operated geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Operate geometry object. It can only be a region type.The identical geometry object.

Updates the operated geometry object. Replaces the overlap part of the two geometry objects with the operate geometry object.

Operated geometry object. The object to be updated. It can only be a region type.Operate geometry object. The object used to update the operated geometry. It can only be a region type.Returns the updated geometry object.

Performs the symmetric difference operation on the two geometry objects, that is, erasing the overlap part with the operate geometry object in the operated geometry object, and saving the remaining part.

The first geometry object participating in the operation. It can be only a region.The second geometry object participating in the operation. It can be only a region.Returns the result of the symmetric difference operation.

Erases the area, which in common with the operate geometry object, in the operated geometry object.

The operated geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.The operate geometry object. It must be a region.Returns the erased geometry object.

Unions the two geometry objects.

The 1st geometry object participating in the operation. It must be a region or line.The 2nd geometry object participating in the operation. It must be a region or line.The returned value is the union of two geometry objects. Only support for the simple line object.

Intersects two geometric objects, and then returns the intersection of these two geometric objects. Currently, SuperMap only supports the intersection between line and line, as well as between region and region.

The 1st geometry object participating in the operation. Supporting line and region types.The 2nd geometry object participating in the operation. Supporting line and region types.Returns the intersected geometry object.

For two geometric objects, the intersection of two geometric objects is returned.At present only supports the wire to seek the intersection, the face and the face.

The first geometric object for the intersection operation, the support line and the surface type.The second geometry object for the intersection operation, the support line and the surface type.Node tolerance, currently only supported wire to be submitted.Returns the intersection of two geometric objects.

Clips the operated geometry object with the operate geometry object.

The operated geometry object. It can be a line or a region.The operate geometry object. It must be a region.Returns the geometry object produced by clipping the operated geometry object with the operate geometry object.

Builds a geometry object trimmed by a specified rectangle based on specified geometry object.

The target geometry object, line and surface type are supported.The rectangle to be trimmed.Returns the geometry object produced by clipping the operated geometry object with the operate geometry object.

Determines whether the search geometry object has the common lines with the searched geometry object.

The search geometry object. It can be a line or a region.The searched geometry object. It can be a line or a region.Returns true, if the search geometry object has the common lines with the searched geometry object; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the search geometry object has the common points with the searched geometry object.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true, if the search geometry object has the common points with the searched geometry object; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the search geometry object contains the searched geometry object or not.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true, if the search geometry object contains the searched geometry object; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the search geometry object is within the searched geometry object.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true, if the search geometry object is within the searched geometry object; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the search geometry object is inside the searched geometry object or not. It supports setting the node tolerance.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.The fuzzy tolerance.Returns true, if the search geometry object is within the searched geometry object; otherwise, false.Refer to IsWithin

Determines whether the search geometry object crosses the searched geometry object or not.

The search geometry object. It can only be a line type.The searched geometry object. It can be a line or a region.Returns true if the search geometry object crosses the searched geometry object; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the search geometry object and the searched geometry object overlap or not.

The search geometry object. It can be a line or a region.The searched geometry object. It can be a line or a region.Returns true, if the two geometry objects overlap; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the search geometry object and the searched geometry object touch each other or not.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true if the two geometry objects touch each other; otherwise false.

Determines whether the search geometry object and the searched geometry object are intersected or not. Returns true if the two objects are interested.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true if the two objects are intersected; otherwise false.

Determines whether the search geometry object and the searched geometry object are disjointed.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true if the two geometry objects are disjointed; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the searched geometry is consistent with the searching geometry, i.e., the two geometries are overlapped with each other, the number of vertex are the same, and coordinates of positive or negative sequences are the same.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Returns true if the two geometry objects are identical; otherwise, false.

Search geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.Searched geometry object. It can be a point, a line or a region.The fuzzy tolerance.Returns true if the two geometry objects are identical; otherwise, false.Refer to IsIdentical

Computer the convex closure of the points set, that is , the smallest outside polygon. Returns a simple convex polygon.

The set of points.Returns the smallest outside polygon.

Computer the convex closure of the geometrical object, that is , the smallest outside polygon. Returns a simple convex polygon.

The geometrical object.Returns the smallest outside polygon.

Splits the geometrical by the line or region.

The source region object to be split.The Geometry object which is used for splitting. It can be line .Returns the first region object..Returns the second region object.True if successful, otherwise False.

Computes the fillet between the two lines, and returns the arc which the fillet relevant to.

The start point of the first line segment.The end point of the first line segment.The start point of the second line segment.The end point of the second line segment.The radius of the arc.Returns the arc which the fillet relevant to.

Judges whether the two sections are parallel.

The start point of the first line segment.The end point of the first line segment.The start point of the second line segment.The end point of the second line segment.True if the two line segments are parallel, otherwise False.

Gets a line which pass the specified point and be parallel to the specified line.

The specified point which is outside the specified line.A point on the line.Another point on the line.Returns the parallel lines.

Gets a line parallel to the specified polyline by the specified distance, and returns the parallel lines.

The specified polyline object.The distance between the two parallel lines.Returns the parallel lines.

Judges whether the two lines are perpendicular.

The start point of the first line segment.The end point of the first line segment.The start point of the second line segment.The end point of the second line segment.Returns True if the two lines are perpendicular, otherwise returns False.

Gets the perpendicular from the specified point to the specified line.

The specified point.A point on the line.Another point on the line.Returns the perpendicular.

Gets the foot of the perpendicular which from the specified point to the specified line.

The specified point.A point on the line.Another point on the line.Returns the foot of the perpendicular.

Gets the foot of the perpendicular which from the specified Point3D object to the specified Line3D object.

The given Point3D object.A point on the Line3D.Another point on the Line3D.Returns the foot of the perpendicular.

Judges whether the specified point is on the specified section(line), returns True if the point is on the specified section(line), otherwise returns False.

The specified point.The start point of the specified section.The end point of the specified section.Whether to do extend compute to the section. If isExtended is True, process it as line, otherwise process it as section.Returns True if the point is on the specified section(line), otherwise returns False.

Returns the intersection of the two sections(lines).

The start point of the first line segment.The end point of the first line segment.The start point of the second line segment.The end point of the second line segment.Whether to do extend compute to the section. If isExtended is True, process it as line, otherwise process it as section.Returns the intersection of the two sections(lines).

Computes the length of the geodesic.

The coordinate points that forms the geodesic.The semimajor axis of the ellipsoid holding the geodesic.The semiminor axis of the ellipsoid holding the geodesic.Returns the length of the geodesic.

Returns the points of intersection of the two PolyLine objects.

The specified points which compose the first polyline.The specified points which compose the second polyline.The points of intersection.

Smooths the specified Point2Ds object.

The specified point string to be smoothed.Smooth coefficient. The valid range is larger than or equal to 2, an exception will throw out if set as a value less than 2. The greater the smooth coefficient, the smoother the points. The recommended range is [2,10].The Point2Ds object which is smoothed.

Determines whether there is a Hollow type subobject in the specified region object.

The region object to be determined. Currently, only GeoRegion is supported.Returns true if there is, otherwise return false.

Split line with point objects, or split line objects with line/region objects.

The line object to be splited.The object used to split the line object. It can be point, line and region.The specified tolerance, which is used to determine whether the point object is on the line object. If the distance from the point to the line is greater than the tolerance, the split operation will not be performed.The line object array after splitting.

Calculates the geodesic area.

The specified Geometry object to calculate geodesic area.The specified PrjCoordSys object.The geodesic area.

Calculates the 3D line length.

Specified GeoLine3D object length.The specified coordinate system type object.The 3D line length, unit: meter.

Gets the distance between the specified Point3D object to the specified Line3D object.

The given Point3D object.The start point of the specified 3D line segment.The end point of the specified 3D line segment.The distance between the 3D point and the 3D line segment. If the foot from the point to the line segment is not on the line segment, the distance between the point and the endpoint which is near the point will be returned.

Gets the distance from the specified point to the specified line segment.

The specified point.The start point of the specified section.The end point of the specified section.The distance between the point and the line segment. If the foot from the point to the line segment is not on the line segment, the distance between the point and the endpoint which is near the point will be returned.

Returns the intersection of the two 3D line segments.

The start point of the first 3D line segment.The end point of the first 3D line segment.The start point of the second 3D line segment.The end point of the second 3D line segment.The tolerance. Two 3D line segments are considered as intersection if the distance between them is less than or equal to this value.The intersection of the two 3D line segments. Return a null GeoPoint3D object if there is no intersection.

Determines whether the point is on the left of the line.

The specific point.One point on the line.Another point on the line.A boolean, True means the point is to the left of the line.

Determines whether the point is on the right of the line.

The specific point.One point on the line.Another point on the line.A boolean, True means the point is to the right of the line.

Determines whether the two points are on the same side of the line.

The point specified.The other point specified.One point on the line.Another point on the line.A boolean, True means the two points are on the same side of the line.

Judges whether the specified point3D object is on the specified 3D line segment, returns True if the point is on the specified 3D line segment, otherwise returns False.

The given Point3D object.The start point of the specified 3D line segment.The end point of the specified 3D line segment.Returns True if the point is on the specified line segment, otherwise returns False.

Determines whether the foot from the specified point3D object to the 3D line segment is on the 3D line segment, returns True if the foot is on the specified 3D line segment, otherwise returns False.

The given Point3D object.The start point of the specified 3D line segment.The end point of the specified 3D line segment.A boolean, whether the foot from the specified point3D object to the 3D line segment is on the 3D line segment, returns True if the foot is on the specified 3D line segment, otherwise returns False.

Determines whether the foot from the specified point2D object to the line segment is on the line segment, returns True if the foot is on the specified line segment, otherwise returns False.

The specified point.The start point of the specified section.The end point of the specified section.A boolean, True means the foot from the to the line segment is on the line segment.

Returns the vertex on the geometry which is nearest to the given point.

The specific point.The geometry object specified. Only line object is supported currently.The vertex on the given geometry object which is nearest to the given point.

Calculate the concave hulls of the point collection

The specific point set.The minimum angle in the concave closure.Returns a concave polygon that contains the specified point set.

Make cluster based on the density of the point set, return the clustered region object.

Input point set.The spatial reference system of the point set, if null, it means a planar coordinate system by default.Density cluster radius.Density cluster radius unit. Invalid when the spatial reference system prjCoordSys is invalid.The density clustering number threshold, it must be greater than or equal to 2. The higher the threshold, the more severe the condition that can be clustered into a cluster. Recommended value is 4.If the cluster is successful, returns the polygons of each cluster points; if failure, returns null.

Make density cluster for the point set, returns the cluster category of each point.

Input point set.The spatial reference system of the point set, if null, it means a planar coordinate system by default.Density cluster radius.Density cluster radius unit. Invalid when the spatial reference system prjCoordSys is invalid.The density clustering number threshold, it must be greater than or equal to 2. The higher the threshold, the more severe the condition that can be clustered into a cluster. Recommended value is 4.If clustered successfully, returns the cluster category of each point, starting from 1, o means invalid.

Calculates the geodesic line according to the start and end points, and returns the result line object.

The start point of the geodesic line you input.The end point of the geodesic line you input.Constructs the geodesic line parameter object. Please see GeodesicLineParameter.Returns the geodesic line object if it is successfully created; otherwise, null.

Calculates the geodesic line in accordance with the start point, direction angle and distance, and returns the result line object.

The start point of the geodesic line you input.The geodesic line angle you input. Positive or negative are OK.The geodesic line length you input. The unit is in meters.Constructs the geodesic line parameter object. Please see GeodesicLineParameter.Returns the geodesic line object if it is successfully created; otherwise, null.

Cutting by area for the land parcel data, for example, from a large parcel, split a piece of 10 acres of land, or the whole land can also be divided into 10 parts, each of the area are the same.

A partitioned two-dimensional object cannot be emptySegment parameter class object. The space reference coordinate system of the divided two-dimensional object is not supported.Because of cutting surface objects need to be carried out in accordance with the area of cutting, cannot effectively calculate the area directly under the latitude and longitude, must to projection system to calculate the area, but to a projection system data after there will be a large deformation, there may be errors lead to the final results.An array of surface objects obtained after segmentation.

The array of objects across the object is resampled.

Specifies an array of surface objects to be resampled.Specify a resampling method.Please refer to ResampleType for enumeration types. Specified weight sampling tolerance.Resampling an array of surface objects.

Defines geometric object types.

The GeoLineM class. This GeoLineM object is the linear feature which is composed with a set of PointMs with x coordinate, y coordinate and linear measure value.

The text geometry object type.

The region geometry object type.

The line geometry object.

The point geometry object.

The two-dimensional rectangle. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The two-dimensional rectangle whose four corners are round. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The arc. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The two-dimensional circle. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The two-dimensional ellipse. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The arc which is a part of the ellipse line. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The pie which is the portion cut by two lines from the center of the ellipse. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The segment consists of an ellipse's chord and arc with a rotation angle. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The two-dimensional curve. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The Cardinal curve. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The BSpline curve. This type of geometry object is parameterized.

The compound geometry object. The GeoCompound object is composed of more subobjects and each subobject is the Geometry object of any type.

The three-dimensional point.

The three-dimensional line.

The three-dimensional region.

The three-dimensional text.

The three-dimensional model.

The three-dimensional sphere.

The three-dimensional hemisphere.

The three-dimensional ellipsoid.

The cone.

The cylinder.

The pie cylinder.

The pyramid.

The three-dimensional circle.

The three-dimensional pie.

The map which is used to add the map to the layout.

The north arrow.

The scale.

The picture.

The picture3D.

The legend.

The map boarder.

The particle.

The parametric line.

The parametric region.

The compound parametric line.

The compound parametric region.

The art text.

The three-dimensional model.

The custom geometry.

The GeoModel class. This class is used for setting the 3D model's parameter.

Constructs a new GeoModel object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoModel object.

The given GeoModel object.

Creates the GeoModel object with the 3DS or SGM file.

The path of the 3DS or SGM file. The system will distinguish by the extension of the file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Creates the GeoModel object with the 3DS or SGM file as well as the position of the GeoModel object.

The path of the 3DS or SGM file. The system will distinguish by the extension of the file.The specified position of the GeoModel object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Exports the GeoModel object to the SGM file.

The specified path of the SGM file exported.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Sets the Bounding Box of the model.

The new bounding box to be set.

Calculates the bounding box of model according to the set of grid surface.

Converts to region.

The type of the projected coordinate system.Regions converted.

Gets or sets the name of the GeoModel object.

The default value is String .Empty.

Gets the set of grid surface of geometry object of 3d model.

Gets the node animation of the GeoModel object.

Gets the animation of the model.

The GeoNorthArrow class. The object of the GeoNorthArrow class is the element in the layout of the map.

Constructs a new GeoNorthArrow object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoNorthArrow object.

The given GeoNorthArrow object.

Creates a new GeoNorthArrow object according to the specified arguments.

The style of the GeoNorthArrow object.The bound of the GeoNorthArrow object.The rotation angle of the GeoNorthArrow object. Unit: degrees. The pivot point is the center of the GeoNorthArrow object.

Creates a new GeoNorthArrow object according to the specified arguments.

The full path of the picture used by the GeoNorthArrow object whose style is the ImageFile.The bound of the GeoNorthArrow object.The rotation angle of the GeoNorthArrow object. Unit: degrees. The pivot point is the center of the GeoNorthArrow object.

Creates a new GeoNorthArrow object according to the specified arguments.

the specified ID of the GeoMap object which the GeoNorthArrow object is related with.The style of the GeoNorthArrow object.The bound of the GeoNorthArrow object.

Creates a new GeoNorthArrow object according to the specified arguments.

the specified ID of the GeoMap object which the GeoNorthArrow object is related with.The full path of the picture used by the GeoNorthArrow object whose style is the ImageFile.The bound of the GeoNorthArrow object.

Sets the bound of the GeoNorthArrow object.

The bound of the GeoNorthArrow object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the style of the north arrow. For more information, please refer to the NorthArrowStyleType class.

The default value is EightDirection.

Gets or sets the ID of the GeoMap object which is corresponding to the GeoNorthArrow object.

The default value is -1.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the GeoNorthArrow object. The pivot point is the center of the GeoNorthArrow object. Unit: Degrees.The rotation angle of the GeoNorthArrow object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoNorthArrow object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the width of the GeoNorthArrow object. Unit: 0.1 millimeter.

The default value is 1.

Gets the height of the GeoNorthArrow object. Unit: 0.1 millimeter.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the full path of the picture used by the GeoNorthArrow object whose style is the ImageFile.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the style used by the GeoNorthArrow object whose style is the ImageFile.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoParticle class. This class is primarily used to construct GeoParticle objects, get or set resource file paths for GeoParticle objects, and set partial effect types and ParticleSystem objects held by the GeoParticle objects.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Constructs a new GeoParticle object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoParticle object.

The specified GeoParticle object.

Creates a new GeoParticle object according to the specified arguments.

The path of the specified particle resource file.The specified Geometry object associated with the GeoParticle object.

Creates a new GeoParticle object according to the specified arguments.

The specified particle effect type.The specified Geometry object associated with the GeoParticle object.

Returns a copy of the GeoParticle instance.

A copy of the current instance.

Sets the Geometry object associated with the GeoParticle object. After using the default constructor, call this method to specify the Geometry object.

The specified Geometry object associated with the GeoParticle object. This Geometry object is used to specify the position of the GeoParticle object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the particle effect type.

Gets or sets the path of the particle effect resource file. Default parameters are provided for all particle effect types and the parameters are saved as par files. For more details, please refer to the ParticleType class.

Gets the ParticleSystems object of the GeoParticle object.

Whether GeoParticle object is available.

Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoPicture class which is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoPicture object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoPicture object.

The given GeoPicture object.

Creates a new GeoPicture object according to the specified arguments.

The specified object of the Image class.The specified center.The specified width before rotating.The specified height before rotating.The specified rotation angle. The shape of the GeoPicture object is rectangle, so the pivot point of this GeoPicture object is the center point of the rectangle.

Creates a new GeoPicture object according to the specified arguments.

The specified object of the Image class.The specified bounds.The specified rotation angle. The shape of the GeoPicture object is rectangle, so the pivot point of this GeoPicture object is the center point of the rectangle.

Creates a new GeoPicture object according to the specified arguments.

The full path of the image file.The specified center.The specified width before rotating.The specified height before rotating.The specified rotation angle. The shape of the GeoPicture object is rectangle, so the pivot point of this GeoPicture object is the center point of the rectangle.

Creates a new GeoPicture object according to the specified arguments.

The full path of the image file.The specified bounds.The specified rotation angle. The shape of the GeoPicture object is rectangle, so the pivot point of this GeoPicture object is the center point of the rectangle.

The picture used by the GeoPicture object.

Sets the picture used by the GeoPicture object.

The specified Bitmap object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the GeoPicture object. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The shape of the GeoPicture object is rectangle, so the pivot point of this GeoPicture object is the center point of the rectangle.The rotation angle of the GeoPicture object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoPicture object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the width of the GeoPicture object.

The default value is 1.

Gets the height of the GeoPicture object.

The default value is 1.

Gets the center of the GeoPicture object.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoPicture3D class inherited from the Geometry3D class.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Constructs a new GeoPicture3D object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoPicture3D object.

The specified GeoPicture3D object.

Creates a new GeoPicture3D object according to the specified arguments.

The path of the picture used by the GeoPicture3D object.The specified position of the GeoPicture3D object.The specified width of the GeoPicture3D object before rotating. The unit is meters.The specified height of the GeoPicture3D object before rotating. The unit is meters.The specified rotation angle of the GeoPicture3D object encircling Z-axis. The unit is degrees.

It is not supported in this class.

This class does not support the method.

Set bitmap. The function is used for the analysis of video.

The specified Bitmap object.

Gets or sets the width of the GeoPicture3D object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoPicture3D object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the full path of the picture used by the GeoPicture3D object.

The default value is String .Empty.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoPie class. A pie is the portion cut by two lines from the center of the ellipse. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoPie object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoPie object.

The specified GeoRegion object.

Creates a new GeoPie object according to the specified arguments.

The center of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.The length of the semi-major axis of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.The length of the semi-minor axis of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.The sweep angle measured from the start angle ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends.The rotation angle of the GeoPie object. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.The start angle of ellipse arc which the GeoPie object belongs to.

Converts the GeoPie object to the GeoLine object.

The count of elliptical arc which the partition of the GeoPie produces.Returns a GeoLine.

Converts the GeoPie object to the GeoRegion object.

The count of elliptical arc which the partition of the GeoPie produces.Returns a GeoRegion.

Refactor this pie geometric object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the length of the semi-major axis of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the length of the semi-minor axis of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the start angle of the elliptical arc which the GeoPie object corresponds to. It is accurate to 0.1 degree.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the sweep angle in degrees of the elliptical arc which the GeoPie object corresponds to. The sweep angle (measured from the start angle) ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends. Positive angle indicates the sweep direction is anticlockwise, negative is clockwise.

The default value is 180.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the GeoPie object. The pivot point is the center of the ellipse which the GeoPie object belongs to.The rotation angle of the GeoPie object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoPie object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoPie object.

The default value is 5.1413434449768.

Gets the area of the GeoPie object.

The default value is 1.5702979451521 .

The GeoPie3D class. This class is derived from the Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoPie3D object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoPie3D object.

The specified GeoPicture3D object.

Creates a new GeoPie3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified position of the GeoPie3D object.The length of the semimajor of the ellipse where the GeoPie3D object is. The unit is meters.The length of the semiminor axis of the ellipse where the GeoPie3D object is. The unit is meters.The specified start angle of the GeoPie3D object. The unit is degrees.The sweep angle of the elliptical arc corresponding to the GeoPie3D object. The unit is meters.

Refactor this geometric object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The XML string.True if successful; otherwise, false.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the length of the semimajor of the ellipse where the GeoPie3D object is. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the length of the semiminor axis of the ellipse where the GeoPie3D object is. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the start angle of the GeoPie3D object. Unit: Degrees. It is accurate to 0.1 degree.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the sweep angle in degrees of the elliptical arc which the GeoPie3D object corresponds to. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The sweep angle (measured from the start angle) ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends. Positive angle indicates the sweep direction is anticlockwise, negative is clockwise.

The default value is 180, in degrees.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoPieCylinder class inherited from the Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoPieCylinder object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoPieCylinder object.

The given GeoPieCylinder object.

Creates a new GeoPieCylinder object according to the specified arguments.

The coordinates of the GeoPieCylinder object.The length of the semimajor axis of the bottom sector whose shape is ellipse. The unit is meters.The length of the semiminor axis of the bottom sector whose shape is ellipse. The unit is meters.The start angle of the bottom sector. The unit is degrees.The angle of the bottom sector of the GeoPieCylinder object. The unit is degrees.Gets or sets the height of the GeoPieCylinder object, in meters.

Refactor this pie object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the length of the semimajor of the bottom side whose shape is ellipse.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the length of the semiminor axis of the bottom side whose shape is ellipse.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the start angle of the bottom sector of the GeoPieCylinder object. It is accurate to 0.1 degree.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the sweep angle in degrees of the elliptical arc which the bottom sector of the GeoPieCylinder object corresponds to. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The sweep angle (measured from the start angle) ranging from -360 degrees to 360 degrees defining where the elliptical arc ends. Positive angle indicates the sweep direction is anticlockwise, negative is clockwise.

The default value is 180, in degrees.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoPieCylinder object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 1.0. The unit is meters.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoPlacemark class. This class is the subclass of the Geometry3D class. This class can place the specified Geometry object and the corresponding name with the given style at its position.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Constructs a new GeoPlacemark object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoPlacemark object.

The given GeoPlacemark object.

Creates a new GeoPlacemark object according to the specified arguments.

The specified name of the GeoPlacemark object.The specified Geometry object which is corresponding to the GeoPlacemark object.

It is not supported in this class.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the name of the GeoPlacemark object. The name will display at the specified position in the 3D map window.

The default value is UntitledPlacemark.

Gets or sets the Geometry object which is corresponding to the GeoPlacemark object. The Geometry object can be display as the Feature3D object in the 3D map window and determine the position where the name of the GeoPlacemark object display.

The default value is null.

Gets or sets the text style of the name of the GeoPlacemark object when displaying in the 3D map window.

The default value is {Alignment=TopLeft,BackColor=Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0],BackOpaque=false,Bold=false,FontHeight=6,FontWidth=0,ForeColor=Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255],IsSizeFixed=false,Italic=false,Outline=false,Rotation=0,Shadow=false,Strikeout=false,Underline=false,Weight=0}.

It is not supported in this class.

This class is derived from the Geometry class.This class is used to describe geographical entities with the shape of point, for example, the weather stations, bus stops etc.

Initializes a new GeoPoint object according to the given arguments.

The specified GeoPoint object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoPoint object.

The specified GeoPoint object.

Initializes a new GeoPoint object according to the given arguments.

Specifies the x-coordinate of the GeoPoint.Specifies the y-coordinate of the GeoPoint.

Constructs a new GeoPoint object. If IsEmpty is true, the x-coordinate and the y-coordinate values of this GeoPoint object are the minimum value of the Double data type.

Clears the spatial data of current GeoPoint, namely the x-coordinate and the y-coordinate values of this GeoPoint are set to the minimum value of the Double data type.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object.

Gets a value that indicates whether both the x-coordinate and the y-coordinate of this GeoPoint object are the minimum of the coordinate range.

The default is true.

Gets or sets the y-coordinate of this GeoPoint object.

Gets or sets the x-coordinate of this GeoPoint object.

The GeoPoint3D class. This class inherits from the Geometry3D class. Both the Point3D and GeoPoint3D class can be used to represent the three-dimension point, but there are differences. The GeoPoint3D objects are geographical entities, but a Point3D object is just a location point; GeoPoint3D objects can apply various styles, and the GeoPoint3D objects with different styles represent different geographical features, while Point3D is widely used to position and determine specific points with x-, y- and z-coordinate.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Constructs a new GeoPoint3D object.

Creates a new GeoPoint3D object according to the specified arguments.

The X coordinate. The coordinate units are longitude and latitude in degrees.The Y coordinate. The coordinate units are longitude and latitude in degrees.The Z coordinate, in meters.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoPoint3D object.

The specified GeoPoint3D object.

Creates a new GeoPoint3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified Point3D object.

It is not supported in this class.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the size of the GeoPoint3D object. The unit is degrees.

The default value is Double.MinValue, in degrees.

Gets or sets the size of the GeoPoint3D object. The unit is 0.1 longitude and latitude.

The default value is Double.MinValue, in degrees.

Gets or sets the Z-coordinate of this GeoPoint3D object. The unit is meters.

The default value is Double.MinValue, in meters.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoPrimeMeridian class. The object of this class is mainly used in geographical coordinate systemwhich is composed of prime meridian, reference system or datum and angle unit.

Constructs a new GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Creates a new GeoPrimeMeridian object according to the specified arguments.

The specified GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Creates a new GeoPrimeMeridian object according to the specified arguments.

The specified longitude value of prime meridian object. The unit is degrees.The specified name of the GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoPrimeMeridian object.

The specified GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Gets the xml format string that represents the GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Returns a XML string represents the GeoPrimeMeridian object.

Retrieves the GeoPrimeMeridian object with the specified XML format string.

The specified xml string.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Releases all resources used by the GeoPrimeMeridian .

Gets or sets the value of the central meridian. The units is degrees.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the name of the GeoPrimeMeridian object.

The default value is Greenwich .

Gets or sets the type of the central meridian.

The default value is Greenwich .

Defines unit types.

User-defined.

The Greenwich prime meridian, i.e. the 0° meridian.

9°07'54".862 W.

2°20'14".025 E.

74°04'51".3 W.

3°41'16".58 W.

12°27'08".4 E.

7°26'22".5 E.

106°48'27".79 E.

17°40'00" W.

4°22'04".71 E.

18°03'29".8 E.

23°42'58".815 E.

The GeoPyarmid class. This class is derived from the Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoPyramid object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoPyramid object.

The specified GeoPyramid object.

Creates a new GeoPyramid object according to the specified arguments.

The position of the GeoPyramid object.The size of the bottom side of the GeoPyramid object.Gets or sets the height of the underside of the GeoPyramid object.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the size of the bottom side of the GeoPyramid object.

The default value is Width=1,Height=1.

Gets or sets the height of the underside of the GeoPyramid object.

The default value is 1.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoRectangle class. This class is mainly used in the CAD layer, it is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoRectangle object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoRectangle object.

The given GeoPyramid object.

Creates a new GeoPyramid object according to the specified arguments.

The center point.The width of the GeoRectangle object before rotating.The height of the GeoRectangle object before rotating.The rotation angle of the GeoRectangle object. The pivot point is the center of the GeoRectangle object.

Creates a new GeoPyramid object according to the specified arguments.

A rectangle object.The rotation angle of the GeoRectangle object. The pivot point is the center of the GeoRectangle object.

Converts the GeoRectangle object to the GeoLine object.

Returns a GeoLine.

Converts the GeoRectangle object to the GeoRegion object.

Returns a GeoRegion.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center point of the GeoLegend object.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the width of the GeoRectangle object, that is the width before rotating.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoRectangle object, that is the height before rotating.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the GeoRectangle object. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The pivot point is the center of the GeoRectangle object.The rotation angle of the GeoRectangle object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoRectangle object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the area of the GeoRectangle object.

The default value is 1.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoRectangle object.

The default value is 4.

The GeoRegion class derived from the Geometry class.This class is used to depict the regional geographical entities, such as lake, administrative areas and residential lots, etc. , using one or more sets of points.

Creates a new GeoRegion object according to the specified arguments.

The ordered set of points used to create the GeoRegion.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoRegion object.

The specified GeoRegion object.

Constructs a new GeoRegion object.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object.

Returns the index number of the part of the GeoRegion , which is represented by the specified ordered set of points.

An ordered set of points.If the part dose not exist, returns -1.

Clears the spatial data of current GeoRegion, namely deletes all the parts of this GeoRegion.

Removes the part of this GeoRegion.with specified index number.

The index number of the part to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false. ,

Inserts a part of this GeoRegion with the specified index number.

The position to insert the part.The ordered set of points whose copy will form the part to be inserted.True, if succeeded; otherwise false. ,

Converts a GeoRegion object to a GeoLine object.

A GeoLine object, if succeeded.

Appends a part to this GeoRegion object.

The ordered set of points that form the part of the GeoRegion.If successful, this method will return the index number of the new added part, otherwise it will return -1. ,

Refactor this GeoRegion object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets GeoLine object symmetrical to the current GeoRegion object with respect to specific segment.

The start point of the specific segment.The end point of the specific segment.The color of the GeoRegion object.

Moves this GeoRegion by a specified amount.

The offset on X-coordinate.The offset on Y-coordinate.

Resizes the GeoRegion object to let the bounds equal the specified Rectangle2D.

The range of the object after resizing specified.

Rotate the GeoRegion object by specific degree with the specific base point, anticlockwise is the positive direction, in degree.

The base point specified.The rotated angle specified, in degrees.

Determine the trend of the subobjects of the GeoRegion object.

The specified index of the subobject specified.A boolean, the trend of the given subobject. True means anticlockwise and false means clokwise.

Protective decomposition. It is different from the simple decomposition, and the protective decomposition can decompose the complex region object with multi island hole nested relationship into the object with only one island hole nested relationship.

Region objects array after the protective decomposition.

Gets a value indicating whether the count of the parts of this GeoRegion is zero.

Gets or sets the part of the GeoRegion with the specified index number.

The index number of the part object.The part object with the specified index number.,

Returns the perimeter of the GeoRegion object. Its perimeter will be the sum of the perimeters of all parts.

The default value is 0.0 .

Returns the count of parts of the GeoRegion. The default value is zero.

The default value is 0 . ,

Returns the area of this GeoRegion. The default value is zero.

The default value is 0.0 .

The GeoRegion3D class. The GeoRegion3D object can have one or multiple parts, and each part is represented by an ordered set of 3D points. Note that the start point and endpoint in an ordered set of points that form a part is identical. You can add, delete, modify, etc. a part of the GeoRegion3D.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Constructs a new GeoRegion3D object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoRegion3D object.

The given GeoRegion3D object.

Creates a new GeoRegion3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified ordered set of Point3D objects.

The ordered set of Point3Ds that form the part of the GeoRegion3D.

The Point3Ds object that will form the part.If successful, this method will return the index number of the new added part, otherwise it will return -1.

Converts a GeoRegion3D object to a GeoLine3D object.

A GeoLine3D object, if succeeded.

Inserts a part of this GeoRegion3D with the specified index number.

The position to insert the part.The set of points for the part to be inserted.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Removes the part of this GeoRegion3D object with specified index number.

The index number of the part to be removed.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the index of the specified part of the GeoRegion3D.

The specified part of the GeoText3D.Returns the index of the specified TextPart3D object.

It is not supported in this class.

This class does not support the method.

Gets the area of this GeoRegion3D object. The unit is square meters.

The default value is 0. The unit is square meters.

Gets the count of parts of the GeoRegion3D object. The default value is zero. After being cleared, the part count of the GeoRegion3D object is 0.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoRegion3D object. Its perimeter will be the sum of the perimeters of all parts. The unit is meters.

The default value is 0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the group of point objects of the specified part of the GeoRegion3D object.

The index of the part.

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoRoundRectangle class. This class, mainly used in CAD layer, is the subclass of the Geometry class.

Constructs a new GeoRoundRectangle object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoRoundRectangle object.

The given GeoRoundRectangle object.

Initializes a new GeoRoundRectangle object according to the given arguments.

The center point.The width before rotating.The height before rotating.The length of the semi-major axis of the round corner.The length of the semi-minor axis of the round corner.The rotation angle. The pivot point is the center point of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

Initializes a new GeoRoundRectangle object according to the given arguments.

The specified Rectangle2D object.The length of the semi-major axis of the round corner.The length of the semi-minor axis of the round corner.The rotation angle. The pivot point is the center point of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

Initializes a new GeoRoundRectangle accoricdng to the given arguments. The Rotation property of the GeoRoundRectangle object is the Rotation property value of the geoRectangle object.

The specified GeoRectangle object.The length of the semi-major axis of the round corner.The length of the semi-minor axis of the round corner.

Converts the GeoRoundRectangle object to a GeoLine object.

The count of the segments in the round corner.Returns a GeoLine.

Converts the GeoRoundRectangle object to the GeoRegion object.

The count of the segments in the round corner.Returns a GeoRegion.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets or sets the center point of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the width of the GeoRoundRectangle object before rotating.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the height of the GeoRoundRectangle object before rotating.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets the length of the semi-major axis of the round corner of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

The default value is 0.25.

Gets or sets the length of the semi-minor axis of the round corner of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

The default value is 0.25.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the GeoRoundRectangle object. It is accurate to 0.1 degree. The pivot point is the center point of the GeoRoundRectangle object.The rotation angle of the GeoRoundRectangle object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the GeoRoundRectangle object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

The default value is 3.5707963267949.

Gets the area of the GeoRoundRectangle object.

The default value is 0.946349540849362.

Defines the spatial coordinate system types.

The planar coordinate system. When the coordinate is the planar coordinate system, the projection transformation is not allowed.

The geographic coordinate system, also called the latitude and longitude coordinate system. The geographic coordinate system is composed of Datum, Central Meridian and an angular unit of measure. In GIS, the unit can be degrees, minutes or seconds. The horizontal direction ranges from -180 to 180 and the vertical direction ranges from -90 to 90.

The projected coordinate system. The projected coordinate system is composed of map projection mode, projection parameters, coordinate unit and geographic coordinate system. SuperMap iObjects .NET provides many predefined projection systems which can be used by users directly. In addition, users can customize projection system through this object.

The GeoSphere class. This class inherits from Geometry3D class.Note: When adding the instance of GeoEllipsoid to a scene, it is needed to call the GetGeoModel() method to reconstruct by the GeoModel method. See the sample code of the GeoBox class.

Constructs a new GeoSphere object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoSphere object.

The given GeoSphere object.

Creates a new GeoSphere object according to the specified arguments.

The position of the sphere.The radius of the great circle of the hemisphere.

This class does not support the method.

Gets or sets the radius of a sphere.

The default value is 1.

Gets the center of the sphere.

The default value is X=0, Y=0, Z=1.

It is not supported in this class.

The earth spheroid parameter class. The object of this class, which is used to describe major radius and flattening of an ellipsoid.

Constructs a new GeoSpheroid object.

Initializes a GeoSpheroid object according to the given arguments.

The specified major radius of spheroid.The specified flattening of spheroid.The given name of spheroid.

Initializes a GeoSpheroid object according to the given arguments.

The specified type of spheroid.

Initializes a GeoSpheroid object identical to the given GeoSpheroid object.

The specified GeoSpheroid object.

Exports the object of this GeoSpheroid class to an XML string.

Returns a XML string represents the GeoSpheroid objects.

Retrieves the Geospheroid object with the introduced XML string.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Releases all resources used by the GeoSpheroid.

Gets or sets the major radius of the Earth ellipsoid.

The default value is 0.

Returns or sets the flattening of spheroid, which can be set when the type of GeoSpheroid is the user defined.

The default value is 0.

Returns or sets the name of the earth ellipsoid object, which can be set when the type of GeoSpheroid is the user defined.

The default value is User Define .

Returns or set the type of the earth ellipsoid.

The default value is UserDefined .

Defines GeoSpheroid types.

User Defined

Airy 1830

Airy modified

Average Terrestrial System 1977

Australian National

Bessel 1841

Bessel modified

Bessel Namibia

Clarke 1858

Clarke 1866

Clarke 1866 Michigan

Clarke 1880

Clarke 1880 (Arc)

Clarke 1880 (Benoit)

Clarke 1880 (IGN)

Clarke 1880 (RGS)

Clarke 1880 (SGA)

Everest 1830

Everest (definition 1967)

Everest (definition 1975)

Everest modified

GEM gravity potential model

GRS 1967 = International 1967

GRS 1980

Helmert 1906

Indonesian National

International 1924

International 1967

Krasovsky 1940

Transit precise ephemeris

OSU 1986 geoidal model

OSU 1991 geoidal model

Plessis 1817

Struve 1860

War Office

NWL_10D

WGS 1972

WGS 1984

WGS 1966

Fischer 1960

Fischer 1968

Fischer modified

Hough 1960

Everest modified 1969

Walbeck

Authalic sphere (ARC/INFO)

International 1975,Used By China Xian-1980

The spheroid of China latest standard projection: China 2000.

Authalic sphere (ARC/INFO)

The GeoStyle class.This class defines the symbol style, line style, fill pattern and their properties.

Initializes a new instance identical to the given GeoStyle object.

The specified GeoStyle object.

Constructs a new GeoStyle object.

Initializes a new instance of the GeoStyle object with the specified GeoStyle3D object.

Returns a String that represents the current GeoStyle object.

A string that indicates the current GeoStyle.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the GeoStyle is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the GeoStyle.

Gets the SymbolMarker object used by the objects which the GeoStyle object decorates. The default is null.

Gets the SymbolLine object used by the objects which the GeoStyle object decorates. The default is null.

Gets the SymbolFill object used by the objects which the GeoStyle object decorates. The default is null.

Sets the SymbolMarker object used by the objects which the GeoStyle object decorates. The default is null.

The given SymbolMarker object.

Sets the SymbolLine object used by the objects which the GeoStyle object decorates. The default is null.

The given SymbolLine object.

Sets the SymbolFill object used by the objects which the GeoStyle object decorates. The default is null.

The given SymbolFill object.

Exports the XML string representing the GeoStyle object.

The XML string representing the GeoStyle object.

Retrieves the GeoStyle object with the introduced XML string.

The specified XML string.Returns true, if successful; otherwise, false.

The ID of the marker symbol. It is used to uniquely identify the marker symbol.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the size of the marker symbol. The unit is millimeters and the accuracy is 0.1 millimeters.

The default value is Width=24,Height=24, that is, the size of the marker symbol is 2.4 mm.

Gets or sets he rotation angle of the marker symbol. The rotation direction is anticlockwise and the unit is degree.The rotation angle is accurate to 0.1 degrees.This angle can be used as fill symbol rotation in common fill style.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the width of the line symbol, and the unit is millimeter and accurate to 0.1 millimeter.

The default value is 1.0.

The ID of the line symbol. It is used to uniquely identify the line symbol.

The default value is 200.

The color of the line symbol or marker symbol.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0].

The ID of the fill symbol. It is used to uniquely identify the fill symbol.

The default value is 200.

The fill opacity. The value ranges from 0 to 100, with 0 indicating fully transparent and 100 indicating fully opaque. Values less than 0 and greater than 100 will be taken as 0 and 100 respectively.

The default value is 100, indicating fully opaque.

Gets or sets the type of the gradient fill style.For information of various gradient fill types, please refer to the FillGradientMode enumeration.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the percentage of vertical offset of the center of the gradient fill relative to the center of the boundary rectangle of the filled shape.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the percentage of horizontal offset of the center of the gradient fill relative to the center of the boundary rectangle of the filled shape.

The default value is 200.

The rotation of gradient fill, in o.1 degrees. The counterclockwise direction is positive.About the definition of all gradient fill modes, please refer to the FillGradientMode enumeration.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the foreground color of the fill symbol.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=189, G=235, B=255].

Determines whether the background of the fill symbol is opaque.

The default is false, which represents transparent.True, if the background of the fill symbol is opaque; otherwise, false.

The background color of the fill symbol.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255].

Gets or sets whether to display region objects which cross Longitude 180. Display them if it is true; otherwise, false.

The GeoStyle3D class. This class is used to set the display style of the Geometry3D object.

Constructs a new GeoStyle3D object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given GeoStyle3D object.

The given GeoStyle3D object.

Constructs a new GeoStyle3D object in accordance with the given GeoStyle object.

The specified GeoStyle object.

Clones the GeoStyle3D object in the current scene.

Returns a GeoStyle3D object.

Returns the character string describing the GeoStyle3D object in the 3D scene.

Returns the character string describing the GeoStyle3D object.

Exports the XML string represents the GeoStyle3D object.

The XML string represents the GeoStyle3D object.

Retrieves the GeoStyle3D object with the introduced XML string.

The specified XML string.Returns true, if successful; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the altitude mode. For more information, please refer to the AltitudeMode class.

The default value is ClampToGround.

Gets or sets the bottom altitude of the GeoStyle3D object. The bottom elevation value is the vertical distance from the geometric object bottom to the datum in the 3D scene.

The default value is 0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the extend height value of the GeoStyle3D in a scene. When 2D geometry objects are displayed in the 3D scene, this method can be used to extend the 2D geometry object, the value set in this method is the extending height.In the height mode (ClampToGround) of the surface, setting the extend height of the geometric objects in a 3D scene has no effect.

The default value is 0. The unit is meters.

Gets or sets the ID of the point geometry object in scene.

The default value is 0.

Sets the full path of the 3D point geometry object icon. The icon can be used to symbolize 3D point geometric objects in the 3D scene. Image in bmp, png, jpg, jpeg, gif formats and model files in 3ds and sgm formats are supported.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the icon scale radio of the 3D point geometry object. This property is available only for setting the style of point geometry point in a scene as a icon file.

The default value is 1, that is the icon file is 32*32 pixels.

Gets or sets the color of the marker symbol of the marker geometric object in the 3D scene.The point geometric object in the 3D scene can be set to 2D vector point symbol, 2D raster point symbol and 3D model symbol. For the 3D model symbol, setting this property takes no effect.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255].

Gets or sets the marker symbol size of the marker geometric object in the 3D scene.

Gets or sets the zoom scale of the 3D model relative to X Axis.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets the zoom scale of the 3D model relative to Y Axis.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets the zoom scale of the 3D model relative to Z Axis.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the 3D model relative to X Axis.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the 3D model relative to Y Axis.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the 3D model relative to Z Axis.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets whether the point geometric object in the 3D scene uses the 3D model symbol.

The default value is false, indicating 3D model symbols not applied.

Gets or sets the bill board mode of marker objects in 3D scene, this property is only available for the marker geometry objects set with icons and model files, and takes no effect when using point symbols. See the MarkerBillboardMode class.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets whether the 3D model symbols fix the physical size.

Gets or sets the anchor point of the marker. The position of anchor depends on the images used by the anchor. If the anchor point is on the lower left corner, it is (0, 0). If on the top right corner, it is (1, 1), anyway, it is between 0 and 1.

Gets or sets the ID of the line geometry object in scene.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the outline line symbol color of the line or region geometric objects in the 3D scene.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255].

Gets or sets the width of the line symbol of GeoLine object or the outline of GeoRegion object. For GeoLine symbol, the unit is pixel; for GeoLine3D object, the unit is meter.

The default value is 1.0. For the 2D line symbol, the unit is pixel; For the 3D line symbol, the unit is meter.

Gets or sets the number of sides while defining the symbols.

The default value is 32.

Gets or sets whether to process the inflection point of the pipeline with the chamfer mode. Used on the line with sections.

The default value is true.

Gets or sets the full path of a series of image files used for side texture rendering. When setting extend height for line or region geometry objects in 3D scene, a stretched region or side face will be formed, the image indicated by this property can be used for the rendering of the texture on the side face.This property is supported only when the height mode of the line, region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as non surface.Since you can set several images. For example: If there are 9 stretched regions and set 9 side maps, each region has a map; If there 8 side maps, the first 7 regions use a map respectively and the last 2 regions use the map in common. Sets the 7 side maps. The first 6 stretched regions use a map respectively and the last 3 regions use the same map in common, and so forth.

The default value is System.String[].

Gets or sets side face texture horizontal repeating variable.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets side face texture vertical repeating variable.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets the path of the texture file of the top of the three-dimensional object. The top of the three-dimensional object can be decorated by the pictures specified by this property.This property is supported only when the height mode of the region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as non surface.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets top surface texture vertical repeating variable.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets top surface texture horizontal repeatting variable.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or sets the filling mode of the Geometry3D object. For more information about the filling mode, please refer to the FillMode3D class.

The default value is LineAndFill.

Gets or sets the ID of the region geometry object in scene.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the fill symbol foreground color of the region symbol in the 3D scene.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255].

Gets or sets the fill symbol background color of the region symbol in the 3D scene.This property is supported only when the height mode of the region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as ClampToGround.

The default value is Color [A=255, R=255, G=255, B=255].

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the marker symbol. The rotation direction is anticlockwise and the unit is degree.The rotation angle is accurate to 0.1 degree.This property is supported only when the height mode of the region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as ClampToGround.This property is valid for radial gradient fill type, conical gradient fill type, square gradient fill type and linear fill gradient type.About the definition of all gradient fill modes, please refer to the FillGradientMode enumeration.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the type of the gradient fill style.This property is supported only when the height mode of the region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as ClampToGround.For information of various gradient fill types, please refer to the FillGradientMode enumeration.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the percentage of vertical offset of the center of the gradient fill relative to the center of the boundary rectangle of the filled shape.This property is supported only when the height mode of the region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as ClampToGround.This property is valid for radial gradient fill type, conical gradient fill type, square gradient fill type and linear fill gradient type.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the percentage of horizontal offset of the center of the gradient fill relative to the center of the boundary rectangle of the filled shape.This property is supported only when the height mode of the region geometry object in a 3D scene is set as ClampToGround.This property is valid for radial gradient fill type, conical gradient fill type, square gradient fill type and linear fill gradient type.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the repeating mode of the top texture.

Gets or sets the repeating mode of the side surface texture.

The GeoText class derived from the Geometry class.This class is mainly used to label the geographical features and make necessary descriptions for them.

A GeoText object is composed of one or multiple parts, with each part corresponding to a TextPart instance.All the parts of a GeoText object apply the same style, namely they are all displayed with the text style of this GeoText.

Creates a new GeoText object according to the specified arguments.

A TextPart object to be added to this GeoText.The TextStyle object. ,

Creates a new GeoText object according to the specified arguments.

The TextPart object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoText object.

The specified GeoText object.

Constructs a new GeoText object.

Creates text along the line.Places the text evenly along the line from the start.The rotation angle of each word is related to the position where it lies along the line.

A String object representing the text object.The GeoLine object.The text along the line.

Creates text along the line.The specified text is placed along the specified GeoLine, and starts from the starting point of the line. Words in this text are placed evenly along the line.

A String object representing the text object.The GeoLine object.The fixed angle of text part.The text along the line.

Clears the spatial data of current GeoRegion, namely deletes all the part of this GeoText.

Removes the parts of GeoText with the specified index.

The index of the part.If successful, returns true; Otherwise, returns false.,

Inserts a TextPart object in the GeoText object at the specified index.

The index where the TextPart is to be inserted,specially, the index value is greater than zero and is less than the number of the parts of the GeoText objects.The specified TextPart3D object to be inserted.If successful returns true; Otherwise, returns false.,

Adds a TextPart to the GeoText object.

A TextPart object to be added to this GeoText.If the TextPart is added successfully, returns an index of the textpart; Otherwise, returns -1.,

Returns the index number of the part of the GeoText , which is represented by the specified TextPart.

The specified TextPart object.The index number of the specified part of the GeoText. If the part of the GeoText does not exist, returns -1.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object.

Refactor this GeoText object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the part of the GeoText with the specified index number.

The index number of the TextPart object.The TextPart object with the specified index number.,

Gets a value indicating whether the count of the part of this GeoText is zero.

Gets or sets the text style of the GeoText object.This property is used to set the style of the GeoText such as font, width, height and color etc.

Returns the count of parts contained in the GeoText object.

The default value is 0. ,

Returns the content of the GeoText object.

The default value is String.Empty .

It is not supported in this class.

The GeoText3D class. This class provides the editing information of the GeoText3D object. You can edit the GeoText3D object or its part, TextPart3D object, by setting the GeoText3D object.Note: It is invalid for this class to call the GetGeoModel() method, the return value will be null.

Creates a new GeoText3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified part of the GeoText3D object.The specified style of the text.

Creates a new GeoText3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified part of the GeoText3D.

Constructs a new GeoText3D object.

Initializes a new instance identical to the given GeoText3D object.

The specified GeoText3D.

Adds a part to the GeoText3D object.

The TextPart3D object to be added.Returns the index of the newly added TextPart3D object if successful; otherwise -1.

Inserts a part to the specified position in the GeoText3D object.

The position to insert the TextPart3D, that is, the index of the inserted object.The specified TextPart3D object to be inserted.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the part of the GeoText3D object with the specified index.

The index of the specified part.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the index of the specified part of the GeoText3D.

The specified part of the GeoText3D.Returns the index of the specified TextPart3D object.

Refactor this geometric object according to the XML string following GML 3.0.

The XML string.True if successful; otherwise, false.

It is not supported in this class.

This class does not support the method.

Gets the text of the GeoText3D object. If the GeoText3D has multiple parts, its value will be the sum of the strings of all the parts.

Gets the count of the parts contained in the GeoText3D object.

Gets or sets the style of the text in the GeoText3D object. This text style of the GeoText object is used to set the style of the GeoText object such as transparency, font scale , fixed size, height and color ,the font style is not supported.

Gets or sets the part at a specified index.

The index of the specified part.

It is not supported in this class.

The JoinItem class is used to define the join information between the vector dataset and the exterior table. The exterior table can be the DBMS table of another vector dataset (including the tabular dataset, which has no geometry field) or the table in a database defined by the user. Note that the vector dataset and the exterior table should exist in the same datasource.

Constructs a new JoinItem object.

Outputs this JoinItem object to a readable string, the format is Name="",ForeignTable="",JoinFilter="",JoinType=

A string that represents the JoinItem object.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the JoinItem is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the JoinItem.

Gets or sets the name of this JoinItem object.

The default value is UntitledJoinItem.

Gets or sets the join type of the two tables. Join type is used when performing query on the two joined tables, and will determine which records among the records that meet the query condition will be returned.

The default value is LeftJoin.

Gets or sets the joint expression between the vector dataset and the foreign table, i.e., sets the related fields between the two tables.For example, connect the district field of the Building dataset to the region field of the pure Owner attribute dataset. The names of the two tables in the two datasets are Table_Building and Table_Owner, and the joint expression is Table_Building.district = Table_Owner.region.Use AND to connect if there are multiple fields.

The default value is String .Empty.

Gets or sets the name of the exterior table.

The default value is String .Empty.

The JoinItems class. The JoinItems class is used to manage all the JoinItem objects, each of them define the join information of the same vector dataset with a exterior table, that is to say, when a vector dataset join with multiple exterior tables, a JoinItems object will be used to manage all the JoinItem object of this vector dataset.The instance of this class can be created.

Constructs a new object identical to the given JoinItems object.

The specified JoinItems object.

Creates a new JoinItems object according to the specified arguments.

The specified multiple JoinItem objects.

Constructs a new JoinItems object.

Gets the enumerator of the JoinItems.

An enumerator of the JoinItems.

Converts this JoinItems object to an array of the JoinItem objects.

The array of the JoinItem objects.

Clears all the JoinItem objects in this JoinItems object.

Removes the specified count of JoinItem objects starting from the specified the index.

The index from which to remove the Point3D objects.The count of the JoinItem objects to be removed.The count of deleted JoinItem objects.

Removes the JoinItem object with the specified index from this JoinItems object.

The index of the JoinItem object to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple JoinItem object to this JoinItems object starting from the specified index.

The specified index from which to add the Point2D objects.The JoinItem object array to be added.The count of added JoinItem object.

Adds the specified JoinItem object to the specified index in this JoinItems object.

The index to which the JoinItem object will be added.The JoinItem object to be added.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple JoinItem objects to the end of this JoinItems object.

The JoinItem object array to be added to this JoinItems object.The count of added JoinItem objects.

Adds the specified JoinItem object to the end of this JoinItems object.

The JoinItem object to be added to this JoinItems object.The index of the added JoinItem object.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance.

The new object generated from the clone operation.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the JoinItems is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the JoinItems.

Gets or sets the JoinItem object at the specified index in this JoinItems object.

The specified index. A JoinItems object with the specified index.

Returns the count of JoinItem objects in this JoinItems object.

The default value is 200.

Defines the constants that specify the join type of the two tables.This class is used when performing query on the two joined tables, and will determine which records will be returned in the query result.

Left join. When the two tables are joined with left join type, all the records that meet query condition in the left table, that is the main table , will be returned, and if there is no relevant record in the right table (the exterior table), the corresponding filed values will be empty.

Inner join. When the two tables are joined with inner joint type, only the records exist in both tables will be returned as the result, besides meeting the query condition. The UDB engine is not supported the Inner join.

Provides data for the Layouts.Added event.

Initializes a new instance of the LayoutAddedEventArgs class with specified name of layout.

The specified name of layout.

Returns a string describing the object instance, in the format of {LayoutName=''}.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the name of layout.

Represents the method that handles a Layouts.Added event.

The source of the event.A LayoutAddedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Layouts.Removed event.

Initializes a new instance of the LayoutRemovedEventArgs class with the specified name of layout.

The specified name of layout.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the name of layout.

Represents the method that handles the Layouts.Removed event.

The source of the event.A LayoutRemovedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Layouts.Removing event.

Initializes a new instance of LayoutRemovingEventArgs class with specified parameters.

The name of layout.A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets the name of layout.

Represents the method that handles a Layouts.Removing event.

The source of the event.A LayoutRemovingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Layouts.Renamed event.

Initializes a new instance of the LayoutRenamedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The name of layout to be renamed.The new name of layout.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the new name of layout.

Gets the old name of layout.

Represents the method that handles a Layouts.Renamed event.

The source of the event.A LayoutRenamedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Layouts.Renaming event.

Initializes a new instance of LayoutRenamingEvent according to the specified parameters.

The name of layout to be renamed.The new name of layout.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the new name of the layout.

Gets the old name of the layout.

Represents the method that handles a Layouts.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A LayoutRenamingEventArgs that contains the event data.

The Layouts class.

Adds the layout inputted by user to the Layout collection. The position of the new item is at the end of the collection.

The name of the layout.The xml string used to create the layout.Returns the index of the name newly added in the Layouts object.

Adds the layout inputted by user to the layout collection. The position of the new item is at the specified index of the collection.

The specified index.The name of the layout.The xml string used to create the layout.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Modifies the content of the layout with the specified index, without modification on the name of the layout.

The specified index.The xml string used to create the layout.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Modifies the content of the layout with the specified name.

The specified name.The xml string used to create the layout.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the content of the layout with the specified index.

The specified index.Returns the content of the layout with the specified index.

Returns the content of the layout with the specified name.

The specified name of the layout.Returns the content of the layout with the specified name.

Deletes the saved layout in the workspace by the specified index.

The specified index of the layout.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Deletes the saved layout in the workspace by the specified name.

The specified name of the layout.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Clears all the saved layouts in the workspace. This method will not change the datasource and dataset.

Gets the index of the specified layout with the specified name.

The name of the specified layout.Gets the index of the specified layout with the specified name.

Returns a name of the layout with the specified name which is not used in the Layout collection.

The specified name of the layout.The layout name.

Renames the layout. That is, replace the old name with the new name.

The old name of the layout.The new name.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Returns an enumerator that can iterate through the collection.

An IEnumerator object used to iterate through a collection.

Gets the count of the Layout object in the specified Layout collection.

Gets the name of layout at a specified index in layout collection.

The index of the specified layout.

Triggers the event while renaming the layout.

Triggers this event while the rename operation finished.

Triggers the event while deleting the layout.

Triggers this event while the delete operation finished.

Triggers the event while adding the layout.

Triggers the event while clearing the layout.

Triggers this event while the clear operation finished.

Provides data for the Layouts.Cleared event.

Initializes a new instance of the LayoutClearedEventArgs class with specified count of layouts cleared.

The count of layouts cleared.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the count of layouts cleared.

Represents the method that handles a Layouts.Cleared event.

The source of the event.A LayoutClearedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Layouts.Clearing event.

Initializes a new instance of the LayoutClearingEventArgs class with specified parameter.

A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles a Layouts.Clearing event.

The source of the event.A LayoutClearingEventArgs that contains the event data.

License information class. It's used to get the license related information such as whether the license is connected, whether the license is valid, the model information of the license.

Constructs a new License object.

Checking the License with the specified type of the product. Returns 0 if successful; otherwise nonzero value, which indicates the error type.

The type of the product.Returns 0 if successful; otherwise nonzero value, which indicates the error type.

Verifies if the license is available. Returns 0 if available; otherwise nonzero value.

Returns 0 if available; otherwise nonzero value.

Disconnects the link with the license.

Returns the detailed information that the error code indicates.

The error code.Returns the detailed information that the error code indicates.

Releases the resource possessed by License.

Returns the license model information.

Connects the license model with specific model ID.

ID of specific license model.Returns 0 if successful; otherwise nonzero value, which indicates the error type.

Get the name of the user who is using the license.

The default value is String.Empty .

Get the name of the company which is using the license.

The default value is String.Empty .

Triggers the event if the license validation failed.

Gets or sets license connection way.

The default is LicenseConnectMode.Default, that is, to connect the license by default way.

Gets or sets the license server. Invalid when the license connection way is LocalOnly or RemoteOnly.

The default is a null string.

Gets the path of the file license.

Gets or sets the retry times when it fails to connect. The default is 1 to keep the connecting efficiency.

Gets or sets the file location to be searched, which can be a file or a directory.

Provides data for the License.VerifyFailed event.

Initializes a new instance of the LicenseVerifyFailedEventArgs class with specified errorCode and ErrorMessage.

The specified error code.The specified error message.

Gets the code of the license validation failure.

Gets the message of the license validation failure.

The method that handles the License.VerifyFailed event.

The source of the event.A LicenseVerifyFailedEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Defines cap types.

Round.

Square.

Flat.

Defines the dash types.

Solid.

Short dash.

Dot dash.

The dash composed of units, each of which consist a short line and a dot line.

The dash composed of units, each of which consist a short line and two dot lines.

Defines constants for line join types.

The Round join. Generates a round arc between two lines.

The Bevel join. Generates a bevel between two lines.

The Miter join. Generates an acute or resection angle, depending on whether the connection length exceeds the limit.

The LinkItem class is used to link vector data and other datasets. The dataset to link can be the DBMS table of another vector dataset (it tabular dataset do not have spatial information), the user created table can be linked to SuperMap datasource. The vector dataset and linked dataset may in different datasources.

Constructs a new LinkItem object.

Exports the LinkItem object to a string, the format is {Name="",ForeignTable="",ConnectionInfo={},LinkFilter="",LinkFields="",PrimaryKeys={},ForeignKeys={}}.

A string that represents the LinkItem object.

Releases all the resources used by this object.

Gets or sets the external datasource to be linked.

The default value is {Alias="",EngineType=UDB,Server="",Database="",Driver="",User="",Password="",IsReadOnly=false,IsAutoConnect=true}.

Gets or sets the foreign key of the main spatial dataset .

The default value is String[].

Gets or sets the name of the linked dataset (it can be a tabular dataset).

The default value is String.Empty.

When two datasets are linked with primary key and foreign key, gets or sets the fields of the linked dataset to query.

The default value is String[].

Gets or sets the filter of the linked dataset.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the name of linkItem object.

The default value is UntitledLinkItem.

Gets or sets the primary key of the dataset to link.

The default value is String[].

The LinkItems class. When a vector dataset link with multiple exterior tables, a LinkItems object will be used to manage all the LinkItem object of this vector dataset.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified LinkItems object.

The specified LinkItems object.

Creates a new LinkItems object according to the specified arguments.

The specified LinkItem object array.

Constructs a new LinkItems object.

Gets the enumerator of the LinkItems.

An enumerator of the LinkItems.

Converts this LinkItems object to an array of the LinkItem objects.

The array of the LinkItem objects.

Clears all the JoinItem objects in this LinkItems object.

Removes the specified count of LinkItem objects starting from the specified the index.

The index from which to remove the Point3D objects.The count of the LinkItem objects to be removed.The count of deleted LinkItem objects.

Removes the LinkItem object with the specified index from this LinkItems object.

The index of the LinkItem object to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple LinkItem objects to this LinkItems object starting from the specified index.

The specified index from which to add the LinkItem objects.The LinkItem object array to be added.The count of the LinkItem objects to add.

Adds the specified LinkItem object to the specified index in this LinkItems object.

The index which will be added.The LinkItem object to be added.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple LinkItem objects to the end of this LinkItems object.

The LinkItem object array to be added to this LinkItems object.The count of added LinkItem objects.

Adds the specified LinkItem object to the end of this LinkItems object.

The LinkItem object to be added to this LinkItems object.The index of the added LinkItem object.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance.

The new object generated from the clone operation.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the LinkItems is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the LinkItems.

Gets or sets the LinkItem object in the LinkItems object.

The index of the LinkItem.

Returns the count of LinkItem objects in this LinkItems object.

The default value is 200.

The LogFile class.This class is used to manage the log file, including defining the log level, the directory for storing the log file, the maximum storage of a log file and the time interval to create a log file.

Invokes this method to close the log file.

Opens a log file.

True if successful; otherwise, false.

The time interval to create a log file. There are five storage methods: one log file always; one log file per hour; one log file per day; one log file per week and one log file per month.

The default value is None.

The maximum storage of a log file. A new log file will be generated if the size of the file meets the maximum storage value. The unit is bytes. The default value is -1 which means the maximum storage value is infinite.

Gets or sets the directory for storing the log file. The default directory is the Log directory of the application. Names the log file according to "Log"+"_process id" if the time interval is None, otherwise name it "Log"+"_process id"+"_starting time" If the log file meets the maximum storage of the log file and separated into several files, then +"#1/2/3".

The default value is String .Empty.

The level of the log file.

Defines the types for log levels.

Invalid operations may cause errors.

The levels are designed for developers, including all information.

Defines the storage mode of log file according to the time interval. Where,the content of log file is generated from the ending of last time as the start time to ending of current time interval.SuperMap iObjects .NET provides five modes of storage log file.

A log file each month.

A log file each week.

A log file each day.

A log file each hour.

Not according to time period.

Provides data for the Maps.Added event.

Initializes a new instance of the MapAddedEventArgs class with specified name of map.

The specified name of map.

Gets the name of map.

Represents the method that handles the Maps.Added event.

The source of the event.A MapAddedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Maps.Cleared event.

Initializes a new instance of the MapClearedEventArgs class with specified count of maps cleared.

The count of maps cleared.

Gets the count of maps cleared.

Represents the method that handles a Maps.Cleared event.

The source of the event.A MapClearedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Maps.Clearing event.

Initializes a new instance of the MapClearingEventArgs class with specified parameter.

A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles a Maps.Clearing event.

The source of the event.A MapClearingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Maps.Removed event.

Initializes a new instance of the MapRemovedEventArgs class with the specified name of map.

The specified name of map.

Gets the name of map.

Represents the method that handles the Maps.Removed event.

The source of the event.A MapRemovedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Maps.Removing event.

Initializes a new instance of MapRemovingEventArgs class with specified parameters.

The name of map.A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets the name of map.

Represents the method that handles a Maps.Removing event.

The source of the event.A MapRemovingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Maps.Renamed event.

Initializes a new instance of the MapRenamingEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The old name of map, which to be renamed.The new name of map.

Gets the new name of map.

Gets the old name of map.

Represents the method that handles a Maps.Renamed event.

The source of the event.A MapRenamedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Maps.Renaming event.

Initializes a new instance of the MapRenamingEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The old name of map, which to be renamed.The new name of map.A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets the new name of the map.

Gets the old name of the map.

Represents the method that handles a Maps.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A MapRenamingEventArgs that contains the event data.

The Maps class.The Maps object of a Workspace stores all the maps in this workspace.A Maps object in a workspace manages all the maps in a workspace, including adding, deleting, modifying maps etc. in the workspace.

Gets the enumerator of the Maps.

The enumerators of the Maps.

Renames the map, that is, replaces the original name of the map with a new name.

The name of the map that needs to rename. It is not case-sensitive.The new name of the map and it is not case-sensitive.True if successful; otherwise, false. The operation is case-insensitive. maps.Rename("world""WORLD") will return false.

Gets a legal, unique name of the map that is not identical with the name of any map in this Maps object with the specified name of the map.

The specified name of the map and it is not case-sensitive.The name of a map in a Maps object or in a workspace should be unique, otherwise, it can't be added to the Maps.

Gets the index of the map with the specified name in this Maps object.

The specified name of the map and it is not case-sensitive.The index of the map with the specified name in this Maps object.

Clears all the maps in this Maps object, that is deletes all the maps in the workspace.

Deletes the map with the specified name in this Maps object. If successful, returns true; otherwise false.

The name of the map to be removed and it is not case-sensitive.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the map with the specified index in this Maps object. If successful, returns true; otherwise false.

The index of the map to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the XML string that represents the map with the specified name from workspace.

The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.True if successful; otherwise false.

Gets the XML string that represents the map with the specified index from workspace.

The specified index.True if successful; otherwise false.

Modifies the map content with the specified name with the map that represented by the specified XML string.

The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.The XML string that represents the new map.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Use the map with specific XML string to modify the content of the map with specific map. This method needs to specify the version of the workspace which contains the new map.

The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.The XML string that represents the new map.The version of the workspace specified.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Replaces the map with the specified index with the map that represented by the specified XML string.

The specified index.The XML string that represents the new map that will replace the map with the specified index.True if successful; otherwise false.

Use the map with specific XML string to replace the map in Maps with specific number. This method needs to specify the version of the workspace which contains the new map.

The specified index.The XML string that represents the new map that will replace the map with the specified index.The version of the workspace specified.True if successful; otherwise false.

In Maps, adds a map in the specified index of this Maps object, and the map is represented by the XML string.

The specified index.The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.The XML string that represents the map to be inserted.True, if the map is inserted successfully; otherwise, false.

Add a map at a specific number in Maps, the content of the map is determine by XML string. This method needs to specify the version of the workspace which contains the map.

The specified index.The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.The XML string that represents the map to be inserted.The version of the workspace specified.True, if the map is inserted successfully; otherwise, false.

Adds a map to this Maps object.

The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.The XML string that represents the map to be added.The index of the new added map in this Maps object.

Add map to this Maps object. The version of the workspace which contains the map is needed.

The specified name of map and it is not case-sensitive.The XML string that represents the map to be added.The version of the workspace (which contains the map to add) specified.The index of the new added map in this Maps object.

Returns the name of the specified map in this Maps object.

The index number of the specified map.

Returns the count of maps in this Maps object.

The default value is 200.

Triggers the event before renaming the map.

Triggers the event after renaming the map.

Triggers the event before deleting the map in the Maps object.

Triggers the event after deleting the map in the Maps object.

Triggers the event after adding the map to the Maps object.

Triggers the event before adding the map to the Maps object.

Triggers the event after clearing the maps in the Maps object.

Defines the billboard modes.

Makes the screen align with the billboard, the billboard is always parallel to the screen.

Aligns the billboard on a vertical axis, the Z axis is fixed, the billboard rotate around Z axis.

Fixes the angle of rotation. that is "clamp to ground" which is the only supported angle in this version."Clamp to ground" means the rotation angle is 0.

Material class. Used for 3d model.

Constructs a new Material object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given Material object.

The specified Material object.

Exports the Material object to a formatted string.

Returns the formatted string of the material object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the name of the material.

Gets or sets the path of the material texture file.

Gets or sets the diffuse parameters.

Gets or sets the Ambient arguments.

Gets or sets the Specular parameters.

Gets or sets the Emission parameters.

Gets or sets the Shininess.

The Mesh class.

Initializes a new instance of the Mesh class.

Constructs a new object identical to the given Mesh object.

The specified Mesh object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the material of the grid surface.

Gets or sets the Vertex arrays of the grid surface.

Gets or sets the arrays of texture coordinate of the grid surface.

Gets or sets the Vertex index arrays of the grid surface.

Gets or sets the color set of the grid surface.

Gets or sets the vector set of the grid surface.

Meshes set class.

Adds a Mesh object to the Meshes object. The index of the object added will be returned if added successfully.

Mesh object.Returns the index of the added object.

Adds the Mesh objects in array to the Meshes object. The number of objects added will be returned if added successfully.

The array of the Mesh objects.Returns the number of the Mesh objects successfully added.

Adds a Mesh object to the Meshes object at the specified index. True will be returned if successful.

The specified index.The object to be added.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the Mesh objects in array to the Meshes object at the specified index. True will be returned if successful.

The specified index.The array of Mesh objects.Returns the number of the Mesh objects successfully added.

Removes a Mesh object at a specified index in the Meshes object.

The specified index.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Removes the specified number of Mesh objects from he specified index.

The specified index.The number of Mesh objects to be removed.Returns the number of Mesh objects removed successfully.

Removes all the objects in the Meshes object.

Converts the Meshes object to the Mesh object array.

Returns the Mesh object array after conversion.

Gets the enumerator of the dataset set.

Returns the enumerator of the dataset set.

Gets the count of the Meshes object.

Gets or sets a Mesh object at a specified index in the Meshes object.

The specified index.Returns the Mesh object at a specified index in the Meshes object.

NetCDF variable info class. It stores the information of some variable in NetCDF. Can not be created. It can only be extracted from the datasource and dataset and modified.

Constructs a new NetCDFVarInfo object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given etCDFVarInfo object.

The specified NetCDFVarInfo object.

Gets the range of index of the specified dimension.

The specified name of dimension.Returns the range of index of the specified dimension.

Frees the resources of the current NetCDFVarInfo object before it is reclaimed by the garbage collector.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets the name of the current NetCDF variable object, which is the name of a varible in NetCDF file.

Gets the unit of the current NetCDF NetCDFVarInfo object, which is a unit of NetCDf variable.

Gets the arrays of the dimension names of the current NetCDF variable, return null if the variable does not exist.

Gets the detailed information of the current variable. return null if the variable does not exist.

Gets or sets the name of X dimension.

Gets or sets the start index of X dimension.

Gets or sets the end index of X dimension.

Gets or sets the name of Y dimension.

Gets or sets the start index of Y dimension.

Gets or sets the end index of Y dimension.

Gets or sets the name of the optional dimension.

Gets or sets the index of optional dimension.

Defines the north arrow types.

North arrow with shadow effects.

Filled north arrow with a circle outside.

North arrow with the right half filled.

North arrow with the inner part of the right half filled.

Four-direction north arrow.

Eight-direction north arrow.

Four-direction north arrow with a circle in the middle.

Eight-direction north arrow with a circle outside.

Double-direction north arrow with a circle in the middle.

North arrow filled with image.

The ParticleEmitter class.

Construct a new ParticleEmitter object.

Construct a new ParticleEmitter object according to the given ParticleEmitter object.

The given ParticleEmitter object.

Release resource.

Gets or sets the offset of the ParticleEmitter object to the center of the ParticleSystem. It is equivalent to the location of the ParticleEmitter in the local coordinate system.

The default value is Point3D(0,0,0), it is origin point of the local coordinate system.

Gets or sets the emitter name of the particle system. Default value is an empty string.

Gets or sets the direction for the ParticleEmitter to emit particles in the local coordinate system. It is equivalent to the vector starts from the location of the particle.

The default value is the Z-axis of the local coordinate system, that is Point3D(0,0,1).

Gets or sets the maximum offset angle of the emitting direction permitted. The unit is degree, and the range is 0 degree to 180 degree.Set the property as 0 degree when you need to emit particles to the same direction (a straight line). Set the property as 180 degree when you need to emit particles to all directions.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the minimum initial velocity. The unit is meters per second. The range of this property is 0 to 300.The initial velocity will distributing between the maximum velocity and the minimum velocity with equal probability randomly.

The default value is 10. The unit is meters per second.

Gets or sets the maximum initial velocity. The unit is meter per second. The range of this property is 0 to 300.The initial velocity will distributing between the maximum velocity and the minimum velocity with equal probability randomly.

The default value is 10. The unit is meters per second.

Gets or sets the start color of the color range of the particles.The colors of the particles emitted will distribute between the starting color and the ending color with equal probability randomly.

The default value is Color(0,0,0,255). That is opaque black.

Gets or sets the end color of the color range of the particles.The colors of the particles emitted will distribute between the starting color and the ending color with equal probability randomly.

The default value is Color(255,255,255,255). That is opaque white.

Gets or sets the emission rate of the particle emitter, and the unit is second. The range of the region emitter (rain and snow) is from 0 to 5000. The range of other point emitter is fron 0 to 2000.

The default value is 10. The unit is per second.

Gets or sets the minimum life time of the particles, in seconds, the value range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 5. The unit is second.

Gets or sets the maximum life time of the particles, in seconds, the value range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 5. The unit is second.

Gets or sets the minimum life time of the ParticleEmitter, in seconds, the value range is 0 to 20.The ParticleEmitter will always exist if use the default value.

The default value is 0. The unit is second.

Gets or sets the maximum life time of the ParticleEmitter, in seconds, the value range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 0. The unit is second.

Gets or sets the minimum time for restarting the ParticleEmitter, in seconds, the value range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 0. The unit is second.

Gets or sets the maximum time for restarting the ParticleEmitter, in seconds, the value range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 0. The unit is second.

Returns the type of particle emitter.

The ParticleInfluence class.

Release the local resource occupied by ParticleInfluence.

Gets or sets whether to start the force influence. The particles will be effected by the direction and intensity of the force.

Gets or sets the direction of the force that acting on the particles

The default value is Point3D(0,0,0).

Gets or sets the intensity of the force acting on the particles. The range is 0 to 10000.

The default value is 100.

Gets or sets the mode of the force acting on the particles.

The default value is ForceInfluenceMode.Add.

Gets or sets whether to start color gradient influence. The color gradient influence can change the color of a particle in its life cycle.

The default value is false, that is do not start the color gradient influence.

Gets or sets the adjustment value of the red component in the color gradient influence, the range is -1 to 1.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the adjustment value of the green component in the color gradient influence, the range is -1 to 1.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the adjustment value of the blue component in the color gradient influence, the range is -1 to 1.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the adjustment value of the transparency component in the color gradient influence, the range is -1 to 1.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets whether to start the rotator influence. It renders the texture used by the particles.

The default value is false, that is do not use rotator influence.

Gets or sets the minimum rotation angle of the rotator influence, the rotation angle of the particles will distribute randomly between the maximum value and the minimum value, the unit is degree, the range is 0 to 360.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the maximum rotation angle of the rotator influence, the rotation angle of the particles will distribute randomly between the maximum value and the minimum value, the unit is degree, the range is 0 to 360.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the minimum rotation speed of the rotator influence, the rotation speed of the particles will distribute randomly between the maximum value and the minimum value, the unit is degree per second, the range is -360 to 360.

The default value is 0. The unit is degrees per second.

Gets or sets the maximum rotation speed of the rotator influence, the rotation speed of the particles will distribute randomly between the maximum value and the minimum value, the unit is degree per second, the range is -360 to 360.

The default value is 0. The unit is degrees per second.

Gets or sets whether to use the deflector influence.

The default value is false, that is do not start the deflector influence.

Gets or sets the location of the deflector in the particle local coordinate system.

The default location of the deflector is the origin of the local coordinate system, that is Point3D(0,0,0).

Gets or sets the normal of the deflector in the local coordinate system. It is a vector with the location of the deflector as the original point, and this point as the end point, it is perpendicular to the deflector.

The default value is Point3D(0,1,0), that is the vector point at the positive direction of the y-axis.

Gets or sets the deflect rate of the deflector. Deflect Rate =The velocity of the particle after deflected/The velocity of the particle before deflect. The value range is 0 to 1. 0 means the particles will not be deflected, that is the speed of the particles will be 0 at the deflector. 1 means completely deflect, that is the direction of the particles will be changed at the deflector, but the speed will stay the same.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets whether to use the random force influence.

The default value is false, that is do not start the random force influence.

Gets or sets intensity of the random force, the range is 0 to 10000.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets proportion of particles influenced by the force, the range is 0 to 1.

The default value is 1.

Gets or sets whether to start the size change influence. The size change influence can change the size of all the particles in unit time (both x-axis and y-axis direction). It is based on the basis size of the particles.

The default value is false, that is do not start the size change influence.

Gets or sets the size change of the particles per second, the range is 0 to 20.

The default value is 0.

The ParticleSystem class. This class is used to get/set all parameters of the particle system object of a GeoParticle object. Please refer to GeoParticle.

Consturct a new ParticleSystem object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given ParticleSystem object.

the given ParticleSystem object.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance.

The new object generated from the clone operation.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Add a ParticleEmitter object to ParticleSystem.

The added ParticleEmitter object.The index of the added ParticleEmitter object.

Gets the ParticleEmitter object with the given index in the ParticleSystem.

The index of the ParticleEmitter object.The ParticleEmitter object with the given index.

Remove the ParticleEmitter object with the given index in the ParticleSystem.

Removes a stop object at the specified index of the stop collectionTrue, if successful; Otherwise false.

Remove all the ParticleEmitter objects in the ParticleSystem.

True, if successful; Otherwise false.

Gets or sets the relative position of the ParticleSystem objects. It is obsolete. Use OffsetToCenter to replace it.

The default is (0,0,0), that is, the position of the ParticleSystem object and the Geometry object associated with the GeoParticle object are identical.

Gets or sets the width of each particle in the particle system object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the height of each particle in the particle system object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 2.

Gets or sets the name of the particle system. Default value is an empty string.

Gets or sets the life cycle of each particle in the particle system object, i.e., the time length between the generation and disappearance of a particle. The unit is milliseconds.

Gets or sets the count of particles generated every second in the particle system object. It is obsolete. Use EmissionRate to replace it.

Gets or sets the start value of the particles in the particle system object. It is obsolete. Use ParticleEmitter.ColorRangeStart to replace it.

Gets or sets the end value of the particles in the particle system object. It is obsolete. Use ParticleEmitter.ColorRangeStart to replace it.

Gets or sets the path of the particle texture images in the particle system object.

Gets or sets the path of the image for setting graduated colors for the particles in the particle system object.

Gets or sets whether to sort the ParticleSystem.

The default value is false, do not sort the ParticleSystem.

Gets or sets the BillboardType of each particle.

Gets the count of ParticleEmitter objects in the ParticleSystem.

Gets the ParticleInfluence object in the ParticleSystem.

Gets or sets the upper limit value of the number of particles in the current ParticleSystem.

The default value is 10000.

The ParticleSystems class.

Add a new ParticleSystem object.

The ParticleSystem object to add.The index of the ParticleSystem object added in the ParticleSystems object.

Delete the given ParticleSystem object in the ParticleSystems object with the given index.

The index of the given ParticleSystem object.Returns true if removed successfully, otherwise returns false

Remove all the ParticleSystem objects in the ParticleSystems object.

Gets the count of enumerations in the ParticleSystems.

The count of enumerations in the ParticleSystems.

Return the number of ParticleSystem objects in the ParticleSystems object.

Returns the ParticleSystem object with the given index.

The specified index. Returns the ParticleSystem object with the given index.

Defines constants for particle effect types of GeoParticle objects.

The default effect, that is the particle effect in Bin\Resource\particle\default.par.

The fire effect.

The smoke effect.

The fountain effect.

The explosion effect.

The rain effect.

The snow effect.

The tail flame effect.

The fire smoke effect. This types presents the combination effect of fire and smoke.

Fireworks effect

Defines pen types.

Solid.

Dash.

Dot dash.

The pen type composed of units, units, each of which consist a short line and a dot line.

Defines constants for pixel format types for grid and image data storage.

Each pixel is represented by 8 bytes. It can specify the double floating number in the range of -1.79769313486232E+308 to 1.79769313486232E+308.

Each pixel is represented by 4 bytes. It can specify the single floating number in the range of -3.402823E+38 to 3.402823E+38.

Each pixel is represented by 8 bytes. It can specify 18446744073709551616 integer values in the range of -2⁶³ to 2⁶³-1.

Specifies that the format is 32 bits per pixel, that is, 4 bytes per pixel. For the grid dataset, the value of a pixel is an integer from -2³¹ -2 to 2³¹-1, including 4294967295 integral values; for the image dataset, 8 bits each are used for red, green, blue and alpha components, that is, the enhanced true color image data.

Each pixel is represented by 24 bits, or 3 bytes. Only available to the image dataset, red, green and blue with 8 bits to represent, corresponding to true color image data.

Each pixel is represented by 32 bits, or 4 bytes. Only available to the image dataset, red, green and blue with 8 bits to represent, corresponding to enhanced true color image data.

Specifies that the format is 16 bits per pixel, namely, 2 bytes per pixel. For the grid dataset, the value of a pixel in range from -32768 to 32767; for the image dataset, 5 bits each are used for red, green, and blue components, that is, the color image data. The remaining bit is not used.

Specifies that the format is 8 bits per pixel, namely, 1 byte per pixel. For the grid dataset, the value of a pixel is an integer ranging from 0 to 255; for the image dataset, it uses as the indexed color. The color table contains 256 shades of color, that is, the 256 colors image data.

Specifies that the format is 4 bits per pixel. For the grid dataset, the pixel value can be an integer from 0 to 15; for the image dataset, it uses as the indexed color. The color table contains 16 colors, that is, 16 colors image dataset.

Specifies that the format is 1 bit per pixel. For the grid dataset, the value of a pixel can be 0 or 1; for the image dataset, the color of a pixel can be black or white, that is, the monochrome image data.

Each pixel is represented by 4 bytes. It can specify 4294967296 integer values in the range of 0 to 4294967295.

Specifies that the format is 8 bits per pixel, namely, 1 byte per pixel. For the grid dataset, the value of a pixel is an integer ranging from -128 to 127; for the image dataset, it uses as the indexed color. The color table contains 128 shades of color, that is, the 128 colors image data.

Specifies that the format is 16 bits per pixel, namely, 2 bytes per pixel. For the grid dataset, the value of a pixel in range from 0 to 65535; for the image dataset, 5 bits each are used for red, green, and blue components, that is, the color image data. The remaining bit is not used.

Defines the animation.play modes.

Once. In this mode, the animation will be played only once.

Loop. In this mode, the animation will be played all the time.

Represents an ordered pair of double x- and y-coordinates that defines a point in a two-dimensional plane.

Gets an empty Point2D object, both Width and Height of which are the minimum value of the Double data type.

Creates a new Point2D object according to the specified arguments.

The x- coordinate of the Point2D. The y- coordinate of the Point2D.

Creates a readable character string of this Point2D, for instance, Point2D(2,3), and the result string format is "X=2.0,Y=3.0" .

A string that represents this Point2D.

Converts the specified Point2D to a new Point2D by rounding the Point2D values to the nearest integer values.For example, the given Point2D is (32.12, 20.67), the result point will be (32, 21).

The Point2D to be converted.A Point2D this method convert to.

Tests for inequality between two Point2D objects. The result determines whether the values of the X and Y properties of the two Point2D objects are not equal.

The Point2D on the left side of the operator to compare.The Point2D on the right side of the operator to compare.True, if the X and Y values of left and right are not equal; otherwise, false.

Tests for equality between two Point2D objects. The result determines whether the values of the X and Y properties of the two Point2D objects are equal.

A Point2D to compare.A Point2D to compare.True if the X and Y values of left and right are equal; otherwise, false.

Translates the Point2D by the specified amount.

The amount to offset the x-coordinate.The amount to offset the y-coordinate.

Returns a hash code for the Point2D.

An integer value that specifies a hash value for this Point2D.

Returns a new Point2D whose x and y coordinates are the largest integers that are less than or equal to the coordinates of the Point2D.For example, the given Point2D is (32.12, 20.67), the result point will be (32, 20).

The Point2D to be converted.A Point2D this method convert to.

Determines whether this Point2D object has the same coordinates as the specified Point2D.

The object to test.True if the coordinates of the two Point2D objects are equal; otherwise, false.

Determines whether this Point2D object has the same coordinates as the specified System.Object.

The object to test.True, if the coordinates values of the two Point2D are equal; otherwise, false.

Returns a new Point2D whose X and Y coordinates are the smallest integers that are not less than and equal to the corresponding coordinates of the specified Point2D.For example, the given Point2D is (32.12, 20.67), the result point will be (33, 21).

The Point2D to be converted.A Point2D this method converts to.

Gets or sets the y-coordinate of this Point2D.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the x-coordinate of this Point2D.

The default value is 200.

Gets a value that indicates whether both the x-coordinate and the y-coordinate of this Point2D object are the minimum of the coordinate range.

True, if the x-coordinate and the y-coordinate of this Point2D object are the minimum of the coordinate range; otherwise, false. The default is false.

The Point2Ds calss. A Point2Ds object is a collection of Point2D objects. The Point2Ds class is used to manage all the vertices on a GeoLine or a part of a GeoLine object. As any GeoLine object or any part of a GeoLine object has direction, so the Point2Ds object is a collection of ordered Point2D objects.

Constructs a new object identical to the given Point2Ds object.

The specified Point2Ds object.

Creates a new Point2Ds object according to the specified arguments.

The specified Point2D array.

Constructs a new Point2Ds object.

Gets the enumerator of the Point2Ds.

A enumerator of the Point2Ds.

Converts this Point2Ds object to an array of the Point2D objects.

The array of the Point2D objects.

Clears all the Point2D objects in this Point2Ds bject.

Removes the specified count of Point2D objects starting from the specified the index.

The index from which to remove the Point3D objects.The count of the Point2D objects to be removed.The count of deleted Point2D objects.

Removes the Point2D object with the specified index from this Point2Ds object.

The index of the Point2D object to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple Point2D object to this Point2Ds object starting from the specified index.

The specified index from which to add the Point2D objects.The Point2D object array to be added.The count of added Point2D object.

Adds the specified Point2D object to the specified index in this Point2Ds object.

The index to which the JoinItem object will be added.The point object to be added.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple Point2D objects to the end of this Point2Ds object.

The Point2D object array to be added to this Point2D object.The count of added Point2D objects.

Adds the specified Point2D object to the end of this Point2Ds object.

The Point2D object to be added to the Point2Ds object.The index of the added Point2D object.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance.

The new object generated from the clone operation.

Converts this Point2Ds object to Point3Ds object. The Z value of every 3D point will be zero.

The Point3Ds object.

Gets or sets the Point2D object at the specified index in this Point2Ds object.

The specified index of the Point2Ds object.

Returns the count of Point2D objects in this Point2Ds object.

The default value is 0.

Represents an ordered pair of double x coordinate, y-coordinate and z-coordinate that defines a point in a three-dimensional plane.

Gets an empty Point3D object, all of X, Y, Z coordiantes are the minimum value of the Double data type.

Creates a new Point3D object according to the specified arguments.

X coordinate value, in degrees.Y coordinate value, in degrees.Z coordinate value, in meters.

Returns a new Point3D whose coordinates are the smallest integers that are not less than and equal to the corresponding coordinates of the specified Point3D.

The Point3D to be converted.A Point3D this method convert to.

Specifies whether this Point3D contains the same coordinates as the specified Object.

The object to test.True if obj is a Point3D and has the same coordinates as this Point3D; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the specified pair of instances are considered equal.

The object to test.True if pt is a Point3D that has the same coordinates as this Point3D.

Returns a new Point3D whose x-coordinate, y-coordinate and z-coordinate are the largest integers that are less than or equal to the coordinates of the Point3D.

The Point3D to be converted.A Point3D this method convert to.

Returns a hash code for this Point3D.

An integer value that specifies a hash value for this Point3D.

Translates this Point3D by the specified amount.

The offset along the direction of the X axis. Unit is degree.The offset along the direction of the Y axis. Unit is degree.The offset along the direction of the Z axis. Unit is degree.

Tests for inequality between two Point3D objects. The result determines whether the values of the X, Y and Z properties of the two Point3D objects are unequal.

The Point3D on the left side of the operator to compare.The Point3D on the right side of the operator to compare.True if the values of either the X properties, the Y properties or Z properties of left and right differ; otherwise, false.

Compares two Point3D objects. The result specifies whether the values of the X, Y and Z properties of the two Point3D objects are equal.

Converts the specified Point3D to a new Point3D by rounding the Point3D values to the nearest integer values.

The Point3D to be converted.A Point3D this method convert to.

Creates a readable string indicates the Point3D structure object. For example, the object is Point3D(2,3,4) , the corresponding string is "X=2.0,Y=3.0,M=4.0".

A string that represents this Point3D.

Gets a value that indicates whether the Point3D object is empty. that is, whether all of the x-coordinate, the y-coordinate and z-coordinate of this Point3D object are the minimum of the coordinate range.

The default is false, indicating the Point3D object is not null.

Gets or sets the Y coordinate of the Point3D object. The unit is degrees.

The default value is Double.MinValue, in degrees.

Gets or sets the X coordinate of the Point3D object. The unit is degrees.

The default value is Double.MinValue, in degrees.

Gets or sets the Z coordinate of the Point3D object. The unit is meters.

The default value is Double.MinValue, in meters.

A Point3Ds object is a collection of Point3D objects.

Constructs a new Point3Ds object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given Point3Ds object.

The specified Point3Ds object.

Creates a new Point3Ds object according to the specified arguments.

The specified Point3D array.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance.

The new object generated from the clone operation.

Adds the specified Point3D object to the end of this Point3Ds object. If added successful, returns the index of the Point3D object.

The Point3D object to be added to the Point3Ds object.The index of the added Point3D object.

Adds the specified multiple Point3D objects to the end of this Point2Ds object. If added successful, returns the count of added Point3D objects.

The Point3D object array to be added to this Point3D object.The count of added Point3D objects.

Adds the specified Point3D object to the specified index in this Point3Ds object. True, if successful; otherwise false.

The index to which the JoinItem object will be added.The Point3D object to be added.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple Point3D object to this Point3Ds object starting from the specified index. If inserted successful, returns the count of added Point3D object.

The specified index from which to add the Point2D objects.The Point3D object array to be added.The count of added Point3D object.

Removes the Point3D object with the specified index from this Point3Ds object. True, if successful; Otherwise false.

The index of the Point3D object to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Removes the specified count of Point3D objects starting from the specified the index. If removed successful, returns the count of removed Point3D objects.

The index from which to remove the Point3D objects.The count of the Point3D objects to be removed.The count of deleted Point3D objects.

Clears all the Point3D objects in this Point3Ds object.

Converts this Point3Ds object to an array of the Point3D objects.

The array of the Point3D objects.

Gets the enumerator of the Point3Ds.

A enumerator of the Point3Ds.

Converts this Point3Ds object to Point2D object. In this process, the Z value in each Point3D object will be lost.

The Point2Ds object.

Gets the count of Point3D objects in this Point3Ds object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the Point3D object at the specified index in this Point3Ds object.

The specified index of the Point3Ds object.The Point3D object at the specified index in this Point3Ds.

The PointM class. The pointM is the point with linear measure value. M indicates the measure value.

Gets an empty PointM object.

Creates a new PointM object according to the specified arguments.

The X coordinate of the PointM structure object.The Y coordinate of the PointM structure object.The measure value of the PointM object.

Specifies whether this PointM have the same attributes, including X, Y and M, with the specified System.Object.

The object to be tested.Returns true if obj has PointM structure and the attribute value, X, Y and M, is the same with the specified PointM.

Specifies whether this PointM structure object has the same value, including X, Y and M, with the specified PointM object.

The specified PointM object.Returns true if the two objects have the same value in X,Y and M.

Compares the two PointM objects. The result of this method will specify whether the values are the same respectively in X, Y and M.

One of the PointM objects to be compared.One of the PointM objects to be compared.Returns true if the values in X, Y and M, of the two PointM objects are the same respectively; otherwise false.

Compares the two PointM objects. The result of this method will specify whether the values are different respectively in X, Y and M.

One of the PointM objects to be compared.One of the PointM objects to be compared.Returns true if the values in X, Y and M, of the two PointM objects are different respectively; otherwise false.

Gets the hash code of this PointM.

An integer value indicates whether this PointM object is hash code.

Creates a readable string indicates the PointM structure object. For example, the object is PointM(2,3,4) , the corresponding string is "X=2.0,Y=3.0,M=4.0".

The readable string indicates the PointM structure object.

Gets a Boolean value that indicates whether this PointM is empty or not.

The default value is false.

Gets or sets the X coordinate of the PointM structure object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the Y coordinate of the PointM structure object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the measure value of the PointM object.

The default value is 200.

A PointMs object is a collection of PointM objects. The PointMs class is used to manage all the vertices on a GeoLineM or a part of a GeoLineM object.

Constructs a new PointMs object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given PointMs object.

The specified PointM array.

Creates a new PointMsobject according to the specified arguments.

The specified PointMsobject.

Adds the specified PointM object to the end of this PointMs object.

The PointM object to be added to.The index of the added PointM object.

Adds the specified multiple PointM objects to the end of this PointMs object.

The PointM object array to be added to this PointM object.Returns the count of added PointM objects.

Clears all the PointM objects in this PointMs bject.

Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance.

The new object generated from the clone operation.

Gets the enumerator of the pointMs

Return the enumerator of the pointMs

Adds the specified PointM object to the specified index in this PointMs object.

The index to which the JoinItem object will be added.The point object to be added.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified multiple PointM object to this PointMs object starting from the specified index.

The specified index from which to add the Point2D objects.The PointM object array to be added.Returns the count of added PointM objects.

Removes the PointM object with the specified index from this PointMs object.

The index of the PointM object to be removed.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Removes the specified count of PointM objects starting from the specified index.

The index from which to remove the PointM object.The count of the PointM objects to be removed.Returns the count of the PointM objects deleted.

Converts this PointMs object to an array of the PointM objects.

Returns the array of the PointM objects.

Gets the count of PointM objects in this PointMs object.

Gets or sets the PointM object at the specified index in this PointMs object.

The specified index.Returns the PointM object at the specified index in this PointMs object.

The PrjCoordSys class.The projected coordinate system object is composed of map projection mode, projection parameters, coordinate unit and geographic coordinate system. SuperMap iObjects .NET provides many predefined projection systems which can be used by users directly. In addition, users can customize projection system through this object.

Constructs a new PrjCoordSys object.

Creates a new PrjCoordSys object according to the specified arguments.

The given PrjCoordSysType object.,

Creates a new PrjCoordSys object according to the specified arguments.

The geographic coordinate system on which the projected coordinate system based.The projection type of the coordinate system, for example, Conformal Conic Projections and Azimuthal Equidistant Projections etc.The projection parameters.The name of the projected coordinate system.

Constructs a new object identical to the given PrjCoordSys object.

The specified PrjCoordSys object.

Exports the XML string represents the PrjCoordSys object.

The XML string that represents the PrjCoordSys object.

Exports the XML string represents the PrjCoordSys object.

The specified version.The XML string that represents the PrjCoordSys object.

Creates a PrjCoordSys object with the specified XML string. Returns true if successful.

The specified XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Creates a PrjCoordSys object with the specified XML string. Returns true if successful.

The specified XML string.The specified version.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Returns the corresponding code of EPSG (The European Petroleum Survey Group)

Returns the corresponding code of EPSG, if PrjCoordSys is defined by user or the corresponding code can not be found, return -1000

Modifies the object according to EPSG code, not modified when return false.

The EPSG code.Returns true if successfully modified, otherwise return false.

Builds the attribute of the PrjCoordSys object according to the type of xml file and projection file.

The file path of the xml file.The type of projection file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Export the attribute of PrjCoordSys object to a projection file according to the specified version.

The file path of the xml file.The type of projection file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources used by the PrjCoordSys.

Judge whether the object of the projected coordinate system has the same setting information as the specified object to be tested.

Specified projected coordinate system object to be tested.True if the same; false otherwise.

Gets or sets the name of the projected coordinate system.

The default value is WGS_1984_UTM_Zone_1N.

Gets or sets the GeoCoordSys object of the PrjCoordSys. This property is invalid only when the coordinate system is custom projection coordinate system or custom geographic coordinate system.

The default value is SuperMap.Data.GeoCoordSys.

Gets or sets the projection parameter of the projected coordinate system.

The default value is SuperMap.Data.PrjParameter.

Gets or sets the projection type of the coordinate system, for example, Conformal Conic Projections and Azimuthal Equidistant Projections etc.

The default value is an empty SuperMap.Data.Projection object.

Gets or sets the unit of the projected coordinate system.

The default value is Meter.

Gets or sets the distance unit.

The default value is Meter.

Gets or sets the type of the projected coordinate system. Valid only if the coordinate system is of the projected or geographic type.

The default value is UserDefined.

Gets or sets the EPSG code.

Defines geographic coordinate system types.

User-defined.

Planar coordinate system.

Geographic (longitude and latitude) coordinate system.

Plate Carree

Equidistant Cylindrical

Miller Cylindrical

Mercator

Sinusoidal

Mollweide

Eckert VI

Eckert V

Eckert IV

Eckert III

Eckert II

Eckert I

Gall Stereographic

Behrmann

Winkel I

Winkel II

Polyconic

Quartic Authalic

Loximuthal

Bonne

Hotine

Stereographic

Equidistant Conic

Cassini

Van der Grinten I

Two-Point Equidistant

Robinson

Plate Carree

Equidistant Cylindrical

Miller Cylindrical

Mercator

Sinusoidal

Mollweide

Eckert VI

Eckert V

Eckert IV

Eckert III

Eckert II

Eckert I

Gall Stereographic

Behrmann

Winkel I

Winkel II

Polyconic

Quartic Authalic

Loximuthal

Bonne

Stereographic

Equidistant Conic

Cassini

Van der Grinten I

Robinson

Two-Point Equidistant

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 1N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 2N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 3N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 4N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 5N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 6N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 7N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 8N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 9N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 10N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 11N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 12N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 13N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 14N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 15N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 16N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 17N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 18N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 19N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 20N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 21N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 22N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 23N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 24N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 25N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 26N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 27N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone//= 28N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 29N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 30N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 31N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 32N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 33N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 34N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 35N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 36N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 37N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 38N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 39N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 40N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 41N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 42N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 43N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 44N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 45N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 46N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 47N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 48N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 49N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 50N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 51N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 52N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 53N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 54N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 55N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 56N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 57N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 58N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 59N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 60N

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 1S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 2S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 3S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 4S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 5S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 6S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 7S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 8S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 9S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 10S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 11S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 12S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 13S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 14S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 15S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 16S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 17S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 18S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 19S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 20S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 21S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 22S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 23S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 24S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 25S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 26S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 27S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 28S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 29S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 30S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 31S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone=32S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 33S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 34S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 35S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 36S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 37S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 38S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 39S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 40S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 41S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 42S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 43S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 44S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 45S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 46S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 47S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 48S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 49S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 50S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 51S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 52S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 53S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone= 54S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 55S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 56S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 57S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 58S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 59S

WGS 1984 UTM Zone 60S

Japanese Zone I

Japanese Zone II

Japanese Zone III

Japanese Zone IV

Japanese Zone V

Japanese Zone VI

Japanese Zone VII

Japanese Zone VIII

Japanese Zone IX

Japanese Zone X

Japanese Zone XI

Japanese Zone XII

Japanese Zone XIII

Japanese Zone XIV

Japanese Zone XV

Japanese Zone XVI

Japanese Zone XVII

Japanese Zone XVIII

Japanese Zone XIX

Japan Tokyo datum, UTM zone 51

Japan Tokyo datum, UTM zone 52

Japan Tokyo datum, UTM zone 53

Japan Tokyo datum, UTM zone 54

Japan Tokyo datum, UTM zone 55

Japan Tokyo datum, UTM zone 56

Japanese Zone I

Japanese Zone II

Japanese Zone III

Japanese Zone IV

Japanese Zone V

Japanese Zone VI

Japanese Zone VII

Japanese Zone VIII

Japanese Zone IX

Japanese Zone X

Japanese Zone XI

Japanese Zone XII

Japanese Zone XIII

Japanese Zone XIV

Japanese Zone XV

Japanese Zone XVI

Japanese Zone XVII

Japanese Zone XVIII

Japanese Zone XIX

Japan geodetic system 2000,UTM projection system 51

Japan geodetic system 2000,UTM projection 52

Japan geodetic system 2000,UTM projection system 53

Japan geodetic system 2000,UTM projection 54

Japan geodetic system 2000,UTM projection system 55

Japan geodetic system 2000,UTM projection system 56

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 1N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 2N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 3N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 4N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 5N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 6N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 7N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 8N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 9N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 10N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 11N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 12N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 13N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 14N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 15N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 16N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 17N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 18N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 19N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 20N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 21N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 22N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 23N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 24N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 25N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 26N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 27N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 28N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 29N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 30N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 31N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 32N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 33N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 34N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 35N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 36N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 37N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 38N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 39N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 40N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 41N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 42N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 43N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 44N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 45N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 46N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 47N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 48N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 49N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 50N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 51N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 52N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 53N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 54N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 55N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 56N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 57N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 58N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 59N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 60N

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 1S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 2S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 3S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 4S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 5S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 6S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 7S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 8S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 9S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 10S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 11S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 12S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 13S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 14S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 15S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 16S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 17S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 18S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 19S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 20S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 21S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 22S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 23S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 24S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 25S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 26S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 27S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 28S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 29S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 30S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 31S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone= 32S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 33S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 34S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 35S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 36S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 37S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 38S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 39S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 40S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 41S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 42S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 43S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 44S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 45S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 46S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 47S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 48S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 49S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 50S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 51S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 52S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 53S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 54S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 55S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 56S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 57S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 58S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 59S

WGS 1972 UTM Zone 60S

NAD 1927 BLM Zone 14N

NAD 1927 BLM Zone 15N

NAD 1927 BLM Zone 16N

NAD 1927 BLM Zone 17N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 3N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 4N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 5N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 6N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 7N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 8N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 9N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 10N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 11N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 12N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 13N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 14N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 15N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 16N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 17N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 18N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 19N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 20N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 21N

NAD 1927 UTM Zone 22N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 3N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 4N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 5N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 6N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 7N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 8N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 9N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 10N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 11N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 12N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 13N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 14N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 15N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 16N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 18N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 19N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 20N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 21N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 22N

NAD 1983 UTM Zone 23N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 28N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 29N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 30N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 31N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 32N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 33N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 34N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 35N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 36N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 37N

ETRS 1989 UTM Zone 38N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 4

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 5

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 6

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 7

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 8

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 9

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 10

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 11

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 12

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 13

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 14

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 15

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 16

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 17

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 18

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 19

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 20

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 21

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 22

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 23

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 24

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 25

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 26

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 27

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 28

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 29

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 30

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 31

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 32

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 4N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 5N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 6N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 7N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 8N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 9N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 10N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 11N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 12N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 13N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 14N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 15N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 16N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 17N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 18N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 19N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 20N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 21N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 22N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 23N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 24N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 25N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 26N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 27N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 28N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 29N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 30N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone 31N

Pulkovo 1942 GK Zone= 32N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 4

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 5

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 6

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 7

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 8

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 9

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 10

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 11

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 12

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 13

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 14

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 15

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 16

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 17

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 18

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 19

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 20

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 21

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 22

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 23

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 24

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 25

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 26

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 27

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 28

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 29

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 30

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 31

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 32

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 4N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 5N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 6N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 7N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 8N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 9N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 10N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 11N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 12N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 13N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 14N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 15N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 16N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 17N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 18N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 19N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 20N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 21N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 22N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 23N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 24N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 25N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 26N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 27N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 28N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 29N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 30N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone 31N

Pulkovo 1995 GK Zone= 32N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 13

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 14

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 15

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 16

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 17

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 18

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 19

Beijing 1954 GK Zone= 20

Beijing 1954 GK Zone= 21

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 22

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 23

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 13N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 14N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 15N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 16N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 17N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 18N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 19N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 20N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone= 21N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone 22N

Beijing 1954 GK Zone= 23N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 28N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone= 29N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 30N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 31N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone= 32N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 33N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 34N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 35N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 36N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 37N

European Datum 1950 UTM Zone 38N

ATS 1977 UTM Zone 19N

ATS 1977 UTM Zone 20N

Finland Zone 1

Finland Zone 2

Finland Zone 3

Finland Zone 4

South American 1969 UTM Zone 18N

South American 1969 UTM Zone 19N

South American 1969 UTM Zone 20N

South American 1969 UTM Zone= 21N

South American 1969 UTM Zone 22N

South American 1969 UTM Zone 17S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 18S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 19S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 20S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 21S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 22S

South American 1969 UTM Zone = 23S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 24S

South American 1969 UTM Zone 25S

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 48

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 49

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 50

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 51

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 52

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 53

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 54

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 55

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 56

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 57

AGD 1966 AMG Zone 58

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 48

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 49

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 50

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 51

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 52

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 53

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 54

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 55

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 56

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 57

AGD 1984 AMG Zone 58

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 48

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 49

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 50

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 51

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 52

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 53

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 54

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 55

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 56

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 57

GDA 1994 MGA Zone 58

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alabama East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alabama West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 1

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 2

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 3

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 4

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 5

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 6

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 7

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 8

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 9

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Alaska 10

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Arizona East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Arizona Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Arizona West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Arkansas North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Arkansas South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone California I

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone California II

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone California IV

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone California V

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone California VI

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone California VII

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Colorado North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Colorado Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Colorado South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Connecticut

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Delaware

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Florida East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Florida West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Florida North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Georgia East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Georgia West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Hawaii 1

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Hawaii 2

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Hawaii 3

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Hawaii 4

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Hawaii 5

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Idaho East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Idaho Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Idaho West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Illinois East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Illinois West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Indiana East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Indiana West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Iowa North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Iowa South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Kansas North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Kansas South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Kentucky North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Kentucky South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Louisiana North.

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Louisiana South.

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Maine East.

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Maine West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Maryland

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Mass. Mainland

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Mass. Island

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Michigan North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Michigan Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Michigan South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Minnesota North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Minnesota Centra

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Minnesota South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Mississippi East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Mississippi West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Missouri East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Missouri Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Missouri West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Montana North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Montana Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Montana South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Nebraska North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Nebraska South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Nevada East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Nevada Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Nevada West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New Hampshire

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New Jersey

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New Mexico East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New Mexico Cent

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New Mexico West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New York East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New York Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone New York West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone NY Long Island

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone North Carolina

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone North Dakota N

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone North Dakota S

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Ohio North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Ohio South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Oklahoma North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Oklahoma South.

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Oregon North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Oregon South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Pennsylvania N

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Pennsylvania S

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Rhode Island

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone South Carolina N

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone South Carolina S

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone South Dakota N

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone South Dakota S

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Tennessee

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Texas North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Texas North Cent

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Texas Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Texas South Cent

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Texas South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Utah North.

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Utah Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Utah South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Vermont

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Virginia North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Virginia South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Washington North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Washington South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone West Virginia N

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone West Virginia S

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wisconsin North

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wisconsin Central

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wisconsin South

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wyoming I East

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wyoming II EC

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wyoming III WC

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Wyoming IV West

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Puerto Rico

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone St. Croix

NAD 1927 SPCS Zone Guam

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alabama East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alabama West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 1

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 2

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 3

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 4

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 5

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 6

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 7

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 8

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 9

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Alaska 10

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Arizona East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Arizona Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Arizona West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Arkansas North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Arkansas South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone California I

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone California II

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone California III

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone California IV

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone California V

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone California VI

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Colorado North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Colorado Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Colorado South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Connecticut

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Delaware

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Florida East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Florida West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Florida North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Georgia East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Georgia West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Hawaii Zone 1

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Hawaii Zone 2

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Hawaii Zone 3

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Hawaii Zone 4

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Hawaii Zone 5

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Idaho East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Idaho Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Idaho West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Illinois East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Illinois West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Indiana East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Indiana West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Iowa North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Iowa South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Kansas North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Kansas South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Kentucky North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Kentucky South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Louisiana North.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Louisiana South.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Maine East.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Maine West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Maryland

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Mass. Mainland

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Mass. Island

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Michigan North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Michigan Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Michigan South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Minnesota North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Minnesota Central.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Minnesota South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Mississippi East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Mississippi West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Missouri East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Missouri Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Missouri West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Montana

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Nebraska

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Nevada East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Nevada Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Nevada West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New Hampshire

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New Jersey

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New Mexico East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New Mexico Cent

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New Mexico West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New York East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New York Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone New York West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone NY Long Island

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone North Carolina

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone North Dakota N

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone North Dakota S

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Ohio North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Ohio South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Oklahoma North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Oklahoma South.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Oregon North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Oregon South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Pennsylvania N

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Pennsylvania S

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Rhode Island

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone South Carolina

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone South Dakota N

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone South Dakota S

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Tennessee

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Texas North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Texas North Cent.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Texas Central.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Texas South Cent.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Texas South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Utah North.

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Utah Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Utah South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Vermont

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Virginia North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Virginia South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Washington North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Washington South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone West Virginia N

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone West Virginia S

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wisconsin North

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wisconsin Central

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wisconsin South

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wyoming I East

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wyoming II EC

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wyoming III WC

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Wyoming IV West

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone PR & St. Croix

NAD 1983 SPCS Zone Guam

Adindan UTM Zone 37N

Adindan UTM Zone 38N

Afgooye UTM Zone 38N

Afgooye UTM Zone 39N

Ain el Abd 1970 UTM Zone 37N

Ain el Abd 1970 UTM Zone 38N

Ain el Abd 1970 UTM Zone 39N

Aratu UTM Zone 22S

Aratu UTM Zone= 23S

Aratu UTM Zone 24S

Batavia UTM Zone 48S

Batavia UTM Zone 49S

Batavia UTM Zone 50S

Bogota UTM Zone 17N

Bogota UTM Zone 18N

Camacupa UTM Zone= 32S

Camacupa UTM Zone 33S

Carthage UTM Zone= 32N

Corrego Alegre UTM Zone= 23S

Corrego Alegre UTM Zone 24S

Datum 73 UTM Zone= 29N

Douala UTM Zone= 32N

Fahud UTM Zone 39N

Fahud UTM Zone 40N

Garoua UTM Zone 33N

Greek Grid

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 46N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 47N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 48N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 49N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 50N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 51N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 52N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 53N

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 46S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 47S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 48S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 49S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 50S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 51S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 52S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 53S

Indonesia 1974 UTM Zone 54S

Indian 1954 UTM Zone 47N.

Indian 1954 UTM Zone 48N.

Indian 1975 UTM Zone 47N.

Indian 1975 UTM Zone 48N.

Kertau UTM Zone 47N

Kertau UTM Zone 48N

La Canoa UTM Zone= 20N

La Canoa UTM Zone 21N

Lome UTM Zone 31N

M'poraloko UTM Zone= 32N

M'poraloko UTM Zone= 32S

Malongo 1987 UTM Zone= 32S

Massawa UTM Zone 37N

Mhast UTM Zone//= 32S

Minna UTM Zone 31N

Minna UTM Zone 32N

Nahrwan 1967 UTM Zone 38N

Nahrwan 1967 UTM Zone 39N

Nahrwan 1967 UTM Zone 40N

NGN UTM Zone 38N

NGN UTM Zone 39N

Nord Sahara 1959 UTM Zone= 29N

Nord Sahara 1959 UTM Zone 30N

Nord Sahara 1959 UTM Zone 31N

Nord Sahara 1959 UTM Zone 32N

Naparima 1972 UTM Zone 20N

Pointe Noire UTM Zone 32S

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 18N

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 19N

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 20N

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 21N

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 17S

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 18S

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 19S

Prov. S. Amer. Datum UTM Zone 20S

Sapper Hill 1943 UTM Zone 20S

Sapper Hill 1943 UTM Zone 21S

/Schwarzeck UTM Zone 33S

Sudan UTM Zone 35N

Sudan UTM Zone 36N

Tananarive 1925 UTM Zone 38S

Tananarive 1925 UTM Zone 39S

Trucial Coast 1948 UTM Zone 39N

Trucial Coast 1948 UTM Zone 40N

Timbalai 1948 UTM Zone 49N

Timbalai 1948 UTM Zone 50N

Yoff 1972 UTM Zone//= 28N

Zanderij 1972 UTM Zone 21N

Kuwait Utility KTM.

Philippines Zone I

Philippines Zone II

Philippines Zone III

Philippines Zone IV

Philippines Zone V

Austria (Ferro) West Zone

Austria (Ferro) Cent. Zone

Austria (Ferro) East Zone

Monte Mario (Rome) Italy 1

Monte Mario (Rome) Italy 2

Argentina Zone 1

Argentina Zone 2

Argentina Zone 3

Argentina Zone 4

Argentina Zone 5

Argentina Zone 6

Argentina Zone 7

Germany Zone 1

Germany Zone 2

Germany Zone 3

Germany Zone 4

Germany Zone 5

Bahrain State Grid

Colombia West Zone

Colombia Bogota Zone

Colombia E Central Zone

Colombia East Zone

Egypt Red Belt

Egypt Purple Belt

Egypt Extended Purple Belt

Ghana Metre Grid

Irish National Grid

New Zealand North Island

New Zealand South Island

Nigeria West Belt

Nigeria Mid Belt

Nigeria East Belt

Peru West Zone

Peru Central Zone

Peru East Zone

Portuguese National Grid

Qatar National Grid

British National Grid

Swedish National Grid

Nord Algerie ancienne

Nord Algerie

Nord de Guerre

France I

France II

France III

France IV

Nord France

Centre France

Sud France

Corse

India Zone 0.

India Zone I

India Zone IIa

India Zone IIb

India Zone IIIa

India Zone IIIb

India Zone IVa

India Zone IVb

Jamaica 1875 Old Grid

Jamaica Grid

Nord Maroc

Sud Maroc

Sahara

Nord Tunisie

Sud Tunisie

Kuwait Oil Co - Lambert

Belge Lambert 1950

Stereo 1933

Stereo 1970

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 25

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 26

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 27

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 28

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 29

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 30

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 31

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 32

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 33

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 34

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 35

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 36

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 37

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 38

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 39

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 40

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 41

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 42

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 43

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 44

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 45

Beijing 1954 3Degree GK Zone 25N

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 13

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 14

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 15

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 16

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 17

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 18

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 19

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 20

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 21

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 22

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 23

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 13N

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 25

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 26

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 27

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 28

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 29

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 30

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 31

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 32

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 33

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 34

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 35

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 36

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 37

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 38

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 39

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 40

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 41

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 42

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 43

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 44

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 45

CGCS 2000 GK Zone 13N

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 13

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 14

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 15

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 16

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 17

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 18

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 19

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 20

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 21

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 22

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 23

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 23N

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 25

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 26

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 27

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 28

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 29

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 30

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 31

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 32

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 33

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 34

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 35

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 36

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 37

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 38

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 39

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 40

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 41

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 42

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 43

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 44

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 45

Xi'an 1980 GK Zone 23N

Kertau Malaya Meters.

Timbalai 1948 RSO Borneo.

Amersfoort RD New.

WGS 1984 World Mercator.

Portuguese Grid

Modified Portuguese National Grid

Modified Portuguese Grid

ETRS89 / Portugal TM06

Bessel Datum Lisboa

Azores Occidental 1939 / UTM zone 25N

Azores Central 1948 / UTM zone 26N

Azores Oriental 1940 / UTM zone 26N

Madeira 1936 / UTM zone 28N

ED50 / Oriental group

ED50 / Central group

ED50 / Occidental group

PTRA08-UTM28/ITRF93

PTRA08-UTM26/ITRF93

PTRA08-UTM25/ITRF93

WGS 84/Web-Mercator

Popular Visualisation CRS/Mercator(deprecated)

Kertau 1968/Pahang Grid

Kertau 1968/Selangor Grid

Kertau 1968/Terengganu Grid

Kertau 1968/Perak Revised Grid

Kertau 1968/Singapore Grid

Kertau (RSO)/RSO Malaya(m)

Timbalai 1948/RSO Borneo(m)

Defines the Projection file types.

A projection file type used by SuperMap, it's a XML file.

The projection file type used by Esri, it is a prj file.

Defines the projections file version constants.

UGC60 version of SuperMap projection file.

SFC60 version of SuperMap projection file.

The PrjParameter class.The projection parameters, such as meridian, center latitude, standard parallel of projection with two standard parallels.

Constructs a new PrjParameter object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given PrjParameter object.

The given PrjParameter object.

Returns an xml string that represents the PrjParameter object.

An xml string that represents the PrjParameter object.

Constructs a PrjParameter object with the introduced xml string.

The specified xml format string.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Releases all resources used by the PrjParameter.

Gets or sets the horizontal offset of coordinate. Unit: Meters.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the vertical offset of coordinate. Unit: Meters.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the angle value of the central meridian. The units is degrees.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the latitude of the origin of the coordinate. Unit: degree.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the latitude of the first standard parallel. Unit: degree.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the latitude of the second standard parallel. Unit: degree.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the scale factor of projection.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the azimuth. Unit: degrees.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the longitude of the first point. Unit: Degrees.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the longitude of the second point. Unit: Degrees.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the correction angle of the rectified skewed orthographic projection, unit: Degree.

Defines constants for SuperMap products.

SuperMap iObjects Core Development

SuperMap iObjects Core Runtime

SuperMap iObjects SDX Development

SuperMap iObjects SDX Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Space Development

SuperMap iObjects Space Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Realspace Spatial Analyst Development

SuperMap iObjects Realspace Spatial Analyst Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Layout Development

SuperMap iObjects Layout Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Spatial Analyst Development

SuperMap iObjects Spatial Analyst Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Network Analyst Development

SuperMap iObjects Network Analyst Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Topology Development

SuperMap iObjects Topology Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Address Matching Development

SuperMap iObjects Address Matching Runtime

SuperMap iServer Standard

SuperMap iServer Professional

SuperMap iServer Enterprise

SuperMap iServer Spatial Analyst Service

SuperMap iServer Network Analyst Service

SuperMap iServer Traffic Transfer Service

SuperMap iServer 3D

SuperMap iDesktop Advanced

SuperMap iDesktop Standard

SuperMap iDesktop Enterprise

SuperMap iMapEditor

SuperMap iDesktop Topology

SuperMap iDesktop Traffic Network analysis

SuperMap iDesktop Facility Network analysis

SuperMap iDesktop Spatial analysis

SuperMap iDesktop Nautical Chart

SuperMap iDesktop Spatial Processor

iServer Nautical Chart

SuperMap iServer standard version

SuperMap iObjects Chart Development

SuperMap iObjects Chart Runtime

SuperMap iDesktop 3D analysis

SuperMap iDesktop Traffic Analyst

SuperMap iDesktop 3D effect

SuperMap FME ESRI

SuperMap FME OTHER

SuperMap FME RASTER

SuperMap FME VECTOR

SuperMap iObjects Traffic Analyst Development

SuperMap iObjects Traffic Analyst Runtime

SuperMap iObjects Space Development

SuperMap iObjects Space Runtime

SuperMap iObjects 3D Network Analyst Development

SuperMap iObjects 3D Network Analyst Runtime

Universal GIS Core class library

超图地理国情预处理软件

SuperMap iDesktop chart design extension module

SuperMap iDesktop 3D Network Analysis Extension Module

Map projection class.

Initializes a new instance of the Projection class.

Initializes a new instance of the Projection class which is identical with the specified Projection.

The specified Projection object.

Initializes a new instance of the Projection structure with the specified type of projection.

The specified type of projection.

Returns an xml string that represents the projection object.

Retrieves the projection object with the specified xml string.

The specified xml string.Returns true, if successful; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources used by the Projection.

Constructs a new Projection object according to the given parameters. When using a custom projection transformation algorithm, using the constructor to create a new Projection object.

Supports 48 kinds of predefined projection types; now supports projection expansion, so that the user can establish their own projection type, the value of the parameters of the user can be given [44000, 45000] range of any integer.Custom projection name.

Gets or sets the type of the Projection.

The default value is NoneProjection.

Gets or sets the name of the projected type object.

The default value is No Projection.

Defines the type of the projection of the projected coordinate system.

None projection.

Plate Carree projection

Equidistant Cylindrical projection

Miller Cylindrical This projection is similar to the Mercator projection except that the polar regions are not as alreally distorted. Spacing between lines of latitude as they approach the poles is less than in the Mercator projection. It decreases the distortion in area, but the compromise introduces distortion in local shape and direction. Cylindrical projection. Meridians are parallel and equally spaced, lines of latitude are parallel, and the distance between them increases toward the poles. Both poles are represented as straight lines.

Mercator projection is the cylindrical projection. Originally, the Mercator projection is created to display accurate compass bearings for sea travel. An additional feature of this projection is that all directions and relative locations are accurate and clearly defined. Meridians are parallel to each other and equally spaced. The lines of latitude are also parallel but become farther apart.

Gauss-Kruger projection. Cylindrical projection with central meridian placed in a particular region. Also known as Transverse Mercator, this projection is similar to the Mercator except that the cylinder is longitudinal along a meridian instead of the equator. The result is a conformal projection that does not maintain true directions. The central meridian is placed on the region to be highlighted. This centering minimizes distortion of all properties in that region. This projection is best suited for land masses that stretch north-south. The Gauss-Kruger coordinate system is based on the Gauss-Kruger projection.

Transverse Mercator. Also known as Gausskruger, and similar to the Mercator, except that the cylinder is longitudinal along a meridian instead of the equator. The result is a conformal projection that does not maintain true directions. The central meridian is placed in the center of the region of interest. This centering minimizes distortion of all properties in that region. This projection is best suited for north-south areas. Cylindrical projection with central meridian placed in a particular region.

Albers projection. This conic projection uses two standard parallels to reduce some of the distortion of a projection with one standard parallel. This projection is best suited for land masses extending in an east-to-west orientation rather than those lying north to south.

Sinusoidal projection.

Mollweide projection. Carl B. Mollweide created this pseudo cylindrical projection in 1805. It is an equal-area projection designed for small-scale maps. Pseudo cylindrical equal-area projection. All parallels are straight lines, and all meridians are equally spaced elliptical arcs. The exception is the central meridian, which is a straight line. The poles are points.

Eckert VI

Eckert V

Eckert IV

Eckert III

Eckert II

Eckert I

Gall Stereographic

Behrmann

Winkel I

Winkel II

Lambert Conformal Conic

Polyconic

Quartic Authalic

Loximuthal

Bonne

Hotine

Stereographic

Equidistant Conic

Cassini

Van der Grinten I

Robinson

Two-Point Equidistant

Equidistant Azimuthal

Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area

Conformal Azimuthal

ortho_graphic 正射

Gnomonic 球心

Chinese full-image azimuth projection

Sanson projection - sinusoidal and other pseudo-cylindrical projection. The weft is designed as parallel lines of equal spacing, and the warp is designed to be symmetrical about the sinusoid of the central meridian, with a pseudo-cylindrical projection of equal product nature.

EqualArea Cylindrical

Hotine Azimuth Natorigin

Oblique Mercator.

Hotine Oblique Mercator

Sphere Mercator.

Oblique Stereographic

Rectified skewed orthographic projection, suitable for the Malay Peninsula.

Baidu Mercator.

The QueryParameter class is used to describe the conditions that the query is based, such as the SQL WHERE clause, cursor type, spatial query mode etc.

Constructs a new object identical to the given QueryParameter object.

The given QueryParameter object.

Constructs a new QueryParameter object.

Adds a query condition of time-space model for a single time field.

The time query condition.

Outputs the parameter settings in this QueryParameter to a string.

A string that represents the Queryparameter.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the QueryParameter is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the QueryParameter.

Gets or sets the result field collection of the query. In the result record set of the query, there can be all fields or you can specify some of the fields to return. If it is set to null, all the fields will be returned. The default value is null.

The default value is System.String[], an string array whose count is zero.

Gets or sets the link information with the exterior tables.

The default value SuperMap.Data.LinkItems.

Gets or sets the join information with exterior tables.

The default value is SuperMap.Data.JoinItems.

Gets or sets the field used to group the result records of the SQL query.

The default value is System.String[], an string array whose count is zero.

Gets or sets the field used to sort the result records of the SQL query.For the records obtained from a SQL query, you can specify a field to sort them, either ascending or descending.Note: The field used for sorting must be numeric.

The default value is System.String[], an string array whose count is zero.

Gets or sets the spatial query mode of the spatial query.

The default value is None.

Gets or sets the search object in the spatial query, and the search object can be an instance of the Point2D, Rectangle2D, GeoPoint, GeoLine, GeoRegion, GeoText, DatasetVector, Recordset class etc.

The default value is null.

Indicates whether the result of query has geometry.

The default is true.

Gets or sets a query condition of time-space model for a single time field.

The time query condition array.

Gets or sets the SQL 'where' clause when querying by SQL.For datasources of different engines, applicable functions are different.1. For database datasources, such as Oracle Plus, SQL Server Plus, and DB2 datasources, please refer to related docs of the database for the usage of the functions.2. For file datasources, such as UDB datasource, please refer to SQL Query.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the type of the cursor used when querying.

The default value is Dynamic type.

The class defines the related information and operations of the ranges.

Constructor

Ranges IDRanges nameRanges descriptionRanges data typeRange information collection of the ranges

Constructor

Ranges IDRanges nameRanges descriptionRanges data type

Copy constructor

Gets all range information

Range information collection

Gets range information according to the index

IndexRange information

Adds range information

Range informationa boolean, true if adding successful; Otherwise returns false.

Adds a group of range information to the ranges

Range information collection

Sets range information according to the index

IndexRange informationa boolean, true means the setting is successful.

Removes range information according to the index

Index

Deletes all range information

Ranges attributes Ranges information count

The class defines the ranges information of Domain

Including data type, minimum value, maximum value and domain type(CLOSECLOSE,CLOSEOPEN,OPENCLOSE,OPENOPEN)

It also provides related interface to modify the information

Constructor

Copy Constructor.

Constructor

Data TypeMinimum valueMaximum valueDomain type

Gets the domain value, returning the int16 value, the first one is the minimum, and the second is the maximum

Domain value

Gets the domain value, returning the int32 value, the first one is the minimum, and the second is the maximum

Domain value

Gets the domain value, returning the Single value, the first one is the minimum, and the second is the maximum

Domain value

Gets the domain value, returning the Double value, the first one is the minimum, and the second is the maximum

Domain value

Gets the domain value, returning the DateTime value, the first one is the minimum, and the second is the maximum

Domain value

Sets the domain

MinValueMaxValue

Sets the domain

MinValueMaxValue

Sets the domain

MinValueMaxValue

Sets the domain

MinValueMaxValue

Sets the domain

MinValueMaxValue

Releases the resources occupied by RangeInfo.

Domain property data type

Domain property domain type

Domain property minimum value

Domain property maximum value

The Rectangle2D class. Represents a rectangle whose coordinates are double-precision floating-point values, that is, the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of the right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge are all 64-bit floating-point values. Where, the x-coordinate of the left edge should be no greater than the x-coordinate of the right edge and the y-coordinate of the bottom edge should be no greater than the y-coordinate of the top edge.

Gets an empty Rectangle2D, with the bottom, top, left, and right coordinates of the bounding box being the minimum value of the Double type.

Creates a new Rectangle2D object according to the specified arguments.

The x-coordinate of left edge of the rectangle.The y-coordinate of bottom edge of the rectangle.The x-coordinate of the right edge of the rectangle.The y-coordinate of the top edge of the rectangle.

Creates a new Rectangle2D object according to the specified arguments.

A Point that represents the lower-left corner of the rectangle.The width of the rectangle.The height of the rectangle.

Creates a new Rectangle2D object according to the specified arguments.

The point at the lower-left corner.The point at the upper-right corner.

Creates a new Rectangle2D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified center of the Rectangle object.The specified size of the Rectangle object.

Replaces this Rectangle2D with the union of this Rectangle2D structure and the specified Rectangle2D object.

The rectangle used to form the union.

Retrieves a readable string that indicates the current Rectangle2D, and the format is Left=,Bottom=,Right=,Top=

A string that represents the current Rectangle2D object.

Rounds the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge of the specified Rectangle2D to the nearest integers respectively and creates a new Rectangle2D with these integers. For example, the values of the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge are (32.12, 20.67, 66.47, 48.96) respectively, and the corresponding values of the result rectangle will (32, 21, 66, 49).

The Rectangle2D to be converted.A new Rectangle2D object.

Tests for inequality between two Rectangle2D structures.

The Rectangle2D to be converted.The Rectangle2D to be converted.0 True, if any of the Left, Bottom, right and Top members of the two rectangle2D are not equal; otherwise false.

Determines whether the two rectangles are equal, namely whether this Rectangle2D object has the same boundary coordinates as the specified Object.

The second Rectangle2D to be compared.The second Rectangle2D to be compared.This method returns true if the Left, Bottom, Right and Top of left equal those of right, otherwise the method returns false.

Moves the Rectangle2D along both x-axis direction and y-axis direction. The offset along x-axis direction is dx, while the offset along y-axis direction is dy.

The amount to offset the x-coordinate.The amount to offset the y-coordinate.

Determines whether this rectangle intersects with another rectangle, When this rectangle and the specified rectangle have the common point or common line, they are considered to have intersections.

The Rectangle2D object to be tested.If the intersection of the two rectangles is not empty, this method returns true; otherwise it returns false.

Replaces this Rectangle2D structure with the intersection of itself and the specified Rectangle2D structure.

The rectangle that intersects this rectangle.

This method extends or shrinks this rectangle instead of its copy.

The inflate in the x direction.The inflate in the y direction.

Gets the hash code of this Rectangle2D structure.

The hash code of this Rectangle2D.

Returns a new Rectangle2D whose values of the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge are the largest integers that are not greater than the corresponding coordinate values of the specified Rectangle2D.For example, the values of the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge are (32.12, 20.67, 66.47, 48.96) respectively, and the corresponding values of the result rectangle will (32, 20, 66, 48).

The Rectangle2D to be converted.A Rectangle2D

Determines whether the two rectangles are equal, namely whether this Rectangle2D object has the same boundary coordinates as the specified Object.

The Rectangle2D object to be tested.If the given Rectangle2D has the same coordinates of the four corner points as this Rectangle2D, this method returns true; otherwise it returns false.

Determines whether this rectangle equals the given object, namely whether the given object is a Rectangle2D and whether it has the same boundary coordinates as this Rectangle2D.

The object to be tested.If the given Object is a Rectangle2D and its coordinates of the four corner points are the same as those of this Rectangle2D, this method returns true; otherwise it returns false.

Checks whether the point defined by the given x- and y- coordinate is contained within the current Rectangle2D structure.

The X coordinate of the point that might be contained in this Rectangle2D.The Y coordinate of the point that might be contained in this Rectangle2D.True if the point with the given X, Y coordinates is contained within this Rectangle2D. Returns false otherwise..

Checks whether the given Rectangle2D instance is contained within the current Rectangle2D structure.

The Rectangle2D to test.True, if the specified Rectangle2D object is within this rectangle or on the boundary of this rectangle; otherwise, false.

Checks whether the given Point2D is contained within the current Rectangle2D structure.

The Point2D to check.True, if the specified Point2D is within this Rectangle2D or on the boundary of this Rectangle2D; otherwise false.

Returns a new Rectangle2D whose values of the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge are the smallest integers that are greater than or equal to the corresponding coordinate values of the specified Rectangle2D. For example, the values of the x-coordinate of the left edge, the y-coordinate of the bottom edge, the x-coordinate of right edge and the y-coordinate of the top edge are (32.12, 20.67, 66.47, 48.96) respectively, and the coorsponding values of the result rectangle will (33, 21, 67, 49).

The Rectanlge2D object to be converted.A new Rectangle2D.

The value of the width of the rectangle is the result of subtracting the x-coordinate of the left edge from the x-coordinate of the right edge.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the y-coordinate of the top edge of this Rectangle2D structure.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the x-coordinate of the right edge of this Rectangle2D structure.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the x-coordinate of the left edge of this Rectangle2D structure.

The default value is 200.

Tests whether this Rectangle2D is empty.

True if this Rectangle2D is empty; Otherwise, false. The default is false.

Gets or sets the height of this Rectangle2D object, and the value of the height of the rectangle is the result of subtracting the y-coordinate of the bottom edge from the y-coordinate of the top edge.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the y-coordinate of the bottom edge of this Rectangle2D structure.

The default value is 200.

Returns the center point of this Rectangle2D.

The default value is Point2D(0,0).

The RepresentationElement class. This class is used to display a Geometry object instead a corresponding Geometry object in the vector dataset.

Constructs a new RepresentationElement object.

Initializes a RepresentationElement object according to the given arguments.

The specified Geometry object which will display in the map window instead its corresponding object using the representation in the vector dataset. The geometric and style information of the geometric object are contained.The representation type which controls whether to use the geometry object set in the representation information to substitute the original object using the representation, whether to use the display style set in the representation information and whether the object using the representation is visible or not. For more information about the representation type, please refer to the RepresentationType class.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or set the Geometry of the RepresentationElement object. If the property of RepresentationElement.IsVisible is set to true and RepresentationElement. IsStyleOnly is set false, this Geometry object will display in the map window instead its corresponding object in the vector dataset. The geometric and style information of the geometric object are contained.

The default value is null.

Gets or sets the representation type. The representation type which controls whether to use the geometry object set in the representation information to substitute the original object using the representation, whether to use the display style set in the representation information and whether the object using the representation is visible or not. For more information about the representation type, please refer to the RepresentationType class.

The default value is Original.

Gets or sets the user-define property for the RepresentationElement object.The CustomVaule supports the types such as Byte, Int16, Int 32, Int64, Boolean, Single, Double, DateTime, String, Byte[] in the current version.

The default value is null.

The RepresentationType class. This class will control whether to use the geometry object in the representation information to substitute the original object using the representation, whether to use the setting display style in the representation information and whether the object using the representation is visible or not.

Makes the objects using the representation in the vector dataset invisible. At this time the Geometry property of the RepresentationElement object get by the GetRepresentationElement() method of the Recordset class is null.

The objects using representation when displaying will use its original geometry object and use its original style to display.

The objects using representation when displaying will use the geometry object set in the representation information instead of the original object but it still use its original style to display.

The objects using representation when displaying will use its original geometry object but it will use the style set in the representation information instead of its original style to display.

The objects using representation when displaying will use the geometry object set in the representation information instead of the original object and it will also use the style set in the representation information instead of its original style to display.

The ResampleInformation class. It is used to set the resampling type, whether to perform topology preprocess and the tolerance of the resampling.

Construct a new ResampleInformation object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets whether to perform topology pre-processing when resampling datasets.

The default value is true, i.e., topology pre-processing when resampling.

Gets or sets the resample tolerance distance. The unit is the same with the dataset coordinate system.

the default value is 1e-10.

Gets or sets the vertex snap tolerance for topology pre-processing, the unit is the same with the dataset coordinate system. It is supported only when only when IsTopologyPreprocess is true.

The default value is 1e-10.

Gets or sets the resampling type.

the default value is ResampleType.RTBend.

This enumeration defines the vector data resampling type constant.

Resampling with the diaphragm algorithm. The figure below illustrates the calculation process with the polyline which has 6 nodes:1. As shown in the figure on the left, draw a line perpendicular to the line segment 12 through the point 12, select two points A and B on the line with the distance to the point 2 as m (the resampling tolerance), connect point 1 and A, B, extend to form the resampling extent (the pink region), determines whether point 3 is in the region, delete point 2 if point 8 is in the region.Since point 3 is in the resampling region, the point 2 is deleted, the polyline is changed to the polyline on the right.2. Perform the same computing for point 3. As shown below, since point 4 is not in the resampling region (the green region), the point 3 is retained.3. Continue the operation for the remaining nodes, the result is as the following.

Resampling with the douglas-poke algorithm. The following steps shows the process of the Douglas Peucker algorithm.1. As shown below, connect the start node and the end node of the polyline with a line, the maximum distance from other nodes to this line is d, if d > m, the corresponding point of d will be retained, the original line object will be divided in to two parts and the point, then continue use this method to resampe, until all the divided line can not be resampled (only contains two nodes); otherwise all the nodes in between will be deleted.In the figure below, d > m, node 2 is retained, the original line object is divided to two parts, one contains node 1 and 2, the other contains node 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.2. As shown below, the line composed by node 1 and 2 can't be simplified, repeat step 1 for the line composed by node 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, since d < m, the nodes between 2 and 6 will be deleted, the final result is shown in the figure on the right.

The Resources class. This class is used for managing the resource in the workspace, including the SymbolMarkerLibrary object, the SymbolLineLibrary object, and the SymbolFillLibrary object.

Constructs a new Resources object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets the SymbolFill object in the Resources object.

The default value is an empty SymbolFillLibrary object.

Gets the SymbolLineLibrary object in the Resources object.

The default value is an empty SymbolLineLibrary object.

Gets the SymbolMarkerLibrary object in the Resources object.

The default value is an empty SymbolMarkerLibrary object.

Gets the Workspace object which is linked to the Resources object.

The default value is null.

Provides data for the Scenes.Added event.

Initializes a new instance of the SceneAddedEventArgs class with specified name of scene.

The specified name of scene.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the name of scene.

Represents the method that handles the Scenes.Added event.

The source of the event.A SceneAddedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Scenes.Cleared event.

Initializes a new instance of the SceneClearedEventArgs class with specified count of scenes cleared.

The count of scenes cleared.

Gets the count of scenes cleared.

Represents the method that handles a Scenes.Cleared event.

The source of the event.A SceneClearedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Scenes.Clearing event.

Initializes a new instance of the SceneClearingEventArgs class with specified parameter.

A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles the Scenes.Clearing event.

The source of the event.A SceneClearingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Scenes.Removed event.

Initializes a new instance of the SceneRemovedEventArgs class with the specified name of map.

The specified name of scene.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the name of scene.

Represents the method that handles a Scenes.Removed event.

The source of the event.A SceneRemovedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Scenes.Removing event.

Initializes a new instance of SceneRemovingEventArgs class with specified parameters.

The name of scene.A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets the name of scene.

Represents the method that handles the Scenes.Removing event.

The source of the event.A SceneRemovingEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Scenes.Renamed event.

Initializes a new instance of the SceneRenamedEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The old name of scene, which to be renamed.The new name of scene.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets the new name of scene.

Gets the old name of scene.

Represents the method that handles a Scenes.Renamed event.

The source of the event.A SceneRenamedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Scenes.Renaming event.

Initializes a new instance of the SceneRenamingEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The old name of scene, which to be renamed.The new name of scene.A boolean value represents whether can cancel the event. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

The string describing the object instance.

A string describing the object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Gets the new name of the scene.

Gets the old name of the scene.

Represents the method that handles the Scenes.Renaming event.

The source of the event.A SceneRenamingEventArgs that contains the event data.

The Scenes class.

Adds the scene inputted by user to the Scene collection. The position of the new item is at the end of the collection.

The name of 3d scene.The xml string used to create the scene.Returns the index of the newly added scene in this Scenes object.

Adds the scene inputted by user to the Scene collection. The position of the new item is at the specified index of the collection.

The specified index.The name of 3d scene.The xml string used to create the scene.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Modify the content of the scene with the specified index, without any modification on the name of the scene.

The specified index.The xml string used to create the scene.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Modify the content of the scene with the specified name, without any modification on the name of the scene.

The name of 3d scene.The xml string used to create the scene.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Get the content of the scene with the specified index.

The specified index.Returns a XML string that represents the scene with the specified index.

Get the content of the scene with the specified name.

The name of the specified scene.Returns a XML string that represents the scene with the specified name.

Deletes a saved scene with the specified index in the workspace. This method will not change the datasource and dataset.

The specified index of the scene.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Deletes a saved scene with the specified name in the workspace. This method will not change the datasource and dataset.

The name of 3d scene.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Deletes all the saved scenes in the scene. This method will not change the datasource and dataset.

Gets the index of 3d scene with the specified name.

The name of 3d scene.Returns the index of the 3d scene.

Returns a name of the scene with the specified name which is not used in the Scene collection.

The name of 3d scene.Returns the name of the scene new added.

Renames the scene.

The old name.The new name.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Returns an enumerator that can iterate through the collection.

An IEnumerator object used to iterate through a collection.

Gets the count of the Scenes objects in the specified Scenes collection.

Gets the name of 3d scene at the specified index in the 3d scene set.

The index of the specified 3d scene.

Triggers this event while renaming the scene.

Triggers this event while the rename operation finished.

Triggers this event while deleting the scene.

Triggers this event while the delete operation finished.

Triggers this event while adding the scene.

Triggers this event while clearing the scene.

Triggers this event while the clear operation finished.

Stores a pair of float values orderly.

References an empty, read-only object of Size2D, both Width and Height of which are the minimum value of the Double data type.

Creates a new Size2D object according to the specified arguments.

Specifies the width of the new Size2D.Specifies the height of the new Size2D.

Retrieves a string that indicates the width and height of this Size2D, and the format is Width=0,Height=0 .

A string that represents the current Size2D object.

Rounds the numeric property values of Size2D to the nearest integers respectively.For example: the given Size2D(2.3,6.8),the result will be Size2D(2,7) .

The Size2D to be converted.A Size2D structure.

Returns a new Size2D whose width and height property values are the smallest integers that are not less than the corresponding property values of the given Size2D.For example the given Size2D(2.3,6.8),the result will be Size2D(3,7)

The Size2D to be converted.A Size2D structure.

Returns a new Size2D whose width and height property values are the largest integers that are less than or equal to the corresponding property values of the specified Size2D.For example: the given Size2D(2.3,6.8),the result will be Size2D(2,6).

The Size2D to be converted.A Size2D structure.

Tests if the Size2D object on the left side of the operator is not equal to the one on the right side.

Size2D which is on the left of equal sign.Size2D which is on the right of equal sign.True, if the two Size2D instances are not equal; false if the two Size2D instances are equal.

Tests if the Size2D object on the left side of the operator is equal to the Size2D object on the right side.

The first Size2D to be compared.The second Size2D to be compared.True, if the two Size2D instances are equal; false if the two Size2D instances are not equal.

Returns the hash code of this Size2D.

A Integer to specify the hash code value of this Size2D.

Determines whether this Size2D contains the same coordinates with the specified Size2D.This strong-typed Equals method is provided to reduce the times of box and Unbox.

The object to be tested.True if current Size2D equals the specified Size2D. Otherwise, the method returns False.

Determines whether the width and height of the Size2D equals those of the specified Object.

The object to be tested.True, if the specified Object is a Size2D and the width and height of which is the same as this Size2D.

Gets or sets the height of the Size2D object.

The default value is 200.

Gets or sets the width of the Size2D object.

The default value is 200.

Gets a value that indicates whether the width and height of the Size2D is empty.that is, both the height and the weight are the minimum value of the Double data type.

The default value is false.

The SpatialIndexInfo class. This class provides the information of building spatial index, such as type of spatial index, count of leaf object, field of tile, width and height of tile, and size of multi-grid.

Constructs a new SpatialIndexInfo object.

Initializes a new SpatialIndexInfo object identical to the given SpatialIndexInfo object.

The specified SpatialIndexInfo object.

Creates a new SpatialIndexInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified type of SpatialIndex object. About the details, please refer to SpatialIndexType enumeration.

Creates a new SpatialIndexInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified count of the leaf objects.

Creates a new SpatialIndexInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified field of tile object.

Creates a new SpatialIndexInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The tile width. The unit is the same with the dataset extent.The tile height. The unit is the same with the dataset extent.

Creates a new SpatialIndexInfo object according to the specified arguments.

The specified center point of grid.The specified size of the first level grid, and unit is identical with dataset.The specified size of the second level grid, and unit is identical with dataset.The specified size of the third level grid, and unit is identical with dataset.

Releases all resources used by SpatialIndexInfo.

Retrieves a string representation of the SpatialIndexInfo object.

Returns a string that represents the current SpatialIndexInfo object.

Gets or sets the center point of the grid. Generally, the center point is specified with the center point of dataset.

The default value is X=0,Y=0 .

Gets or sets the size of the first level grid. This parameter can not be zero and unit is identical with the dataset.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the size of the second level grid. The unit is identical with the dataset.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the size of the third level grid. The unit is identical with the dataset.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the count of leaf objects of R tree spatial index.

The default value is -1.

Gets or sets the field of tile which applies to the tile spatial index.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the tile height of the spatial index. The unit is the same with the dataset extent.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the tile width of the spatial index. The unit is the same with the dataset extent.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the type of spatial index.

The default value is MultiLevelGrid.

Defines the types of spatial index. A spatial index is a data structure which is used to increase the efficiency of your spatial searches. Three types of spatial index are supported in SuperMap, namely R-tree spatial index, tile spatial index and multi-level grid spatial index.

Quadtree index.Q-tree is an important hierarchical dataset structure primarily used to represent the spatial hierarchy relationship under the two-dimensional coordinate system. Actually, it is an extension of the one-dimensional B-tree in the two-dimensional space. The Q-tree index is to divide a map into four equal parts, then subdivide each of the four parts into four equal subparts, and so on. Only if the pixels in any region are not entirely 0s or 1s, it should be subdivided.According to the array rule of the Hilbert coding, you can find the tiers to which each object's indexed value belongs in quad tree. In this way, the query efficiency enhanced.The following figure is a simple illustration of quad tree index.

Multi-level grid index, also called dynamic index.The multi-level grid index combines the advantages of the R-tree index and the Q-tree index and can support concurrent editing. Since the dynamic index is applicable to many kinds of data, you can choose it when you are not sure which type of index is best suited for your data.This multi-level grid index uses multi-level grids to organize and manage data. The basic method of the grid index is that it divides the dataset into equal size or unequal size grid, and records the locations of the grids which are occupied by the features. The regular grid is usually used in GIS . When performing spatial query, first the cells that contain the queried features will be calculated, then, the features will be queried rapidly. This multi-level grid index is used to optimize spatial query performance. The spatial grid index has three grid levels, namely one, two, and three grid levels in current version, and each level has its own distinct cell size. The first grid level has the smallest cell size. The optional second and third cell size must be larger than that of the preceding.When building the multi-level grid index, the cell size and the grid level will be set by system according to the actual data and distribution. So you don't need to set them.The virtue of this index is that its query speed is a little fast when the dataset performs the view operation.Note: This type supports the dynamically concurrent editing of the dataset.

Tile spatial index.The tile spatial index is to classify the features according to the attribute field of the dataset or the given range in SuperMap. The tile index improves the speed of the query through managing the classified features. As shown in the figure, an example of the tile index according to the given range.Specially, tile index can cache in local disk, which exists in binary file format. In this way, the query will be speed up. User can set the location saved the cache file and save it in local folder according to the FileCacheFolder property of the Environment class.The tile index applies to great capacity data whose data has exceeded million records.

R-tree spatial index.R-tree is an index structure based on disk, which is an natural extension to the B-tree (one dimension) in the multi-dimension space. It is convenient to integrate the current database system, such as Oracle, SQL Server, etc, and it supports diversified spatial query operation. In fact, it has been widely used and is one of the most popular spatial indexes.The R-tree spatial index defines several rectangles to contain geometric objects, that is, a rectangle contains some objects which have the close spatial locations. So the rectangle is regarded as the spatial index, which includes the pointers of the geometric objects.As shown in the figure, the rectangle named A includes the geometric objects such as D, E, F and G. The rectangle named B includes the geometric objects such as H, I, J and K. The rectangle named C includes the geometric object such as M, L and N. An example of R-tree spatial index displays as below.If you perform the spatial index, you should first determine which rectangles are in the search window, then determine which geometric objects are in those rectangles. In this way, the query will be speed up. Note: 1. This R-tree spatial index applies to the static data which in viewing and querying status.2. This R-tree spatial index supports concurrent operations for data.

None.No spatial index. It is suitable for low-volume data. Sometimes, a dataset with incomplete table information would be considered a dataset with no spatial index.

Specifies the constants that defines spatial query mode.Spatial query is a query method that selects map features based on their spatial relationships to other feature.For example, if you want to know the number of five-star hotels within 5km of Olympic venues in Beijing, you can first make a 5 km buffer of the Olympic venues; search the the hotels within these buffers using the Containing query method; then, from the result hotels, find the hotels whose star level is 5 using attribute query and the final result can be obtained.

Contain mode.Returns the objects which are completely contained in the search objects in the layer being searched.Note: The intersection of interiors of the search feature and searched features should not be empty. There is no containing query operation when using line to query region or using point to query the line or region.This query mode applies to all the points, lines and regions features.Below is the illustration of this spatial query mode.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

Within mode.Returns features that wholly contain the search feature. If the output feature is a region, the search feature must be wholly inside it. If the output feature is a line, the search feature must cover the searched feature. If the output feature is a point, the search feature must overlap with it. Within mode is the opposite operation of Contain mode.This query mode applies to point, line and region features.Note: There is no within relationship if query point with line or region, or query line with region.Below is the illustration for searching region with point.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

Cross mode.Returns line or region objects in the searched layer intersected with the searching line object.Note: The intersection of the interior of the search and searched features should not be empty. There must be a line feature when performing cross query operation.For this spatial query mode,the search objects should be lines and the searched objects should be lines or regions.Below is the illustration for this spatial query mode. The search features are in blue color, the searched features are in black color and the output features are in red color.

Overlap mode.Returns the objects which partly overlay with the searching objects in the layer being searched.This query mode only applies to two situations. One is when the search feature is line while the searched features are line; the other is when the search feature is region while the searched features are regions Where,the dimensions of the output features must be consistent with the search and searched features.Note: The point has no partly overlapping with the other features.Below is the illustration of this spatial query mode.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

Touch mode.Returns the objects which are adjacent with the boundaries of the searching objects in the layer being searched.This query mode does not apply for one situation, namely the search feature is point and the searched features are points.Note: The intersection of the search feature and the searched features is empty.Below is the illustration of this spatial query mode.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

Intersect mode.Returns the objects which intersect with the objects being searched.Note: If the search feature is a region, returns features that are wholly or partially contained within it, and features that wholly or partially contain it; if the search feature is not a region, returns features that wholly or partially contain the search feature.This query mode applies to all the points, lines and regions features.Below is the illustration of this spatial query mode.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

Disjoint mode.Returns the objects which completely are separated from the searching objects in the layer that is searched.Note: The search feature and the searched features are disjoint, namely, their intersection is empty.This query mode applies to all the points, lines and regions features.Below is the illustration of this spatial query mode.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

Identity mode.Returns objects in the searched layer that are fully overlapped with the searching object.Note: The type of the search feature must be identical with the searched features. The intersection of search and searched features should not be empty. But the boundary and interior of search feature has no intersection with the exterior of the searched feature.This query mode applies to all the points, lines and regions features.Below is the illustration of this spatial query mode.Green, black, and red respectively indicate the search object, the searched object, and the result geometry.

None spatial query.

Defines the spatial relation constant when update the dataset attribute.

Contain. Suppose the dataset or recordset object that provide the attribute is A, the dataset or recordset object been updated is B. If A contains B, the attribute of B will be updated by A. As shown below, green represent the object provide the attribute, red represent the object been updated that meet the contain relation, black represent the objects that do not meet the spatial relationship.

Within. Suppose the dataset or recordset object that provide the attribute is A, the dataset or recordset object been updated is B. If A is within B, the attribute of B will be updated by A. As shown below, green represent the object provide the attribute, red represent the object been updated that meet the within relation, black represent the objects that do not meet the spatial relationship.

Intersection. Suppose the dataset or recordset object that provide the attribute is A, the dataset or recordset object been updated is B. If A intersect with B, the attribute of B will be updated by A. As shown below, green represent the object provide the attribute, red represent the object been updated that meet the intersection relation, black represent the objects that do not meet the spatial relationship.

Spatio-temporal object set class

Construct a new raster spatio-temporal object set.

Creates a new spatio-temporal object by given parameters and adds it to the current spatio-temporal object set.

Spatio-temporal object name.Description of spatio-temporal objectExtension information of spatio-temporal objectNew spatio-temporal object

Adds a spatio-temporal object.

Spatio-temporal object to be addedReturns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Removes spatio-temporal object with specific index.

The index of spatio-temporal object to be removedReturns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Removes spatio-temporal object with specific name.

The name of spatio-temporal object to be removedReturns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Removes all spatio-temporal objects.

Whether the spatio-temporal object with specific name exists

Spatio-temporal object name.Returns true if it exists; otherwise false.

Generates a XML file and saves it under strXMLPath. The XML file saves the information of the spatio-temporal object set.

XML file path.XML file content

Restore the spatio-temporal object set by the XML file.

XML file path.Returns true if restored successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the number of the spatio-temporal objects.

Gets the spatio-temporal object with specified index.

StandardMargin.

Constructs a new StandardMargin object, and its scale is 1:1,000,000.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoCardinal object.

The specified StandardMargin object.

Creates a new LayersControl object according to the specified arguments.

Specifies the type of scale.

Creates a new LayersControl object according to the specified arguments.

Specified sheet name. Throws an exception if the specified name is not standard.

Creates a new LayersControl object according to the specified arguments.

Scale Type:The lower left corner coordinates, the X and Y values can not be negative.

Creates a new StandardMargin object according to the specified arguments. When the map sheet type is customized sheet, the size of the constructed sheet is decided by the given bounds; when the sheet type is 40*50 or 50*50, the lower left corner point of the sheet range is the start point of the sheet.

Scale Type:Map sheet type in big scale.The given sheet range. When the sheet type is 40*50 or 50*50, the lower left corner point of the sheet range is the start point of the sheet.

Make all map sheet elements visible.

Make all map sheet elements invisible.

Calculate the name of the map sheet in accordance with the specified lower left corner coordinates and scales.

A Point that represents the lower-left corner of the rectangle.The scale specified.Return the sheet name.

Create the standard margin, save it to specified datasource in the format of CAD dataset.

The specified datasource.The specified name of dataset.The specified standard map sheet class object.Return the CAD dataset which contains standard map sheet and has specified name.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets the offset setting of the sheet element object.

Gets the text style of the sheet element.

Gets or sets whether the specified sheet is visible.

The type of the specified sheet.

Gets the latitude and longitude range of the sheet.

The default value is {Left=102,Bottom=32,Right=108,Top=36}.

Gets or sets the type of the projected coordinate system.

The default value is an emtpy PrjCoordSys object.

Gets the scale Type.

The default value is MarginStandardType.Scale1000000.

Gets or sets the type of the layers,

The default value is MarginStandardType.GB_T_20257.

Gets or sets the sheet type with larger scale (1:500 - 1:2000),

The default value is MarginLargeScaleSheetType.Sheet40x50.

Gets or sets the coordinates system type of the sheet with larger scale.

The default value is MarginLargeScaleCoordSysType.UserDefine.

Gets or sets square grid type.

The default value is MarginKilometerGridType.Cross.

Gets or sets the nap name. The default value is Untitled.

Gets the sheet name (which is the sheet NO).

The default value is I.

Gets or sets map publishing unit name.

The default value is State Bureau of Surveying and Mapping.

Gets or sets publishing security classification text.

The default value is Secret ★ Long-term.

Gets or sets the information, usually placed in the lower right corner of the map sheet, including schema, coordinate system, elevation datum, aerial photography, publication, etc.. The default value is System.String[].

Gets or sets annotation text array.The default value is System.String[] 。

Gets or sets the neighboring sheet name. The default value is System.String[] 。

Gets the neighboring sheet NO. The default value is System.String[] 。

Gets or sets the row spacing of map display information. The default value is 2. Unit: mm.

Gets or sets the row spacing of annotation text information. The default value is 2. Unit: mm.

Gets or sets the blue value. The default is 0.

Gets or sets the horizontal grid length of the square grid. The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the vertical grid length of the square grid. The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the number of interpolation on the border to ensure the accuracy of the projection conversion. The default value is 72.

Gets or sets the band number of the national coordinate system of a large scale map. It's required to input by users. The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the meridian convergence angle. Meridian convergence angle refers to the angle between the adjacent meridian. The default value is 1.4834.

Gets or sets the declination. It refers to the angle between the earth's magnetic field magnetic pole North direction and the direction of the geographical North. The default value is -1.67.

Gets or sets the distance between the external bound and internal bound. The default value is 10. Unit: mm.

Get or sets the line width of the external bound. The default value is 1。

Gets or sets the length of the cross of the square grid. The default value is 10.

Gets or sets the text style of the basic scale.

Standard sheet offset setting class.

Gets or sets the offset from upper middle sheet to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from upper right sheet to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from upper left sheet to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from lower left sheet to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from lower right sheet to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the publication unit text to the default sheet position.

Gets or sets the offset from the annotation to the default sheet position.

Gets or sets the offset from the map information annotation to the default sheet position.

Gets or sets the offset from security classification text to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the basic scale text to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the text scale to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the lower middle point of the upper middle map name to the upper middle point on the inner frame.

Gets or sets the offset from the map name on upper right corner to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the map name on upper left corner to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the map name on lower left corner to the default position.

Gets or sets the offset from the map name on lower right corner to the default position.

China standard sheet style class. It provides the style information of all elements.

Gets or sets the style of the map name.

Gets the style of the sheet name.

Gets or sets the style of the publication unit.

Gets or sets the style of the security classification.

Gets or sets the style of the map information.

Gests or sets the style of the annotation text.

Gets or sets the style of the neighboring sheet name.

Gets or sets the style of the neighboring sheet NO.

Gets or sets the style of the text scale.

Gets or sets the style of the sheet NO on four corners.

Gets or sets the style of the sheet name all around.

Gets or sets the style of the latitude and longitude.

Gets or sets the text style of the basic scale.

The enumeration defines the standard sheet element type constants.

The scale.

the map name.

Maps

Publication unit

Grid

Adjacent chart

Elevation chart

Depth chart

Slope scale

Square grid of neighboring band

North direction map

Annotation information

Sheet name

Security classification on the frame

The text "People's Republic of China basic scale topographic map"

Text scale

Scale of the ocean area

Display sheet N.O. in the four corners of the frame

Display the map name in the four corners of the frame

Adjacent sheet N.O.

Adjacent map name

The enumeration defines the standard scale type constants.

1：500

1：1000

1：2000

1：5000

1：10000

1：25000

1：50000

1：100000

1：250000

1：500000

1：1000000

The enumeration defines standard constant type.

Standard map sheet based on new GB (GB/T 20257.2-2006).

Defines the range type constants of the large scale sheet.

40*50 sheet

50*50 sheet

Rectangle sheet

Defines the coordinate system type constants of the large scale sheet.

User coordinate system.

National coordinate system.

Defines the square grid type constants, to indicate it is a cross type or a solid line type.

cross

Solid line

Specifies the constants that define the statistic methods.

Calculates the standard deviation of the field. The general formula used is:Represents the variance of the field, x represents the value of the selected field, n represents the number of the record in the field, i represents the integer from 1 to n, M represents the mean value of the field.

Calculates the variance of the field. The general formula used is:V represents the variance of the field, x represents the value of the selected field, n represents the number of the record in the field, i represents the integer from 1 to n, M represents the mean value of the field.

Decides the sum of the field.

Decides the average value of the field.

Decides the minimum value of the field.

Decides the maximum value of the field.

The StatisticsResult class.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets the maximum value in the grid dataset.

Gets the minimum value of the grid matrix in grid dataset.

Gets the average value in the grid dataset.

Gets the variance value in the grid dataset.

Gets the standard deviation value in the grid dataset.

Gets the median value in the grid dataset.

Gets the minority value in the grid dataset.

Gets the majority value in the grid dataset.

Provides the data of the SteppedEventArgs event.

Initializes a new instance of the SteppedEventArgs class with the given arguments.

The percent of the current process have done.The specified remained time to complete the current operation.The specified title of the current operation.The message of the current process.The specified name of the method invoked the current operation.

Initializes a new instance of step event according to the parameters.

Gets the percent of the completed the operation.

Gets the remained time to complete the current operation. The unit is second.

Gets the title of the current operation.

Gets the information of the current operation.

Gets the name of the method invoked the current operation.

Gets or sets whether the event is canceled.

Represents the method that handles the SteppedEvent.

The source event.A SteppedEventArgs that contains the event data.

The enumeration defines a multi line text layout method type constant.

Left alignment.

Center alignment.

Right alignment.

Two ends alignment.

Defines the stroke types for marker symbols.

Point.

Line.

Arc.

Polygon.

Ellipse.

Rectangle.

Round rectangle.

Text.

Pie.

Chord.

Bitmap.

Icon.

Compound.

The Symbol class. All the classes such as the SymbolMarker class, the SymbolLine class and the SymbolFill class are all the subclass the Symbol class.

Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

The specified target device.The specified Geometry object which is used to get the position where the Symbol object is drawn.1.If the Symbol object is the SymbolMarker object, it will be drawn at each point from the point collection which constructs the Geometry object. The Geometry object can be a point, line or region object.2.If the Symbol object is the SymbolLine object, it will draw a line which is constructed by the points which are the control points of the Geometry object with the style determined by this SymbolLine object. The Geometry object can be a line or region object.3.If the Symbol object is the SymbolFill object, it will draw a region which is constructed by the points which are the control points of the Geometry object with the filling style determined by this SymbolFill object. The Geometry object can be a line or region object. If the Geometry is the line the line can form a enclosed region.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Draws the Symbol object on the specified Bitmap object at the specified position.

The specified Bitmap.The specified Geometry object which is used to get the position where the Symbol object is drawn.1.If the Symbol object is the SymbolMarker object, it will be drawn at each point from the point collection which constructs the Geometry object. The Geometry object can be a point, line or region object.2.If the Symbol object is the SymbolLine object, it will draw a line which is constructed by the points which are the control points of the Geometry object with the style determined by this SymbolLine object. The Geometry object can be a line or region object.3.If the Symbol object is the SymbolFill object, it will draw a region which is constructed by the points which are the control points of the Geometry object with the filling style determined by this SymbolFill object. The Geometry object can be a line or region object. If the Geometry is the line the line can form a enclosed region.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

The specified target device.The set of (x,y) coordinates used to get the drawing position.1.If the Symbol object is the SymbolMarker object, the symbols will be drawn at each coordinate point.2.If the Symbol object is the SymbolLine object, it will draw a line which is constructed by the points from the Point2Ds object. The Point2Ds object must contain two or more points.3.If the Symbol object is the SymbolFill object, it will draw a region which is constructed by the points If the Symbol object is the SymbolFill object, it will draw a region which is constructed by the points. The Point2Ds object must contain at least three points which cannot construct a beeline.The specified style of the Symbol object. This parameter can be null. If the parameter is null, the style of the Symbol object will be the default style.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Draws the Symbol object on the specified Bitmap object at the specified position.

The specified Bitmap.The set of (x,y) coordinates used to get the drawing position.1.If the Symbol object is the SymbolMarker object, the symbols will be drawn at each coordinate point.2.If the Symbol object is the SymbolLine object, it will draw a line which is constructed by the points from the Point2Ds object. The Point2Ds object must contain two or more points.3.If the Symbol object is the SymbolFill object, it will draw a region which is constructed by the points If the Symbol object is the SymbolFill object, it will draw a region which is constructed by the points. The Point2Ds object must contain at least three points which cannot construct a beeline.The specified style of the Symbol object. This parameter can be null. If the parameter is null, the style of the Symbol object will be the default style.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Returns the character string describing the Symbol object and its format is that "Name=,ID=".

Returns the character string describing the Symbol object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the name of the Symbol object. The name of the Symbol object can be the same as the one of others in the same symbol library.

Gets the ID of the Symbol object. The ID of the Symbol object must be unique in the same symbol library.

Gets the SymbolLibrary object which the Symbol object belongs to.

Gets the type of Symbol object.There are three types: marker symbol, line symbol, and fill symbol.

The SymbolFill class inherited fro the Symbol class. The SymbolFill object utilizes the SymbolFill items to indicate the SymbolFill object.

Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

Draw the fill symbol object in the position specified by Bitmap. Drawing uses screen coordinate.

Draw the fill symbol object in the position specified by the device. Drawing uses screen coordinate.

Draw the fill symbol object in the position specified by Bitmap. Drawing uses screen coordinate.

Constructs a new SymbolFill object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolFill object.

The specified SymbolFill object.

Adds the specified SymbolFillBase object to the SymbolFill object.

The specified SymbolFillBase object. The index of the SymbolFillBase object to be added.

Inserts a new SymbolFillBase object at the specified index.

The specified index. The specified SymbolFillBase object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the SymbolFillBase object at the specified index.

The specified index of the SymbolFillBase object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the index of the SymbolFillBase object in the SymbolFill object.

The specified SymbolFillBase object. The index of the SymbolFillBase object.

Move up the SymbolFillBase object at the specified index.

The specified index of the SymbolFillBase object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move down the SymbolFillBase object at the specified index.

The specified index of the SymbolFillBase object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move the SymbolFillBase object at the specified index to the top.

The specified index of the SymbolFillBase object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move the SymbolFillBase object at the specified index to the bottom.

The specified index of the SymbolFillBase object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the type of symbol object.

Gets or sets the SymbolFillBase object at the specified index.

The specified index of the SymbolFillBase object.

Gets the count of the SymbolFillBase objects of the SymbolFill objects.

The SymbolFillBase class.

Initializes a new SymbolFillBase object.

Creates a new SymbolFillBase object according to the specified arguments.

The specified file name.

Creates a new SymbolFillBase object according to the specified arguments.

The specified SymbolFillMarker object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolFillBase object.

The specified SymbolFillBase object.

Exports the specified symbol to a picture. Symbols of the both Bitmap and MarkerSymbol types can be exported to pictures.

The target file name. The foreground color of the specified symbol. The background color of the specified symbol. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Fills the symbol with the specified picture file. When finished, the Type property changes to Bitmap.

The name of the specified picture file. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Set the data needed by the Bitmap fill type. When finished, the Type property changes to Bitmap.

The specified Bitmap object.

Gets the data needed for the Bitmap fill type. Null will be returned if the fill type is not Bitmap.

The data needed for the Bitmap fill type. Null will be returned if the fill type is not Bitmap.

Sets the data needed for the MarkerSymbol fill type. When finihsed, the type of the object changes to MarkerSymbol.

The specified SymbolFillMarker object.

Gets the data needed for the MarkerSymbol fill type. Null will be returned if the fill type is not MarkerSymbol.

The data needed for the SymbolFillMarker fill type. Null will be returned if the fill type is not SymbolFillMarker.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the resolution of the SymbolFillBase object.

Gets the type of the specified SymbolFillBase object.

Gets or sets foreground color of the SymbolFillBase object.

Gets or sets whether the fixed foreground color is employed for the SymbolFillBase object.

Gets or sets background color of the SymbolFillBase object.

Gets or sets whether the fixed background color is employed for the SymbolFillBase object.

Defines the SymbolFillBase types.

None.

Bitmap.

Marker symbol.

The SymbolFillLibrary class. This class is the subclass of the SymbolLibrary class. The properties and methods of this class is provided by the SymbolLibrary class.

The SymbolLibrary class. This class is the parent class of the SymbolMarkerLibrary class, the SymbolLineLibrary class and the SymbolFillLibrary class.

Finds the SymbolGroup object which the symbol with the given ID belongs to.

The specified ID of the symbol.Returns the SymbolGroup object.

Tests whether this SymbolLibrary object contains the given ID or not.

The specified ID to be tested.Returns true if the SymbolLibrary object contains the given ID; otherwise, false.

Finds the Symbol object with the specified ID in the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified ID.The symbol object.

Finds the Symbol object with the given name in the SymbolLibrary object and returns the first Symbol object whose name is identical with the specified name.

The specified name.The symbol object.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The specified file name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Imports the existing symbol library file to the SymbolLibrary object. This operation will remove the former symbols in the current symbol library.

The name of the existing symbol library file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Removes the Symbol object with the specified ID in the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified ID of the Symbol object to be removed.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.Returns the ID of the Symbol.

Clears all the Symbol objects in the SymbolLibrary object.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.The target SymbolGroup object which the new Symbol object will be added to.Returns the ID of the symbol newly added.

Moves the specified Symbol object to the specified SymbolGroup object.

The ID of the specified Symbol object.The specified SymbolGroup object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the root group of the symbol library.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The specified file name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The name of the existing symbol library file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.Returns the ID of the Symbol.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.The target SymbolGroup object which the new Symbol object will be added to.Returns the ID of the symbol newly added.

The SymbolFillMarker class.

Constructs a new SymbolFillMarker object.

Returns the string describing the SymbolFillMarker object.

The string describing the SymbolFillMarker object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the width of the fill.

Gets or sets the height of the fill.

Gets or sets the ID of the marker corresponding to the fill.

Gets or sets the size of the marker corresponding to the fill.

Gets or sets the rotation of the marker corresponding to the fill.

Gets or sets the position of the marker corresponding to the fill.

The SymbolGroup class. This class provides a logical structure for managing groups and symbols in symbol libraries. This class cannot get system symbols, and it provide operations such as the adding, deleting, importing, and exporting of symbol objects. These operations are provided by the SymbolLibrary class.

Gets the index of the Symbol object in the SymbolGroup object with the specified ID.

The ID to be tested.The index of the Symbol object in the SymbolGroup object with the specified ID.

Moves the symbol object with the specified index to the specified symbol group. The moved symbol object will be appended to the end of the target symbol group, with the ID of the symbol object unchaned.

The specified index of the symbol object.The specified target group.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the parent group of this SymbolGroup object. The root group of a symbol library doesn't have a parent group.

Gets the child groups of this SymbolGroup object.

Gets or sets the name of the SymbolGroup object. If the name has existed in the parent group of this SymbolGroup object it will throw an exception.

Gets the Symbol object with the specified index in the SymbolGroup object.

The index of specified symbol in the SymbolGroup object.

Gets the SymbolLibrary object which is related with the SymbolGroup object.

Gets the count of the Symbol objects of this SymbolGroup object.

The SymbolGroups class. The objects of the class is the set of SymbolGroup. It's used to manage the subgroup of the Symbolgroup. It is used to create or remove the subgroup.

Returns an enumerator that can iterate through the collection.

An IEnumerator object used to iterate through a collection.

Gets the index of the SymbolGroup object with the specified name in the SymbolGroups object.

The specified name of the SymbolGroup object.Returns the index.

Creates a new SymbolGroup object in the SymbolGroups object as the child group.

The specified name of the new SymbolGroup object. If the name has existed it will throw exception.Returns the SymbolGroup object newly created.

Tests whether the given name has existed in the SymbolGroups object or not.

The name to be tested.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Removes the SymbolGroup object with the specified name in the collection. Here only the logical structure will be changed, with the subgroups and symbols in the group not changed.

The name of the SymbolGroup object to remove.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the SymbolGroup object with the specified index in the SymbolGroups object. For more information about the structure of the SymbolGroups object, please refer to the remarks in the SymbolGroups class.

The index of the specified subgroup in the subgroup set.

Gets the SymbolGroup object with the specified name in the SymbolGroups object. For more information about the structure of the SymbolGroups object, please refer to the remarks in the SymbolGroups class.

The name of the specified subgroup.

Gets the count of the SymbolGroup objects contained by the SymbolGroups object. For more information about the structure of the SymbolGroups object, please refer to the remarks in the SymbolGroups class.

The SymbolLine class. This is the subclass of the Symbol class.

Draw the line symbol object in the specified position at the specified device. screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Draw the line symbol object in the specified position at the specified Bitmap. screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Draw the line symbol object in the specified position at the specified device. screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Draw the line symbol object in the specified position at the specified Bitmap. screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Constructs a new SymbolLine object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolLine object.

The specified SymbolLine object.

Gets the decoration object at the specified position.

The specified decoration position. The decoration of the line symbol.

Sets the decoration object of the line symbol according to the specified position.

The specified decoration position. The decoration object needs to be set.

Adds the specified child line object to the line symbol object.

The specified child line object. The index at which the specified child line object will be added to the line symbol object.

Inserts the specified child line object at the specified index of the line symbol object.

The specified index of the line symbol object. The specified child line object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the child line object at the specified index of the line symbol object.

The specified index of the line symbol object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves up the stroke object at the specified index of the line symbol object.

The specified index of the stroke object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Moves down the stroke object at the specified index of the line symbol object.

The specified index of the stroke object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move the stroke object at the specified index of the line symbol object to top.

The specified index of the stroke object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move the stroke object at the specified index of the line symbol object to bottom.

The specified index of the stroke object. Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the type of symbol object.

Gets or sets the stroke object at the specified index. For more details about stroke objects, please refer to the SymbolLineBase class.

The specified index of the stroke object.

Gets the count of stroke objects composing the line symbol object.

3D line symbol parameters, which contains the parameter value, the value range, and the type, is the meta information of the parameters.

Gets the description of the parameters of the 3D line symbol.

Gets the label of the 3D line symbol parameters. Used to describe the contents of the mouse when it is suspended above the parameters.

Gets the maximum value of the 3D line symbol parameters.

Gets the minimum value of the 3D line symbol parameters.

Gets the name of the parameters of the 3D line symbol.

Gets the type of the parameters of the 3D line symbol.

Gets or sets the value of the parameters of the 3D line symbol.

The SymbolLineBase class.

Constructs a new SymbolLineBase object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolLineBase object.

The specified SymbolLineBase object.

Creates a new SymbolLineBase object according to the specified arguments.

The specified array of dash types. The specified child line type.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the distances of the repeat part and the blank part.

Returns or sets the type of the child line.

Gets or sets the horizontal offset of the child line.

Gets or sets the vertical offset of the child line.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the child line. The unit is 0.1 degrees. Only applicable to font symbol.

Gets or sets the join type of the child line.

Gets or sets the cap type of the child line.

Gets or sets the dash type of the child line.

Gets or sets whether the child line begins with the solid part or blank part. True indicates the child line begins with the solid part, while false indicates the blank part.

Gets or sets the font of the character in the child line. Only valid if the child line is of the character related types.

Gets or sets the ASCII code of the character in the child line. Only valid if the child line is of the character related types.

Gets or sets the color for the child line if the fixed color is employed.

Gets or sets whether the child line is in fixed color.

Gets or sets whether the child line is at fixed width.

Gets or sets the width of the child line if the fixed width is employed.

Gets or sets the length of the child line in the vertical direction. Only applicable to up-down style types.

Defines unit types.

Short-dash (system)

Short-dash (align center)

Short-bar (align top)

Short-bar (align bottom)

Up down cross.

Short long cross (up).

Short long cross (down).

Short long cross (short down long up).

Short long cross (short up long down).

Backlash.

Slash (/).

Slash (up down cross).

Arrow.

Arrow (>).

Wave.

Great wall.

Box.

Horizontal-vertical cross.

Cross (X ).

Cross (up).

Cross (down).

Cross (horizontal-vertical).

Arc (down).

Arc (up).

Arc (up down cross).

Circle (solid, line center).

Circle (hollow, line center).

Circle (up down cross).

Character (horizontal).

Character (horizontal & reverse).

Character (vertical).

Character (vertical & reverse).

Character (fixed angle).

Character (free angle).

Short-dash with right arrow.

Short-dash with left arrow.

Short-dash with double arrow.

Short-dash with left arrow in the middle.

Short-dash with reverse arrow in the middle.

Electronics line.

Electronics line (with middle line).

Electronics line (special).

Electronics line (circle).

Horizontal double line (align center).

Horizontal double line (align top).

Horizontal double line (align bottom).

Gradient line type.

Custom symbol (relative angle).

Custom symbol (fixed angle).

3D symbol type.

The SymbolLineDecoration class. This class is used to add decorations such as arrows, ellipses, marker symbols at the head or tail of the line symbol.

Constructs a new SymbolLineDecoration object.

Creates a new SymbolLineDecoration object according to the specified arguments.

The specified deocration type.

Creates a new SymbolLineDecoration object according to the specified arguments.

The specified marker symbol index.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolLineDecoration object.

The specified SymbolLineDecoration object.

Returns the character string describing the SymbolLineDecoration object and its format is {Type=,MarkerID=,Width=,Height=,Rotation=}.

The string describing the SymbolLineDecoration object and its format is {Type=,MarkerID=,Width=,Height=,Rotation=}.

Gets or sets the width of the line symbol decoration. The unit is 0.1 mm.

Gets or sets the height of the line symbol decoration. The unit is 0.1 mm.

Gets or sets the rotation of the line symbol decoration. The unit is 0.1 mm.

Gets or sets the type of the line symbol decoration. About more information about line symbol decoration type, please refer to DecorationType.

Gets or sets the ID of the symbol used by the line symbol decoration of the custom type. This property is only valid if Type is set to DecorationType.Customization.

The SymbolLineLibrary class. This class is the subclass of the SymbolLibrary class. The properties and methods of this class is provided by the SymbolLibrary class.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The specified file name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The name of the existing symbol library file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.Returns the ID of the Symbol.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.The target SymbolGroup object which the new Symbol object will be added to.Returns the ID of the symbol newly added.

The SymbolMarker class inherited from the Symbol class.

Draw the point symbol object in the specified position at the specified device. Screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Draw the point symbol object in the specified position at the specified Bitmap. Screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Draw the point symbol object in the specified position at the specified device. Screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Draw the point symbol object in the specified position at the specified Bitmap. Screen coordinates is used when drawing.

Constructs a new SymbolMarker object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolMarker object.

The specified SymbolMarker object.

Inserts the specified stroke object in the SymbolMarker object.

The specified stroke object.The index of the SymbolMarker object to add stroke object.

Inserts the specified stoke object at the specified index of the SymbolMarker object.

The specified index.The specified stroke object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the specified stroke object at the specified index of the SymbolMarker object.

The specified index.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the index of the specified stroke object in the SymbolMarker object.

The specified stroke object.The index of the specified stroke object in the SymbolMarker object.

Move up the stroke object at the specified index of the SymbolMarker object.

The specified index of the stroke object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move down the stroke object at the specified index of the SymbolMarker object.

The specified index of the stroke object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move the stroke object at the specified index of the SymbolMarker object to top.

The specified index of the stroke object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Move the stroke object at the specified index of the SymbolMarker object to bottom.

The specified index of the stroke object.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the display size of the symbol according to the specified size.

The specified symbol size. The calculated display size.

Gets the symbol size according to the specified display size.

The specified display size. The calculated symbol size.

Exports the symbol into Geometry according to specified arguments. The exported geometry type will be determined by the original symbol type. If the symbol is a raster symbol, it will be exported into a GeoPicture object; a multiple-stroke object will be exported into a GeoCompound object.

The specified bounds of the symbol.The exported geometric object.

The specified center.The specified symbol size.The exported geometric object.

Imports the geometry objects into symbols. If the geometry object is of the GeoPicture type, it will be imported as a raster object. If it is of the GeoCompound type, it will be imported as a vector symbol.

The specified geometric object to import.The specified bounds for the imported symbol.The ID of the imported geometry object.

Gets the type of symbol object.

Gets or sets start position of the symbol.

Gets or sets the default size of the marker symbol object.

Gets or sets the stroke object at the specified index.

The specified index of the stroke object.

Gets the count of the stroke objects of the marker symbol object.

Gets the base point of the marker symbol object.

Returns the minimum bounding box that contains the Geometry object.

The SymbolMarker3D class.

Constructs a new SymbolMarker3D object.

Creates a new SymbolMarker3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified thumbnail object.The specified model object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolMarker3D object.

The given SymbolMarker3D object.

Returns the thumbnail information of the SymbolMarker3D object.

The thumbnail information of the SymbolMarker3D object.

Sets the thumbnail information of the SymbolMarker3D object.

The thumbnail information of the SymbolMarker3D object.

Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

Draws the Symbol object on the specified Bitmap object at the specified position.

Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

Draws the Symbol object on the specified Bitmap object at the specified position.

Frees the resources of the current SymbolMarker3D object before it is reclaimed by the garbage collector.

Gets the type of symbol object.

The SymbolMarkerLibrary class. This class is the subclass of the SymbolLibrary class. The properties and methods of this class is provided by the SymbolLibrary class.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The specified file name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Exports the SymbolLibrary object to the symbol library file.

The name of the existing symbol library file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.Returns the ID of the Symbol.

Adds the specified Symbol object to the SymbolLibrary object.

The specified Symbol object.The target SymbolGroup object which the new Symbol object will be added to.Returns the ID of the symbol newly added.

The SymbolMarkerStroke class.

Creates a new SymbolMarkerStroke object according to the specified arguments.

the type of the geometric object corresponding to the stroke. Geometry corresponds to the coordinate values of the Double type and will be cast into Int32, with the overflow determination omitted. Currently, GeoPoint, GeoLine, GeoArc, GeoRegion, GeoEllipse, GeoRectangle, GeoRoundRectangle, GeoText, GeoPie, GeoChord, GeoPicture are supported.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolMarkerStroke object.

The given SymbolMarkerStroke object.

Gets the type of the geometric object corresponding to the stroke. Currently, GeoPoint, GeoLine, GeoArc, GeoRegion, GeoEllipse, GeoRectangle, GeoRoundRectangle, GeoText, GeoPie, GeoChord, GeoPicture are supported.

Sets the type of the geometric object corresponding to the stroke. Currently, GeoPoint, GeoLine, GeoArc, GeoRegion, GeoEllipse, GeoRectangle, GeoRoundRectangle, GeoText, GeoPie, GeoChord, GeoPicture are supported. For types not supported, exceptions will be thrown.

The specified geometric type.

Gets the texture for the stroke.

The texture for the stroke.

Sets the texture for the stroke.

The texture for the stroke.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets the type of stroke.

Gets or sets the type of the line stroke employed by the stroke object.

Gets or sets the type of the fill stroke employed by the stroke object.

Gets or sets whether the stroke object employs the fixed fill color. True indicates to employ the fixed color and false indicates the custom color.

Gets or sets whether the stroke object employs the fixed line color. True indicates to employ the fixed color and false indicates the custom color.

Gets or sets whether the stroke object employs the fixed transparency.

Gets or sets the line color of the stroke object.

Gets or sets the line width of the stroke object.

Gets or sets the fill color of the stroke object.

Gets or set the repeating number of the tiling of the landscape orientation. The side of the three-dimensional object can be decorated by the pictures. The number of the tiling along the landscape orientation and the portrait and the size of the specified picture will determine the style of the texture of the side. The picture may be stretched accordingly. The property is in double.

The default value is 1.0.

Gets or set the repeating number of the tiling of the portrait. The side of the three-dimensional object can be decorated by the pictures. The number of the tiling along the landscape orientation and the portrait and the size of the specified picture will determine the style of the texture of the side. The picture may be stretched accordingly. The property is in double.

The default value is 1.0.

Sets or gets the transparency of the stroke object.

Constructs a new SymbolPipeNode object.

Creates a new object according to the specified SymbolPipeNode.

Specified SymbolPipeNode.

Gets symbol parameters list, used to modify the parameters.

Gets the symbol snapshot.

Sets the symbol snapshot.

Gets the symbol type.

Pipe point symbol parameter class, which contains the parameter value, the value range, the type, is the meta information of the parameters. The symbol is defined by CoverLength, SliceNum, by setting the two parameters to define different types of pipe point symbol. The CoverLength value is 0 indicating that the pipe point symbol is not with a hoop; the CoverLength>0 indicates the length of the hoop, and the default value is 0.015. SliceNum means the smoothness level of the pipe point elbow, the default value is 1, the greater the value, the more smooth the elbow.

Gets the description of the parameters of the pipe point symbols.

Gets the label of the pipe point symbol parameters. Used to describe the contents of the mouse when it is suspended above the parameters.

Gets the maximum value of the pipe point symbol parameters.

Gets the minimum value of the pipe point symbol parameters.

Gets the name of the parameters of the pipe point symbols.

Gets the type of the parameters of the pipe point symbols.

Gets the value of the parameters of the pipe point symbols.

3D strip tracking line symbol. Set the line objects to the symbol to realize the effect of the highlight strip movement along the line.

Constructs a new SymbolRibbonTrail object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given SymbolRibbonTrail object.

The specified SymbolRibbonTrail object.

Set a Bitmap object as a snapshot of the SymbolRibbonTrail object.

The specified Bitmap object.

Gets the snapshot of the SymbolRibbonTrail object.

The Bitmap object.

Gets the array of the parameters of the 3D line type, which contains the parameter value, the value range, the type, meta data and so on.

SymbolLine3DSetting array object

Draw symbol, which is based on the base class. Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

The specified target device.The specified Geometry object which is used to get the position where the Symbol object is drawn.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Draw symbol, which is based on the base class. Draws the Symbol object on the specified Bitmap object at the specified position. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

The specified Bitmap object.The specified Geometry object which is used to get the position where the Symbol object is drawn.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Draw symbol, which is based on the base class. Draw the Symbol object in the specified position of the specified device. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

The specified target device.Coordinates string to specify the drawing positions, which are used as the control points to draw the line symbol. The coordinates array must contain two or more than two points.The specified style of the Symbol object. This parameter can be null. If the parameter is null, the style of the Symbol object will be the default style.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Draw symbol, which is based on the base class. Draws the Symbol object on the specified Bitmap object at the specified position. The drawing uses screen coordinate.

The specified Bitmap.Coordinates string to specify the drawing positions, which are used as the control points to draw the line symbol. The coordinates array must contain two or more than two points.The specified style of the Symbol object. This parameter can be null. If the parameter is null, the style of the Symbol object will be the default style.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the symbol type of the SymbolRibbonTrail object.

Defines the enumeration of the symbol types.

2D point symbol.

2D line symbol.

2D fill symbol.

3D point symbol.

3D line symbol.

3D fill symbol.

3D stripe tracking line symbol

3D pipe node symbol

Defines text alignment constants.The position of each TextPart object of the GeoText object is determined by the anchor point and the text alignment mode. If the anchor of the TextPart object is fixed, the alignment mode determines the relative position of the TexPart object and the anchor point, therefore determining the position of the TextPart object.

Text is vertically aligned at the center, and horizontally on the right.In this alignment, the middle point of the right edge of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point. The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is aligned at the center.In this alignment, the center point of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the center, and horizontally on the left.In this alignment, the middle point of the left edge of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point. The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally on the right.In this alignment, the lower left point of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned at the center.In this alignment, the middle point of the bottom edge of boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the left.In this alignment, the lower left point of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is aligned to the right with the base line.In this alignment, the right endpoint of the baseline of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is aligned to the centered with the base line.In this alignment, the middle point of the baseline of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is aligned to the left with the base line.In this alignment, the left endpoint of the baseline of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the right.In this alignment, the lower left point of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned at the center.In this alignment, the middle point of the top edge of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

Text is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the left.In this alignment, the upper left point of the boundary rectangle of the text part lies in the position of the anchor point.The following is an example of this alignment.

The TextPart class.This class represents the part of the GeoText, and mainly used to store the information of the text, rotation angle and anchor point etc. of the part of the GeoText.

Creates a new TextPart object according to the specified arguments.

Specifies the text content of the instance of this TextPart object.Specifies the x-coordinate of anchor point of the TextPart object.Specifies the y-coordinate of anchor point of the TextPart object.Specifies the angle of rotation of the text, in degrees, and anticlockwise as the positive direction.

Creates a new TextPart object according to the specified arguments.

Specifies the text content of the instance of this TextPart object.Specifies the anchor point of the instance of this TextPart object.Specifies the angle of rotation of the text, in degrees, and the positive direction is anticlockwise.

Creates a new TextPart object according to the specified arguments.

Specifies the text content of the instance of this TextPart object.Specifies the anchor point of the instance of this TextPart object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given TextPart object.

The specified TextPart object.

Initializes a new instance of the TextPart class. The value of the rotation property is zero, and the Text is an empty string, and AnchorPoint is an empty point, namely the value of the x-coordinate and y-coordinate is zero.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A copied object.

Moves this TextPart object by the specified amount, namely moves the anchor point of this TextPart object by the specified amount.

The amount to offset the x-coordinate.The amount to offset the y-coordinate. , ,

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the TextPart is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the TextPart.

Gets or sets the y-coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart object.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the x-coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart object.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the text content of the instance of the TextPart class.

The default value is String .Empty.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the instance of the TextPart class, in degrees. The positive direction is anticlockwise.The rotation angle of the TextPart object after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the TextPart constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the anchor point of the instance of the TextPart, which is a Point2D.

The default value is Point2D(0.0,0.0).

A GeoText3D object is composed of one or or more TextPart3D objects, that is to say one GeoText3D object has multiple parts and each part is a TextPart3D object. The text of the GeoText3D object is the sum of the strings of all its parts. You can all set different position of each part and make the parts of the GeoText3D object have different display position. The other style of the text of the parts is uniformly determined by the TextStyle property of the corresponding GeoText3D object. For more information, please refer to the GeoText3D class.

Constructs a new TextPart3D object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given TextPart3D object.

The specified TextPart3D object.

Creates a new TextPart3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified text of the TextPart3D object.The specified anchor point of the TextPart3D object.

Creates a new TextPart3D object according to the specified arguments.

The specified text of the TextPart3D object.The specified X coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object, in degrees.The specified Y coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object, in degrees.The specified Z coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object, in meters.

Modifies the coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object with the given offset.

The offset along the direction of the X axis. Unit is degree.The offset along the direction of the Y axis. Unit is degree.The offset along the direction of the Z axis. Unit is degree.

Returns a copy of the current object.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the anchor point of the TextPart3D object. The anchor point together with the text alignment determines the position of the TextPart3D object. About the details on how to decide the position, please refer to TextAlignment enumeration.

The default value is Point3D(0,0,0).

Gets or sets the text of the TextPart3D object.

The default value is String .Empty.

Gets or sets the X coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object. The unit is degrees.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the Y coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object. The unit is degrees.

The default value is 0, in degrees.

Gets or sets the Z coordinate of the anchor point of the TextPart3D object. The unit is meters.

The default value is 0. The unit is meters.

The type of text style. The class is used to set the style of the instance of the GeoText class.

Constructs a new object identical to the given TextStyle object.

The specified TextStyle object.

Constructs a new TextStyle object.

Returns a formatted string that represents the current TextStyle object.

A formatted string that indicates the current TextStyle.

Creates and returns a new object that is a copy of this TextStyle object. This copy is a deep copy.

The new object is an instance of the TextStyle type as a copy.

Frees the resources of the current TextStyle object before it is reclaimed by the garbage collector.

Releases all resources used by the TextStyle .

Exports the XML string that represents the TextStyle object.

The XML string that represents the TextStyle object.

Retrieves the TextStyle object with the introduced XML string.

The specified XML string.Returns true, if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the weight of font that represents the numerical font weights .

The default value of weight of font is 400 which represents normal.

Gets or sets whether to add the underline to the font of the GeoText. If set to true, indicates that the underline font style is added to. The default value is false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the background of the GeoText is opaque. True indicates opaque, while false indicates not. The default value is false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the font of the GeoText is strikethrough. If set to true, specifies the strikethrough font style, the default value is false.

Gets or sets whether to display the GeoText with a shadow. True indicates that the GeoText has a shadow, the default value is false.

Gets or sets the rotation angle in degrees, with the rotation direction being anticlockwise.The rotation angle of the text after being stored with the data engine. The accuracy is 0.1 degrees. The rotation angle accuracy doesn't change for the text object constructed by the constructor.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets whether to display background of the GeoText with outline.

The default value is false that indicates the background is displayed without the outline.

Gets or sets the angle of italics, which ranges from positive to negative degree. The unit is degree and the angle is accurate to 0.1 degree. When the angle is zero degree, the font is the default italic.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the font of the GeoText is italic.

The default is false. True indicates italic.

Gets or sets the text width. When IsSizeFixed is True, the unit is 1MM, otherwise it's geographic coordinate system unit.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the font name of the GeoText.

The default value of font name is Times New Roman.

Gets or sets the text height. When IsSizeFixed is True, the unit is 1MM, otherwise it's geographic coordinate system unit.

The default value is 6.

Gets or sets whether the GeoText is fixed in size.

The default is true, indicating fixed size.

Gets or sets the foreground color of the GeoText.

The default value is black.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the text is bold. If it is True, the text is bold.

The default value is false.

Gets or sets the background color of the GeoText.

The default value is Black Color [A=255, R=0, G=0, B=0] .

Gets or sets the GeoText alignment.

The default value TopLeft.

Gets or sets the width of the text outline, the value of the unit is: pixel, the numerical range is any integer from 0 to 5, when it is set to 0 it means there is no outline.

Gets or sets the scale of the font.

Gets or sets the opaque rate of the font. The range of the opaque rate is from 0 to 100.

Gets or sets the layout of the text, you can set the left alignment, right alignment, center alignment, two ends alignment.

Gets or sets the distance between the background rectangle margin of the text box and the text margin, and the unit is pixel.

The texture data class.

Initializes a new instance of this TextureData object.

Load the texture data from external file.

The path of the specified file.Returns true if imported successfully; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the texture data name.

Gets the width of the texture data.

Gets the height of the texture data.

The texture repeat mode.

Repeat by time. Repeat by time, specify the repeat time of the texture.The following is a sketch of the repeat by time mode.

Repeat by size. Specify the size to repeat the texture.The following is a sketch of the repeat by size mode.Fig1 The height of the model is 100 meters, and repeat by 50 meters.Fig2 The height of the model is 100 meters, and repeat by 25 meters.

This class defines the query interface of space-time model management in the single time field.

The default constructor for constructing a new TimeCondition object.

Initializes a new instance of the TimeCondition class which is identical with the specified TimeCondition object.

The object that is used to initialize a new instance of the TimeCondition class.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the field name of the query condition.

Gets or sets the field value, time value of the query condition.

Gets or sets the next condition operator of the query condition, such as and, or.

Node animation event parameter class.

Represents the time position changing event of the node animation.

Event source, node animation object.Time position parameter of the node animation.

The Tolerance class is used to set all the tolerance values of the vector dataset.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified Tolerance object.

The specified Tolerance object.

Constructs a new Tolerance object.

Set all the tolerances to the default values. The unit is the same with the vector dataset coordinate system unit.

Sets the values of all the tolerances to zero.

Gets whether the tolerance object is null, that is whether all the tolerance values in it are 0.

The default value is true.

Gets or sets the minimum polygon tolerance, it is also called tiny polygon tolerance. The unit is the same with the vector dataset coordinate system.

The default value is 0.0.

Gets or sets the grain tolerance. The unit is the same with the vector dataset coordinate system.

The default value is 0.0.

Gets or sets node tolerance. It is obsolete. Use NodeSnap to replace it.

The default value is 0.0.

Gets or sets the overshoot tolerance. The unit is the same with the vector dataset coordinate system.

The default value is 0.

Gets or sets the undershoot tolerance. The unit is the same with the vector dataset coordinate system.

The default value is 0.0.

Gets or sets the node tolerance. The unit is the same with the vector dataset coordinate system.

The default value is 0.

The toolkit class provides some assistant calculating function, such as the overloaded method to determine whether the given value is zero.

Determines whether the specified value is zero with the minPrecision and the maxPrecision.

The specified value to be tested.The specified minimum precision, which is the lower limit of the determined tolerance.The specified maximum precision, which is the upper limit of the determined tolerance.True if the value is zero; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the given value is zero with the specified precision.

The specified value to be tested.The precision user gave to determine whether the value is zero. True if the value is zero; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the specified value is zero with the tolerance set in the Environment class.

The specified value to be tested.True, if the value is zero; Otherwise, returns false.

Draws the specified geometry object with the specified resources and graphics.

The geometry object to be drawn.The specified resources library.The graphics object which provides the methods to draw the geometry to the device.A Boolean value represents whether the drawing successfully. True, if successful;Otherwise,false.

Compress the specified datasource so that the UDB datasource will occupy much less storage space than before.

The datasource object which need to be compressed. It is only effective on UDB engines, other engines will return false.A Boolean value represents whether the Compressing successfully. True, if successful;Otherwise,false.

Raster degrade for the specified dataset in the specified datasource.

the datasource connection information specified.The specified name of dataset.Indicates whether raster degrade is successful or not. It is successful if it is true; otherwise, false.

Returns the array of encode type which the specified dataset type support.

The dataset type.Returns the array of encode types the dataset supports.

Returns the error informations with the specified count backward from the tail.

The specified count backward from the tail.Returns the error informations with the specified count backward from the tail.

Clears all the error log.

Returns all the error log.

Extracts the Cache file to the specified path.

The path of the cache file to be extracted.Full path of the target folder.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Extracts the Cache file to the specified path.

Name of the source file.Full path of the target folder.The password of the cache data.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Convert specified DateTime object to a string.

The specified DateTime object.Specified engine type.Successfully converted string.

Gets the warning information.

Warning information.

According to the given resource library, drawing the specified geometry while processing the anti aliasing effect.

The geometry object to be drawn.The specified resources library.The specified Bitmap object.A Boolean value represents whether the drawing successfully. True, if successful;Otherwise,false.

According to the given resource library, drawing the specified geometry while processing the anti aliasing effect.

The geometry object to be drawn.The specified resources library.The graphics object which provides the methods to draw the geometry to the device.The specified background color.A Boolean value represents whether the drawing successfully. True, if successful;Otherwise,false.

Upgrade the 3D network dataset which is NetWork type generated in the old version to the new dataset type

Datasource the 3D network dataset to be upgraded is in.Name of the 3D network dataset to be upgraded.Whether upgraded successfully

Three single band datasets combines to a RGB dataset.

The name of RGB dataset.Target datasource.Single band dataset R.Single band dataset G.Single band dataset B.Returns true if combined successfully; otherwise false.

Gets a list of Mongo database names.

Database server name.Database user name.Database password.Database list array.

Gets the user table name for the external table (the used external user table cannot be returned).

target datasource.The user table name array which can be used in external table.

Convert WKT string to Gemetry, only support for point, line and region.

WKT string.Geometry of UGC.

Convert Geometry to WKT, only support for point, line and region.

Geometry of UGC.WKT string.

Convert WKB binary to Geometry, only support for point, line and region.

WKB binary.Geometry of UGC.

Convert Geometry to WKB binary, only support for point, line and region.

Geometry of UGC.WKB binary.

Convert GeoJson string to Geometry, support for point, line, region, multi-point, multi-line, multi-region.

GeoJSON string.Geometry of UGC.

Convert Geometry to GeoJson string, support for point, line, region, multi-point, multi-line, multi-region.

Geometry of UGC.GeoJSON string.

Export 3D model object to KML file and OSGB file, where the Model object is saved as osgb file, other description informaiton is saved as KML file.

The specified 3D model object list.The path to store the specified KML file.Returns true if successful, otherwise false.

The TopologyValidatingItem class. The TopologyValidatingItem class is used for the topology validating to provide the necessary parameters including the dataset to be validated, the reference dataset and the topology rule.

Constructs a new TopologyValidatingItem object.

Constructs a new object identical to the given TopologyValidatingItem object.

The given TopologyValidatingItem object.

Creates a new TopologyValidatingItem object according to the specified arguments.

The specified dataset to be validated.The reference dataset.The topology rule. For more information, please refer to the TopologyRule class.

The dataset to be validated. This dataset must be contained by the TopologyPreprocessingItem object.

The default value is null.

The reference dataset, which must be contained by the TopologyPreprocessingItem object. This property can be null and and at this time only the source dataset participates in the topology validating.

The default value is null.

The topology rule. For more information, please refer to the TopologyRule class.

The default value is RegionNoOverlap.

The TopologyPreprocessingItem class. The TopologyPreprocessingItem class is used for the topology preprocessing to provide the necessary parameters including the dataset to be preprocessed and the index of the precision.

Initializes a new instance of the TopologyDatasetRelationItem class with the specified dataset to be preprocessed and the value of the PrecisionOrder property of the TopologyDatasetRelationItem object is 1.

The specified dataset.

Initializes a new instance of the TopologyPreprocessingItem class with the specified dataset to be preprocessed and the index of the precision of it.

The specified dataset to be preprocessed.The index of the precision of the specified dataset.

Gets the dataset to be preprocessed.

Gets or sets the index of the precision of the dataset to be preprocessed.

The TopologyDatasetRelationItems class. The TopologyDatasetRelationItems object is the collection of the TopologyDatasetRelationItem objects; it is used for the topology preprocessing to provide the necessary parameters including the dataset to be preprocessed and the index of the precision.

Adds the specified TopologyPreprocessingItem object to the collection of the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects.

The TopologyPreprocessingItem object to be added.Returns the index of the TopologyPreprocessingItem object newly added in the collection of the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects.

Removes the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects from the collection of the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects according to the specified index.

The specified index.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Deletes all the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects in the collection of the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects.

Returns an enumerator that can iterate through the collection.

An IEnumerator object used to iterate through a collection.

Gets the count of the TopologyPreprocessingItem objects in the TopologyPreprocessingItems object.

Gets the topology relation item object in topology dataset relation item collection.

The specified index of topology dataset relation item.

This enumeration defines the topology rule constant, it's a parameter used to perform topology check for point, line and region data. Find the objects that do not fit the topology rules, and save the error result in GIS dataset or CAD dataset.

No overlap in a region dataset (or a region recordset) . Applicable to region datasets.The interior of regions in a dataset (or a region recordset) cannot overlap. The regions can share edges or vertices. This rule is used when an region can not belong to two or more regions. Therefore the result of the topology checking with this rule will contain the regions which overlap each other in a region dataset (or a region recordset) .The overlap part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: region.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

No gaps in region. Applicable to region datasets.There are no voids within a single region or between adjacent regions. That is, all regions must form a continuous surface. An error will always exist on the perimeter of the surface. You can just ignore this error. Use the rule on data that must completely cover an region. Therefore the result of the topology checking with this rule will contain the regions which have voids within a single region or between adjacent regions in a region dataset (or a region recordset) .The void part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: region.Note:

Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.
When there are self-intersection region objects in the region dataset (or recordset), the check may fail or the result may be wrong. It is recommended to perform the RegionNoSelfIntersection check and fix the self-intersection regions before performing the RegionNoGaps check.

Region has no overlap with another region. Applicable to region datasets.Check all the overlap objects in the two dataset. This rule checks all the objects in the first region dataset which overlaps the data in the second region dataset.The overlap part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: region.

Region must be covered by region(s). Applicable to region datasets.A region in one dataset (or one recordset) must share all of its region with regions in another dataset (or a recordset). A region in the first dataset (or a recordset) that is not covered by regions from the second dataset (or a recordset) is an error. It is used when a region of one type, such as a province, should be completely covered by regions of another type, such as counties.The not covered part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: region.

Region must be contained by another region. Applicable to region datasets.Regions may share edges or vertices. That is to say, any region defined in the contained dataset (or a recordset) must be covered by an region in the covering dataset (or a recordset).The not included region object is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: region.

Region boundary must be covered by line(s). Applicable to region datasets.Returns objects in a region dataset (or recordset) whose boundaries are not covered by lines in a line dataset (or recordset).The not covered border is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.

Region boundary must be covered by another region boundary. Applicable to region datasets.Checks objects whose boundaries in one region dataset (or recordset) are not covered by boundaries of objects in another region dataset (or recordset).The not covered border is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.

Region contains point(s). Applicable to region datasets.Checks regions in a region dataset (or recordset) that do not contain at least one point from a point dataset (or recordset). This is useful when every region should have at least one associated point, such as countries must have a capital point.The region object not include point is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: region.

Region border has no overlap. Applicable to region datasets.Checks the boundaries in a region dataset (or recordset) that are overlap with boundaries in another region dataset (or recordset).The border overlap part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.

Region cannot intersect with themselves. Applicable to region datasets.Checks whether the region data has self-intersection objects.The point of intersection of self-intersection region is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

No intersection in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines that cross or overlap other lines. Lines can share endpoints.The point of intersection is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

No overlaps in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines that overlap with other lines in the same dataset (or recordset).The border overlap part of objects is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

No dangles in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets.Checks dangles or overshoots in a dataset (or recordset).The point of suspension is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

No pseudo nodes in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines with pseudo nodes in a line dataset (or recordset).The Pseudonode is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

No overlap between lines. Applicable to line datasets.Checks line(s) from one dataset (or recordset) that overlap with other line(s) in another dataset (or recordset).The overlap part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.

No intersection or interior touch in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines in one dataset (or recordset) that intersect with other lines of the same dataset (or recordset) at endpoints. Endpoint touches are allowed.The point of intersection is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: All intersection points in a line dataset (or recordset) must be endpoints (self-intersection not checked).

No self overlap in the same line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines that are self overlapped in a line dataset (or recordset).The self-overlap part (line) is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

Line cannot intersect with themselves. Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines that are self-intersected in a line dataset (or recordset).The point of intersection is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

Line must be covered by multiple lines. Applicable to line datasets.Checks lines from one dataset (or recordset) that are covered by the lines in another dataset (or recordset).The not covered part is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.Note: Lines from one dataset (or recordset) that are covered by the lines in another dataset (or recordset).

Line must be covered by region boundary. Applicable to line datasets.Checks line objects in a line dataset (or recordset) which are not overlap with any of the boundaries of the region objects in another region dataset (or recordset). The parts not covered by border will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.

Point must be covered by endpoints of line. Applicable to line datasets.Checks line objects in a line dataset (or recordset) whose end points don't overlap with any of the points in another point dataset (or recordset).The not covered endpoint is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

No intersection between lines. Returns lines from one dataset (or recordset) that are intersect with the lines in another dataset (or recordset).The point of intersection is saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

Lines can not intersected with or contained by regions.Checks line objects in a line dataset (or recordset) which are intersected or contained by region objects in another region dataset (or recordset).The intersection of line and region will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line.

No repeat points. Applicable to point datasets.Returns the repeat point objects in point dataset.The repeat points will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: Topology checking should be performed on a region dataset or region recordset itself.

Points not included in regions.Checks points in a point dataset (or recordset) that are contained by regions in a region dataset (or recordset).The points included in regions will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: If the point are on the border of the region, this rule is not infringed.

Point must be on lines. Applicable to point datasets.Checks points in a point dataset (or recordset) that are covered by lines in a line dataset (or recordset).The not covered point will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

Point must be covered by region boundary. Applicable to point datasets.Checks points that fall on the boundaries of objects in a region dataset (or recordset).The points not on the border of the regions will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

Point must be contained by region. Applicable to point datasets.Checks points from a point dataset (or recordset) that fall within any region in a region dataset (or recordset).The points not in the regions will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

Point must be covered by endpoints of line. Applicable to point datasets.Checks points in a dataset (or recordset) that are covered by the endpoints of lines in a line dataset (or recordset).The not covered point will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.

Line or region must be single object.Checks lines or regions in a line or region dataset (or recordset) that have multiple parts. Applicable to region and line datasets.The complex object will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: line or region.

Line data with complex objects

Region data with complex objects

The Vertex Distance has to be greater than the tolerance. Checks whether the distance between nodes of two datasets (points, lines or regions) is less than the tolerance.The points whose distance with other points not large than the tolerance will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: It's not a topology error if the two node are repeat or the distance between the two points are 0,

The nodes must match with each other. Checks inside or between line or region datasets, point or line dataset, point or region dataset, in the tolerance of a node P, there is a node Q to match with it.If not, calculate the foot of perpendicular A for P on L (A match with P) as error saves in the result dataset, the type of the error dataset: point.

There must be point on the intersection of lines. There must be a node inside the line or region dataset, between to datasets or at the intersection of line segments. The node should exist on one of the two intersection line segments.The node will be calculated and saved in a result dataset as errors if do not meet the rule, the error dataset type: point.Note: Two segments whose endpoints connected to each other does not infringe this rule.

Line or the border of region do not has redundant vertex. Checks whether there is redundant vertex objects in line dataset or region dataset. If there are common vertexs on line objects or the border of region objects, thery are redundant vertexs.The redundant nodes will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error data type: point.

There is no break in line. Checks whether the lines in dataset (or recordset) have sharp angles. That is whether two included angles formed by four continuous vertexes on the line are less than the tolerance.The first break point that creates the angle will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: When using the TopologyValidator.Validate method to check this rule, set the angle tolerance through the tolerance parameter.

No short dangles in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets. Check the line in the line dataset (or recordset) is a short dangle. The length of a line is less than the tolerance value of the suspension line.The endpoints of the short dangles are saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: When using the TopologyValidator.Validate method to check this rule, set the short dangle tolerance through the tolerance parameter.

No long dangles in a line dataset (or recordset). Applicable to line datasets. The line in the line dataset (or recordset) is a long suspension line. A suspension line is extended by its direction to the specified length (the suspension tolerance) and has intersection with a segment.The endpoint which needs to be extended in the long dangle will be saved in a result dataset as errors, the error dataset type: point.Note: When using the TopologyValidator.Validate method to check this rule, set the long dangle tolerance through the tolerance parameter.

Data registration class. It provides data registration for raster dataset, image dataset, vector dataset, geometry object and the set of 2D (x,y) coordinates.

Constructs a new Transformation object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified Transformation object.

The Transformation object to be copied.

Creates a new Transformation object according to the specified arguments.

The selected control point of the layer to be registered.The selected control point of the reference layer.The registration mode.

The method for the registration of raster dataset and image dataset. It is operated on the original dataset, resampling mode is not supported.

The raster dataset or image dataset to be registered.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

The method for the registration of raster dataset and image dataset. A new dataset is built.

The raster dataset or image dataset to be registered.The datasource to store the registration result.The name of the registered dataset. The resampling mode.The size of resampling pixel.Returns the registered raster dataset or image dataset.

The method for the registration of raster dataset and image dataset. build a new dataset without resampling.

The raster dataset or image dataset to be registered.The datasource to store the registration result.The name of the registered dataset.Returns the registered raster dataset or image dataset.

The method for the registration of a bunch of raster dataset and image dataset. It is operated on the original dataset, resampling mode is not supported.

The raster dataset or image dataset to be registered.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Registers the vector dataset.

The vector dataset to be registered.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Registers the vector dataset.

The vector dataset to be registered.The datasource to store the registration result.The name of the registered dataset.Returns the registered dataset.

Batch registration for vector dataset array.

The vector dataset array to be registered.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Registration for geometry object.

The geometry object to be registered.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Registration for the set of (x,y) coordinates.

The set of (x,y) coordinates to be registered.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the error of registration.

Returns the error of registration.

Exports the registration parameters to XML string. The parameters include all the coordinate info for registration mode and all the control points.

Returns the registration parameters in XML string.

Imports the registration parameters from XML string.

The specified the registration parameters in XML string.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Imports the registration file of SuperMap SFC products.

The name of the specified SuperMap SFC product registration file.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Exports the registration data into registration file compatible with SuperMap SFC products.

The registration file compatible with SuperMap SFC products to export.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources that the object occupies.

Gets or sets the selected control point in the layer to be registered.

Gets or sets the selected control point in the reference layer.

Gets or sets the Data registration mode.

Gets the Equation of data registration.

The event is trigged when the process bar is activated.

Transformation Error class. It provides residual error, RMS error, total error of the every control point when being registered.

Gets residual error of all control points in the x direction.

Gets residual error of all control points in the Y direction.

Gets the RMS error of all the control points. The length of this array is the same as the number of control points in the registration class.

Gets the total RMS error of the registration.

Defines constants for data registration.

Rectangle registration

Linear registration

Polynomial equations

Offset registration

Defines registration resampling modes.

Nearest Neighbor The nearest neighbor technique assigns the value of the cell whose center is closest to the center of the output cell.It is the resampling technique of choice for discrete, or categorical, raster data, such as land-use rasters, because it does not change the value of the input cells.In the image below, the output raster is resampled from a rotated input raster. The cell centers of the input raster are in gray. The value for one of the cell on the output raster (in red) is derived by identifying the nearest cell center on the input raster (the blue spot) and assigning its value to the output cell center.

Bilinear Interpolation Bilinear interpolation uses the value of the four nearest input cell centers to determine the value on the output raster. The new value for the output cell is a weighted average of these four values, adjusted to account for their distance from the center of the output cell.Since the values for the output cells are weighted based on distance, and then averaged, the bilinear interpolation is best used for data where the location from a known point or phenomenon determines the value assigned to the cell. For example, elevation, slope, magnitude of earthquake from the epicenter.In the image below, the output raster is resampled from a rotated input raster. The cell centers of the input raster are in gray. The value for one of the cell on the output raster (in red) is derived by identifying the four nearest cell centers on the input raster (the four blue spots) and assigning the weighted average of the four values to the output cell.

Cubic Convolution Cubic convolution is a resampling technique similar to bilinear interpolation except that the weighted average is calculated from the values of the 16 nearest input cell centers. Compared with bilinear interpolation, cubic convolution has a tendency to sharpen the edges of the input data since more cells are involved in the calculation of the output value.It is suitable for resampling of the aerial photos and remote sensing images.In the image below, the output raster is resampled from a rotated input raster. The cell centers of the input raster are in gray. The value for one of the cell on the output raster (in red) is derived by identifying the sixteen nearest cell centers on the input raster (the four blue spots) and assigning the weighted average of the sixteen values to the output cell.

Defines unit types.

Seconds

Minutes

Degrees

Radians

Inches

Feet

Yards

Miles

Millimeters

Centimeters

Decimeters

Meters

Kilometers

The VersionConflictOption class. This class will provide the scheme for reconcile or transact the conflict between the current and target version.

Please refer to the target version when conflicts occur.

Please refer to the current version when conflicts occur.

Please refer to the target version before editing when conflicts occur.

The VersionInfo class.

Gets the ID of the version.

Gets the version name.

Gets the details about the version information.

Gets the ID of the parent version of the current version.

Gets the time when the version is created.

The VersionManager class.

Creates a version according to the specified parameters.

The specified version name.The ID of the parent version.The details about the version information.Returns a VersionInfo object.

Creates a version according to the specified parameters.

The specified version name.The name of the parent version of the current version.The details about the version information.Returns a VersionInfo object.

Switches the specified version with the given name to the current version.

The specified version ID.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Switches the specified version with the given name to the current version.

The specified version name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the specified version.

The specified version ID.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Deletes the specified version.

The specified version name.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Gets the information of the specified version.

The specified version ID.Returns a VersionInfo object.

Gets the information of the specified version.

The specified version name.Returns a VersionInfo object.

Updates the information of the specified version according to the given parameters.

The specified version ID.The specified version name.The details about the version information.Returns a VersionInfo object.

Registers the specified dataset and makes it support the version management.

The specified dataset.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Unregisters the specified dataset and makes it not support the version management.

The specified dataset.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Reconciles the version of the specified dataset with the given parameters.

The specified dataset.The specified name of the target version.The VersionConflictOption object. For more information, please refer to the VersionConflictOption class.Returns the array of IDs of the Geometry objects which exist conflict.

Reconciles the version of the specified dataset with the given parameters.

The specified dataset.The specified ID of the target version.The VersionConflictOption object. For more information, please refer to the VersionConflictOption class.Returns the array of IDs of the Geometry objects which exist conflict.

Commits the version of the specified dataset.

The specified dataset.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Transacts the version conflict of the specified dataset according to the given parameters.

The specified dataset.The ID of the Geometry object which has conflict.The VersionConflictOption object. For more information, please refer to the VersionConflictOption class.Returns true if successful; otherwise, false.

Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

The specified dataset.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Gets the current version after the reconcile operation.

The specified dataset.The specified QueryParameter object.Returns the current Recordset object.

Gets the target version after the reconcile operation.

The specified dataset.The specified QueryParameter object.Returns the target Recordset object.

Gets the anterior target version after the reconcile operation.

The specified dataset.The specified QueryParameter object.Returns the Recordset object.

Gets the subversions of the specified version. The method can only get the subversions immediately under the specified version.

The specified version ID.Returns the array of the VersionInfo objects.

Gets the subversions of the specified version. The method can only get the subversions immediately under the specified version.

The specified version name.Returns the array of the VersionInfo objects.

Defines whether to save the version of the specified dataset.

The specified dataset.Returns true if the version needs to be saved; otherwise false.

Defines whether the specified two versions have the inheriting relationship.

The ID of the child version.The ID of the parent version.Returns true if the current and the target version have the inheriting relationship; otherwise false.

Defines whether the specified two versions have the inheriting relationship.

The name of the child version.The name of the parent version.Returns true if the current and the target version have the inheriting relationship; otherwise false.

Gets the version information of the current version.

Gets the version information of the root version.

This enumeration defines the constant of the text vertical position for graticules and MeasuredGrid.

The text is on the top of the grid.

The text is on the endpoint of the grid.

The text is on the bottom of the grid.

Defines position types for M value calibration.

Not to calibrate. Only set the specified M value to the corresponding point.

Only calibrates the M value of the point at the BEFORE position.

Only calibrate the M value of the point at the AFTER position.

Only calibrate the M values of the points at the BEFORE and AFTER positions.

Only calibrate the M value of the point at the INTERVAL position.

Only calibrate the M values of the points at the BEFORE and INTERVAL positions.

Only calibrate the M values of the points at the INTERVAL and AFTER positions.

Calibrate the M values of the entire LineM object.

A workspace is where users work with their data. It is primarily used to manage and organize data, including opening, closing, creating, and saving workspaces.

Constructs a new Workspace object.

Gets the name of workspace with the specified WorkspaceConnectionInfo object.

The specified WorkspaceConnectionInfo object.

Deletes the workspace with the specified WorkspaceConnectionInfo object.

The specified WorkspaceConnectionInfo object.

Modify the password of the opened workspace.

The specified old password.The specified new password.Returns true, if password is modified successfully; otherwise false.

Pops up the About dialog box of the workspace.

Used to return the time of last update of the workspace.

The time of last update of the workspace.

Creates a new workspace with the specified workspaceConnectionInfo.

The specified workspace connection information.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Saves the specified workspace as a new workspace with the specified workspaceConnectionInfo.

The specified workspace connection information.True,if successful; Otherwise, returns false.

This method is used to save this Workspace with its original name. If successful, returns True; otherwise False.

True if the Workspace is saved successfully; otherwise False.

Closes the workspace.

Used to open a existing workspace.

The workspace connection info.Returns true if the workspace is opened successfully; otherwise, false.

Releases unmanaged resources and performs other cleanup operations before the Workspace is reclaimed by garbage collection.

Releases all resources used by the Workspace.

Returns the version of the Workspace.

The default is UGC20.

Returns the type of current Workspace object.

The default is Default.

Gets or sets the description about this Workspace object that added by the user.

The default value is String.Empty .

Returns a value indicates whether if this Workspace is modified.

True if the content of workspace can be modified ; otherwise, false. The default is false.

Gets or sets the displayed name of this Workspace object, so that the user can identify this Workspace,and the caption of a Workspace can be modified.

The default value is UntitledWorkspace.

Gets the connection information of the workspace.

This property can be accessed by default, that is, the property is not null by default. {Name="",Type=Default,Verysion=UGC20,Server="",Database="",Driver="",User="",Password=""}。 For default values of the properties of ConnectionInfo, please refer to WorkspaceConnectionInfo.

Returns the Datasources object.The Datasources object stores the logic information of the datasources in this Workspace, such as the connection information of datasource data, storage location of datasources, but it does not store the real data of datasources. The data of datasources are stored in relational databases or UDB files. The Datasources object in a Workspace is mainly used to manage the datasource in this Workspace, including opening, creating, closing operation etc.

This property can be accessed by default, that is, the property is not null by default. The default value is SuperMap.Data.Datasources.

Returns the Maps object of this Workspace object.

This property can be accessed by default, that is, the property is not null by default. The default value is SuperMap.Data.Maps.

Gets the Scene collection in the workspace.

The default value is an empty Scenes object.

Gets the Layout collection in the workspace.

Gets the Resources object in the workspace. The Resources object is used to manage the resources such as the line style library, the fill style library and the symbol library.

Whether to auto backup the previous workspace in case of the damage of the workspace when you save it.

The default value is true.

Occurs after the workspace is closed.

Occurs after the workspace is saved as another workspace.

Occurs after the workspace is saved.

Occurs before the workspace is closed.

Occurs after the workspace is created.

Occurs after the workspace is opened

Provides data for the Workspace.CaptionChanged event.

This WorkspaceEventArgs class is the base class for classes containing workspace event data.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceEventArgs class with specified workspace.

The specified workspace object.

Gets an instance of Workspace.

Modifies the new instance of WorkspaceCaptionChangedEvent according to the parameters.

The specified Workspace object.The old name of the workspace.The new name of the workspace.

Gets the old name of workspace.

Gets the new name of workspace.

Represents the method that handles the Workspace.CaptionChanged event.

The source of the event.A WorkspaceCaptionChangedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Workspace.Closed event.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceSavedEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The specified Workspace object.

Represents the method that handles the Workspace.Closed event.

The source of the event.A WorkspaceClosedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Workspace.Closing event.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceClosingEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The specified Workspace object.Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the event should be canceled. True indicates to cancel and false indicates the opposite.

Represents the method that handles a Workspace.Closing event.

The source event.A WorkspaceClosingEventArgs that contains the event data.

The WorkspaceConnectionInfo class.All the connection information about a workspace will be stored in an instance of this class, including the name of the server that the workspace will connect to, the name of the workspace, the user name and password needed to login the database etc.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceConnectionInfo class with the specified name of the file and the password.

The path name of the SXW file.

Builds an instance of WorkspaceConnectionInfo object which is the same as the specified WorkspaceConnectionInfo object.

The object of workspace connection info.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceConnectionInfo class for a SQL Server database workspace with the specified name of the server, the name of the driver, the name of the database, the name of the workspace, user name and password for logging on the database.

The name of the server.The name of the driver when using ODBC to access data.The name of the database.The name of the workspace.The user name for logging on the database.The password for logging on the database.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceConnectionInfo class for an Oracle database workspace with the specified TNS name, the name of the database, the name of the workspace, user name and password.

The TNS (Transparent Network Substrate) name of the client of the Oracle database.The name of the database.The name of the workspace.The user name for logging on the database.The password for logging on the database.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceConnectionInfo class, and the default type is the Default workspace type.

The object of workspace connection info.

Outputs this WorkspaceConnectionInfo object to a readable string, and the format is Name="",Type=Default,Version=UGC20,Server="",Database="",Driver="",User="",Password=""

Frees the resources of the current WorkspaceConnectionInfo object before it is reclaimed by the garbage collector.

Releases all resources used by the WorkspaceConnectionInfo.

Gets or sets the version of the workspace. For more information, refer to WorkspaceVersionType enumeration.

The default is UGC70.

Gets or sets the name of the ODBC driver of the database. So far, among the database workspace that supported, only SQL Server database can use the ODBC driver, and the driver name for SQL Server database workspace can be string such as SQL Server or SQL Native Client.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the password when logging on the database or connecting to the file.

The default value is String.Empty.

Gets or sets the user name when logging on the database. Only applies to the database workspace.

The default value is String.Empty .

Gets or sets the name of the database that the workspace will connect to. Only applies to the database workspace.

The default value is String.Empty .

Gets or sets the path name of the database server or file.

The default value is String.Empty .

Gets or sets the type of the workspace.

The default is Default.

Gets or sets the name of the workspace in the database. For the file database, the name is set to empty.

The default value is String.Empty .

Provides data for the Workspace.Created event.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceCreatedEventArgs class with specified workspace object.

The specified workspace object.

Represents the method that handles a Workspace.Created event.The source of the event.

The source event.The WorkspaceCreatedEventArgs event that contains event data.

Provides data for the Workspace.Opened event.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceOpenedEventArgs with the specified parameter.

The specified workspace object.

Represents the method that handles the Workspace.Opened event.

The source of the event. A WorkspaceOpenedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Workspace.SavedAs event.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceSavedEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The specified Workspace object.

Represents the method that handles a Workspace.SavedAs event.

The source of the event.A WorkspaceSavedAsEventArgs that contains the event data.

Provides data for the Workspace.Saved event.

Initializes a new instance of the WorkspaceSavedEventArgs class with the specified parameters.

The specified Workspace object.

Represents the method that handles the Workspace.Saved event.

The source of the event.A WorkspaceSavedEventArgs that contains the event data.

Defines workspace types.File workspaces supported by SuperMap include SXW, SMW, SXWU, and SMWU workspaces. Database workspaces supported by SuperMap include Oracle and SQL Server workspaces.

Represents the default type of the workspace file. The default type of the workspace file is the type before a workspace file has been saved.

SXW (SuperMap XML Workspace) Workspace is the workspace file of the XML format. It can be opened by text editor, such as Notepad, EditPlus, etc. The information of the workspace can be easily got through text editor. The information of datasource, map, resource, etc can be used by the other workspace files, especially the information of map style.

Oracle workspace. The workspace saves in the Oracle database.

SQL Server workspace. The workspace saves in the SQL server database.

DM workspace. The workspace saves in the DM database.

MySQL workspace. The workspace saves in the MySQL database.

SMW workspace.

SXWU workspace. Only the workspace in the 6R version could be saved as SXWU type. The file type workspace could only be saved as 6R version in SXWU type and SMWU type.

SMWU workspace. Only the workspace in the 6R version could be saved as SMWU type. The file type workspace could only be saved as 6R version in SXWU type and SMWU type.

Defines the constants for workspace versions.

SuperMap UGC 7.0 workspace, not supported in SuperMap Objects .NET 6R(2012) SP2, reserved for later versions.

SuperMap UGC 2.0 Workspace. The default workspace for SuperMap Objects .NET and SuperMap Objects Java which are the component GIS based on UGC (Universal GIS Core).

SuperMap 5.0 Workspace. It supports SuperMap GIS 5 family and higher version.

SuperMap UGC 6.0 workspace.

SuperMap 6.0 workspace.

The GeoParametricLineCompound class is derived from GeoParametricLine.A GeoParametricLineCompound object is composed by one or more GeoLine objects. Currently the supported line geometric object types includes GeoParametricLineCompound, GeoParametricLine, GeoLine and GeoArc.Currently, there are only three types of data engines that support the GeoParametricLineCompound object, they are UDB, SQLPlus and OraclePlus.

The GeoParametricLine class is derived from the Geometry class.A GeoParametricLine object is a line composed by line objects. The line objects can be GeoLine object, GeoArc object or GeoParametricLine objects.Currently, there are only three types of data engines that support the GeoParametricLine object, they are UDB, SQLPlus and OraclePlus.

Constructs a new GeoParametricLine object.

Initializes a new GeoParametricLine instance according to the specified GeoParametricLine object.

The specified GeoParametricLine object.

Clear/delete all the sub objects of the GeoParametricLine object.

Adds a sub object to the GeoParametricLine object.Note the following points when using this method:1. Currently supports GeoLine, GeoArc and GeoParametricLine.2. The starting node of the added object must be equal to the last node of the existing object and the line direction is the same.

The sub object to be added. Currently supports GeoLine, GeoArc and GeoParametricLine.Returns the index of the subobject if added successfully.

Returns a copy of the current GeoParametricLine object.

A copy of the current GeoParametricLine object.

It is not supported in this class.

Returns the count of sub objects of the GeoParametricLine object.

The count of sub objects of the GeoParametricLine object.

Returns the length of the GeoParametricLine object and the unit is the same as that of the dataset.

The default value is 0.0 .The length of the GeoParametricLine object.

Gets or sets the sub object of the GeoParametricLine object with the specified index.

the index of the subobject.The sub object of the GeoParametricLine object with the specified index.

Gets whether the GeoParametricLine object has sub objects, that is whether the count of sub objects is 0.

Return 0 if the count of sub objects is 0, return false otherwise.

Constructs a new GeoParametricLine object.

Initializes a new GeoParametricLineCompound instance according to the specified GeoParametricLineCompound object.

The specified GeoParametricLineCompound object.

Clear/delete all the sub objects of the GeoParametricLine object.

Adds a subobject to the GeoParametricLineCompound object.

The subobject to add, the line objects supported currently include GeoParametricLineCompound , GeoParametricLine, GeoLine and GeoArc object.Returns the index of the subobject if added successfully.

Delete the sub object of the GeoParametricLineCompound object with the specified index.

The specified index of the part to be removed.returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Inserts a subobject to the GeoParametricLineCompound object with the specified index.

The indext to insert.The subobject to add, the line objects supported currently include GeoParametricLineCompound , GeoParametricLine, GeoLine and GeoArc object.If successful, this method will return true; otherwise it will return false.

Returns a copy of the current GeoParametricLineCompound object.

A copy of the current GeoParametricLineCompound object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets the count of sub objects of the GeoParametricLineCompound object.

The default value is 0.

Returns the length of the GeoParametricLineCompound object and the unit is the same as that of the dataset.

The length of the GeoParametricLineCompound object.

Gets or sets the sub object of the GeoParametricLineCompound object with the specified index.

the index of the subobject.the subobject with the specified index.

Gets whether the GeoParametricLineCompound object has sub objects, that is whether the count of sub objects is 0.

Return true if the GeoParametricLineCompound object does not have subobjects, return false otherwise.

The GeoParametricRegionCompound class is derived from GeoParametricRegion.A GeoParametricLineCompound object is composed by one or more GeoLine objects. Currently the supported region geometric object types includes GeoParametricRegionCompound, GeoParametricRegion, GeoRegion and GeoCircle.Currently, there are only three types of data engines that support the GeoParametricRegionCompound object, they are UDB, SQLPlus and OraclePlus.

The GeoParametricRegion class is derived from the Geometry class.A GeoParametricRegion object is a region composed by line objects. The line objects can be GeoLine object, GeoArc object or GeoParametricLine objects.Currently, there are only three types of data engines that support the GeoParametricRegion object, they are UDB, SQLPlus and OraclePlus.

Constructs a new GeoParametricRegion object.

Initializes a new instance according to the specified GeoParametricRegion object.

The specified GeoParametricRegion object.

Clear/delete all the sub objects of the GeoParametricRegion object.

Adds a subobject to the GeoParametricRegion object.Note the following points when using this method:1. Currently supports GeoLine, GeoArc and GeoParametricLine.2. The starting node of the added object must be equal to the last node of the existing object and the line direction is the same.

The sub object to be added. Currently supports GeoLine, GeoArc and GeoParametricLine.Returns the index of the subobject if added successfully.

Returns a copy of the current GeoParametricLine object.

A copy of the current GeoParametricLine object.

It is not supported in this class.

Returns the count of sub objects of the GeoParametricLineCompound.

The count of sub objects of the GeoParametricLineCompound.

Gets the region of the GeoParametricRegion object. The unit is the same with the dataset.

The default value is 0.0.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoParametricRegion object. It is the sum of all the length of the border line objects. The unit is the same with the dataset.

The perimeter of the GeoParametricRegion object.

Gets or sets the sub object of the GeoParametricRegion object with the specified index.

the index of the subobject.The sub object of the GeoParametricRegion object with the specified index.

Gets whether the GeoParametricRegion object has sub objects, that is whether the count of sub objects is 0.

Return 0 if the count of sub objects is 0, return false otherwise.

Constructs a new GeoParametricRegion object.

Initializes a new GeoParametricRegionCompound instance according to the specified GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

The specified GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

Clear/delete all the sub objects of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

Adds a subobject to the GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

The subobject to add, the region objects supported currently include GeoParametricRegionCompound, GeoParametricRegion, GeoRegion and GeoCircle object.Returns the index of the subobject if added successfully.

Delete the sub object of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object with the specified index.

The specified index of the part to be removed.returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Inserts a subobject to the GeoParametricRegionCompound object with the specified index.

The indext to insert.The subobject to add, the region objects supported currently include GeoParametricRegionCompound, GeoParametricRegion, GeoRegion and GeoCircle object.If successful, this method will return true; otherwise it will return false.

Returns a copy of the current GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

A copy of the current GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

It is not supported in this class.

Gets the count of sub objects of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

The default value is 0.

Gets the area of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object, it is the sum of all the subobjects. The unit is the same as that of the dataset.

The area of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

Gets the perimeter of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object. The unit is the same with the dataset.

The perimeter of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object.

Gets or sets the sub object of the GeoParametricRegionCompound object with the specified index.

the index of the subobject.the subobject with the specified index.

Gets whether the GeoParametricRegionCompound object has sub objects, that is whether the count of sub objects is 0.

Return true if the GeoParametricRegionCompound object does not have subobjects, return false otherwise.

This enumeration defines the constants representing the block size in a grid dataset.

Represents the 64 pixel * 64 pixel block.

Represents the 128 pixel * 128 pixel block.

Represents the 256 pixel * 256 pixel block.

Represents the 512 pixel * 512 pixel block.

Represents the 1024 pixel * 1024 pixel block.

Provide data for the DatasetImageCollection.OrderChanged and DatasetGridCollection.OrderChanged events.The two collection types of datasets are image dataset collection and raster dataset collection. The sub dataset types of them are image data (image dataset and image file) and grid dataset.

Initialize an new instance of the DatasetCollectionEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The alias of the sub dataset specified to change location in the collection.The in of the sub dataset specified to change location.The index of the sub dataset after changed the location.

Gets or sets the alias of the sub dataset specified to change location in the collection.

Gets or sets the index of the sub dataset specified to change location.

Gets or sets the index of the sub dataset after changed the location.

Represents the method that will handle events for the location changing of the sub datasets of collection dataset. (DatasetImageCollection.OrderChanged, DatasetGridCollection.OrderChanged)The two collection types of datasets are image dataset collection and raster dataset collection. The sub dataset types of them are image data (image dataset and image file) and grid dataset.

The source event.The DatasetCollectionChangeOrderEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provide data for the event for the sub datasets of collection type dataset. (DatasetImageCollection.Added, DatasetImageCollection.Removing, DatasetImageCollection.Removed, DatasetGridCollection.Added, DatasetGridCollection.Removing, DatasetGridCollection.Removed)The two collection types of datasets are image dataset collection and raster dataset collection. The sub dataset types of them are image data (image dataset and image file) and grid dataset.The there events for the dataset in the collection are: Added (add dataset to collection), Removing (removing dataset in a collection) and Removed (removed dataset in a collection).

Initialize an new instance of the DatasetCollectionEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The alias of the sub dataset that will be added or removed.The index of the sub dataset that will be added or removed.The value indicating whether the event should be canceled or not. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the alias of the sub dataset that will be added or removed.

Gets or sets the index of the sub dataset that will be added or removed.

Gets or sets whether to cancel the value of the event. true if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method that will handle events for the sub datasets of collection type dataset. (DatasetImageCollection.Added, DatasetImageCollection.Removing, DatasetImageCollection.Removed, DatasetGridCollection.Added, DatasetGridCollection.Removing, DatasetGridCollection.Removed)The two collection types of datasets are image dataset collection and raster dataset collection. The sub dataset types of them are image data (image dataset and image file) and grid dataset.The there events for the dataset in the collection are: Added (add dataset to collection), Removing (removing dataset in a collection) and Removed (removed dataset in a collection).

The source event.The DatasetCollectionEventArgs object that contains the event data.

Provide data for the DatasetImageCollection.Renaming, DatasetImageCollection.Renamed, DatasetGridCollection.Renaming and DatasetGridCollection.Renamed events.The two collection types of datasets are image dataset collection and raster dataset collection. The sub dataset types of them are image data (image dataset and image file) and grid dataset.There are two kind of events, renaming and renamed.

Initializes a new instance of the DatasetCollectionRenameEventArgs class with the given parameters.

The alias of the sub dataset to be renamed.The new alias of the sub dataset after renamed.The value indicating whether the event should be canceled or not. True if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the alias of the sub dataset to be renamed.

Gets or sets the new alias of the sub dataset after renamed.

Gets or sets whether to cancel the value of the event. true if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method that will handle events for the sub datasets of collection type dataset. (DatasetImageCollection.Added, DatasetImageCollection.Removing, DatasetImageCollection.Removed, DatasetGridCollection.Added)The two collection types of datasets are image dataset collection and raster dataset collection. The sub dataset types of them are image data (image dataset and image file) and grid dataset.There are two kind of events, renaming and renamed.

The source event.The DatasetCollectionRenameEventArgs object that contains the event data.

The DatasetGridCollection class.DatasetGridCollection is a type of dataset which derives from Dataset, you can create, update or delete pyramid for it, or rename it. You can also add, delete or append the DatasetGrid objects in it.Only DatasetGrid objects can be added to DatasetGridCollection.DatasetGridCollection datasets use planar coordinate system by default.Setting the projection is invalid only when there are no child datasets in the collection.When the row of the added child dataset is larger than 5000, add to the map window. If the dataset and collection both haven't pyramid, this child dataset can be displayed in the original resolution.

Gets the DatasetGrid object with the given alias in the DatasetGridCollection.

The alias of the grid dataset.The DatasetGrid object with the given alias.

Return the index of the DatasetGrid object with the given alias.

The given alias.The index of the DatasetGrid dataset with the given alias.

Add the DatasetGrid object to the tail of the DatasetGridCollection.

The name of the grid dataset.The alias to add to the DatasetGridCollection, it should be valid and unique.Returns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Add the DatasetGrid to the top or tail of the DatasetGridCollection.

The name of the grid dataset.The alias to add to the DatasetGridCollection, it should be valid and unique.True means add the DatasetGrid to the top of the DatasetGridCollection, and the index of the DatasetGrid will be 0. False means add to the tail.Returns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Add DatasetGrid to DatasetGridCollection in form of key-value pairs. Set the alias as the key since it is unique. That is, the keys are the alias of the grid datasets, and the values are the names of the datasets.It is equivalently to batch adding DatasetGrid to DatasetGridCollection.

The collection needed to add the alias and name of the DatasetGrid, the key is the alias and the value is the name.Return true if successful; otherwise, false.

Insert the DatasetGrid to the specified location in the DatasetGridCollection.

The name of the grid dataset.The alias add to the DatasetGridCollection, it should be unique.The specified index.Returns true if successful; otherwise false.

Append a DatasetGridCollection object to another DatasetGridCollection object.When succeed, all the DatasetGrid objects in the DatasetGridCollection will be added to the tail of the other DatasetGridCollection with the original order.

The DatasetGridCollection object to append.true if successful; otherwise, false.

Remove DatasetGrid objects from the DatasetGridCollection with the given alias.Note: Only the DatasetGrid information in the collection will be removed, the grid dataset associated with the sub dataset in the same datasource will not be deleted.

The given alias.Returns true if removed successfully; returns false otherwise .

Delete the DatasetGrid object with the given index in the DatasetGridCollection.Note: Only the DatasetGrid information in the collection will be removed, the grid dataset associated with the sub dataset in the same datasource will not be deleted.

The index of the DatasetGrid to delete.True if successful; otherwise, false.

Remove all the DatasetGrid objects in the DatasetGridCollection object.Note: Only the DatasetGrid information in the collection will be removed, the grid dataset associated with the sub dataset in the same datasource will not be deleted.

Returns true if removed successfully; returns false otherwise .

Synchronize DatasetGridCollection.To ensure the correctness and validity of the information of collection, it is recommended to synchronize the collection after the following operations:1. Copy DatasetGridCollection between datasources.2. Change the original DatasetGrid information related to the sub dataset of the collection.3. Delete sub datasets in the DatasetGridCollection.Note: When calling this method, the sub datasets do not exist will be removed from the DatasetGridCollection automatically.

Return true when synchronized successfully, return false otherwise.

Change the location of the DatasetGrid in the DatasetGridCollection.Adjust the order of the sub datasets in the DatasetGridCollection can improve the display effect of the collection.Note: It is recommended to call this method before build pyramid for the DatasetGridCollection, thus reduce the building and updating operation.

The alias of the DatasetGrid to change location.The index of the DatasetGrid when it is moved to the collection.True if changed the order successfully; otherwise false.

Build pyramid for the DatasetGridCollection object. It is used to speed up the display.

Returns true, if built successfully; otherwise false.

Removes the pyramid of the grid dataset.

Return true if removed successfully; false otherwise.

Update the DatasetGridCollection pyramid in the specific extent.You should call this method after performing the following operations.1. Change the clip region of the sub dataset;2. Adjust the order of the sub datasets, add or delete sub dataset;3. When the extent of the sub dataset add is outside of the pyramid.

The Extenttrue if the update is successful, or false otherwise.

Gets a valid alias with the parameter passed in.

The alias input.A valid alias.

Determines whether the character string passed in is a valid alias of the DatasetGridCollection.

The string input.Return true if the string input is valid, return false otherwise.

Rename the alias of the sub datasets in the DatasetGridCollection. Case-insensitive.

The original alias of the sub dataset.The new alias of the sub dataset.Returns true If renamed successfully; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the NoData value of specified band, valid for all sub datasets, mainly used when creating the pyramid to ignore the NoData pixels.

Returns the count of the DatasetGrid objects in the DatasetGridCollection.

The default value is 0.

Gets the alias of the DatasetGrid object with the given index in the DatasetGridCollection.

The index specified.The alias of the DatasetGrid object with the given index.

Gets the vector dataset that records the information of the DatasetGridCollection.The vector dataset got is a region dataset and cannot be changed.Each region object in the region dataset has a corresponding sub dataset. If the sub dataset have clip region, the region objects will be the clip regions of the sub datasets. If the sub datasets do not have clip regions, the region objects will be the enclosing rectangles of the sub datasets.

The region dataset that records the DatasetGridCollection information.

Get the pixel format of the DatasetGridCollection. See the PixelFormat enumeration for detailed information about the pixel format.

Gets whether the DatasetGridCollection has pyramid.

Return true if it has pyramid, return false otherwise.

Gets or sets the clipped region of the DatasetGridCollection.The clip region of the DatasetGridCollection is used to control the display extent of all the sub datasets.This property cannot get or set the clip region of the sub datasets.Note:1. The DatasetGridCollection will not be displayed if the extent of the DatasetGridCollection set by the DatasetGridCollection.SetGeoReference() method do not overlap with the clip region.2. When you reset the extent of the DatasetGridCollection, the clip region of the DatasetGridCollection will not be modified automatically.

Gets or sets the color look-up table of the DatasetGridCollection object.The collection color look-up table will be used for the DatasetGridCollection, even if you set the color table for the sub datasets.

Occurs before renaming the sub dataset of the DatasetGridCollection.

Occurs after renamed the sub dataset of the DatasetGridCollection.

Occurs when the sub dataset in the DatasetGridCollection is added to the collection.

Occurs before deleting a sub dataset of the DatasetGridCollection.

Occurs after deleted a sub dataset of the DatasetGridCollection.

Occurs before deleting all the sub datasets of the DatasetGridCollection.

Occurs after deleted all the sub datasets of the DatasetGridCollection.

Three operations will trigger the event, there are:1. When calling the Synchronize() method.2. When calling the Append() method.3. When calling the Add(Dictionary<String, String> values) method.

Occurs after changed the location of a sub dataset in the DatasetGridCollection.

The DatasetImageCollection class.DatasetImageCollection is a type of dataset which derives from Dataset, you can create, update or delete pyramid for it, or rename it. You can also add, delete or append the DatasetImage objects in it.Two types of image data can be added to the DatasetImageCollection, one is image data, including DatasetImage, the other is the image file supported by image plug-ins (such as *.sit).

DatasetImageCollection datasets use planar coordinate system by default.
Setting the projection is invalid only when there are no child datasets in the collection.
When the row of the added child dataset is larger than 5000, add to the map window. If the dataset and collection both haven't pyramid, this child dataset can be displayed in the original resolution.
When creating pyramid for the image dataset collection, the specified (NoData) value will be ignored. So, if the image dataset collection contains a large part which is set to transparent, you can set that part to be NoData, and then make its pyramid.

Gets the DatasetImage object with the given alias in the DatasetImageCollection.

The alias of the image dataset.The DatasetImage object with the given name.

Return the index of the DatasetImage with the given alias in the DatasetImageCollection.

The given alias.The index of the DatasetImage with the given alias in the DatasetImageCollection.

Add the image data to the tail of the DatasetImageCollection. The image data includes DatasetImage and the image file supported by the image plug-in.

Add the image data to the top or tail of the DatasetImageCollection. The image data includes DatasetImage and the image file supported by the image plug-in.

The name of the image data. When the image data is DatasetImage, the parameter is the name of the dataset. When it is image file, the parameter is the full path of the image file.The alias of the DatasetImage to add to the DatasetImageCollection, it should be valid and unique.True means add the DatasetGrid to the top of the DatasetGridCollection, and the index of the DatasetGrid will be 0. False means add to the tail.Returns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Add DatasetImage to DatasetImageCollection in form of key-value pairs. Set the alias as the key since it is unique. That is, the keys are the alias of the image datasets, and the values are the names of the image datasets.It is equivalently to batch adding DatasetImage to DatasetImageCollection.

The name of the image data to add, the keys are the alias of the image datasets, the values are the name of the image data.Returns true if added successfully; otherwise false.

Insert the DatasetImageto the specified location in the DatasetImageCollection.

The name of the image data. When the image data is DatasetImage, the parameter is the name of the dataset. When it is image file, the parameter is the full path of the image file.The alias of the DatasetImage add to the DatasetImageCollection, it should be unique.The specified index.Returns true if inserted successfully; otherwise false.

Append a DatasetImageCollection object to another DatasetImageCollection object.When succeed, all the DatasetImage objects in the DatasetImageCollectionwill be added to the tail of the other DatasetImageCollection with the original order.

The DatasetImageCollection object to append.Returns true if appended successfully; otherwise false.

Remove DatasetImage objects from the DatasetImageCollection with the given alias.Note: Only the information of the DatasetImage and image file in the collection will be removed, the image dataset associated with the sub dataset in the same datasource and the image file in the the disk will not be deleted.

The specified alias of the DatasetImage.Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Delete the DatasetImage object with the given index in the DatasetImageCollection.Note: Only the information of the DatasetImage and image file in the collection will be removed, the image dataset associated with the sub dataset in the same datasource and the image file in the the disk will not be deleted.

The index of the DatasetImage to delete.Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Remove all the DatasetImage objects in the DatasetImageCollection object.Note: Only the information of the DatasetImage and image file in the collection will be removed, the image dataset associated with the sub dataset in the same datasource and the image file in the the disk will not be deleted.

Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Synchronize DatasetImageCollection.To ensure the correctness and validity of the information of collection, it is recommended to synchronize the collection after the following operations:1. Copy DatasetImageCollection between datasources.2. Change the original DatasetImage information related to the sub dataset of the collection.3. Change the path of the original image file or delete image file.4. Delete sub datasets in the DatasetImageCollection.Note: When calling this method, the sub datasets do not exist will be removed from the DatasetImageCollection automatically.

Returns true if synchronized successfully; otherwise false.

Change the location of the DatasetImage in the DatasetImageCollection.Adjust the order of the sub datasets in the DatasetImageCollection can improve the display effect of the collection.Note: It is recommended to call this method before build pyramid for the DatasetImageCollection, thus reduce the building and updating operation.

The alias of the DatasetImage to change location.The index of the DatasetImage when it is moved to the collection.Returns true if changed order successfully; otherwise false.

Build pyramid for the DatasetImageCollection object. It is used to speed up the display.

Returns true if built successfully; otherwise false.

Delete the pyramid of the DatasetImageCollection object.

Returns true if removed successfully; otherwise false.

Update the DatasetImageCollection pyramid in the specific extent.You should call this method after performing the following operations.1. Change the color palette and clip region of the sub dataset;2. Adjust the order of the sub datasets, add or delete sub dataset;3. When the extent of the sub dataset add is outside of the pyramid.

The specified bounds.Returns true if updated successfully; otherwise false.

Gets a valid alias with the string passed in.

The alias input.A valid alias.

Determines whether the character string passed in is a valid alias of the DatasetImageCollection.

The string input.Return true if the string input is valid, return false otherwise.

Rename the alias of the sub datasets in the DatasetImageCollection. Case-insensitive.

The original alias of the sub dataset.The new alias of the sub dataset.Returns true if renamed successfully; otherwise false.

Gets the NoData pixels of specified band for the DatasetImageCollection.

Specified band index, starting from 0.The NoData pixels of specified band for the DatasetImageCollection.

Sets the NoData value of specified band for the DatasetImageCollection, valid for all sub datasets, mainly used when creating the pyramid to ignore the NoData pixels.

Specified NoData value.Specified band index, starting from 0.

Returns the count of the DatasetImage objects in the DatasetImageCollection.

The default value is 0.

Gets the alias of the DatasetImage object with the given index in the DatasetImageCollection.

The index specified.The alias of the DatasetImage object with the given index.

Gets the vector dataset that records the information of the DatasetImageCollection.The vector dataset got is a region dataset and cannot be changed.Each region object in the region dataset has a corresponding sub dataset. If the sub dataset have clip region, the region objects will be the clip regions of the sub datasets. If the sub datasets do not have clip regions, the region objects will be the enclosing rectangles of the sub datasets.

The region dataset that records the DatasetGridCollection information.

Get the pixel format of the DatasetImageCollection. See the PixelFormat enumeration for detailed information about the pixel format.

The default value is PixelFormat.RGB.

Gets whether the DatasetImageCollection has pyramid.

Return true if it has pyramid, return false otherwise.

Gets or sets the clipped region of the DatasetImageCollection. The clip region of the DatasetImageCollection is used to control the display extent of all the sub datasets.This property cannot get the clip region of the sub datasets.Note:1. The DatasetImageCollection will not be displayed if the extent of the DatasetImageCollection set by the DatasetImageCollection.SetGeoReference() method do not overlap with the clip region.2. When you reset the extent of the DatasetImageCollection, the clip region of the DatasetImageCollection will not be modified automatically.

Gets or sets the palette of the color of the DatasetImageCollection.Use the color palette of the sub datasets when display DatasetImageCollection.This property cannot get or set the color palette of the sub datasets.

Gets the band number of the DatasetImageCollection.

Occurs before renaming the sub dataset of the DatasetImageCollection.

Occurs after renamed the sub dataset of the DatasetImageCollection.

Occurs when the sub dataset in the DatasetImageCollection is added to the collection.

Occurs before deleting a sub dataset of the DatasetImageCollection.

Occurs after deleted a sub dataset of the DatasetImageCollection.

Occurs before deleting all the sub datasets of the DatasetImageCollection.

Occurs after deleted all the sub datasets of the DatasetImageCollection.

Three operations will trigger the event, there are:1. Occurs when calling the Synchronize() method.2. Occurs when calling the Append() method.3. Occurs when calling the Add(Dictionary<String, String> values) method.

Occurs after changed the location of a sub dataset in the DatasetImageCollection.

The emitter type enumeration.

The particle emitter types that aren't defined.

The point emitter type.

The region emitter type.